Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
NOTICE INVITING SEALED BIDS
West Campus Dental Clinic Phases 3 & 4
Sealed Bids will be received until 3:00 P.M. (Tucson Time), March 17, 2016, by Pima County
Community College District ("Owner"), to do the work required for the Owner's Project known as West
Campus Dental Clinic Phases 3 & 4 ("Project"), which is located in Pima County, Arizona.
A MANDATORY Pre-Bid Conference will be held February 22, 2016 at 10:00 a.m. (Tucson Time) at
the following location:
Pima Community College
West Campus
2202 W. Anklam Rd.
Tucson, AZ 85709
JG05
Attendees will have fifteen minutes after the start time of the meeting to sign in. After that the
attendance sheet will close. Failure to attend the mandatory Pre-Bid Conference will disqualify Bids
received from any bidder not in attendance.
Questions pertaining to this bid must be communicated in writing and be received via email by
February 24, 2016 at 3:00 P.M. (Tucson Time). Questions must be sent to the email address below
and include the specified Bid Number, Project Name and Buyer’s name in the subject field of the email.
Any questions should include a reference to the appropriate page and section number of the bid. E-Mail
questions to: do-bids-proposals@pima.edu . Answers will be posted as an addendum to our website by
5:00 P.M. (Tucson Time) on March 3, 2016.
Buyers Name/Title: Jan Posz, C.P.M., Sr. Buyer
Bids will be opened publicly at the Owner's office, 4905D East Broadway Blvd, Room D232, Tucson
Arizona, at 3:00 P.M. (Tucson Time), March 17, 2016, and read aloud by a representative of the Owner.
All information and Bids submitted by bidders will be made available for public inspection during
regular business hours after an award is made, if any. Any bid received after the date and time listed
above will be returned and not considered.
Copies of the NOTICE INVITING SEALED BIDS, Bid Documents and Forms as well as the College’s
CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR are
available on the Pima Community College Website:
http://www.pima.edu/administrative-services/purchasing/current-requests-for-proposals-bids-quotes.html
One Set of Plans and Specifications for the work are available to selected contractors (additional set are
at own expense) at Reproductions, Inc., 234 E. 6th Street, Tucson, Arizona 85705, phone (520) 6227747.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
The Owner intends to contract, if at all, with the lowest responsive and responsible bidder whose bid
conforms in all material respects to the requirements of the bid documents, including the Plans and
Specifications. "Responsive Bidder" means the bidder who submits a bid that conforms in all material
respects to this Notice Inviting Sealed Bids, Instructions to Bidders and the Plans and Specifications
which are incorporated herein by this reference. "Responsible Bidder" means the bidder who has the
capability to perform the contract requirements and the integrity and reliability to assure complete and
good faith performance and who submits the lowest bid. In order for the bid to be considered, bidders
must complete and submit the Bid form and all other required forms, which are incorporated herein by
reference.
A certified or cashier's check or Bid bond for ten percent (10%) of the Contract Amount proposed by the
bidder must accompany each Bid as a guarantee that the bidder will enter into a contract to perform the
work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications or as liquidated damages in the event of the
bidder's failure or refusal to enter into a contract. The check or bond will be returned to the unsuccessful
bidders. The successful bidder's check or bond will be returned upon the execution of satisfactory bonds
and a contract as described by the bid documents.
It shall be mandatory on the contractor to whom the Contract is awarded, and upon any subcontractor
under him, to comply in every respect with the applicable provisions of the Arizona Revised Statutes
and with all other requirements of the laws of Arizona.
The bidder to whom the Contract is awarded shall furnish the Owner, within five (5) days after the
award, satisfactory Payment and Performance Bonds in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%)
of the Contract Amount stated in the Bid. Individual surety bonds are not acceptable.
The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, to withhold the award of a contract for any reason
it may determine and to hold any or all Bids for a period of forty-five (45) days. Any bid protests
concerning this bid must be filed with the District Purchasing Director no later than the tenth calendar
day following the date of award.
The Owner reserves the right to waive any irregularities in any Bid if such action is determined by the
Owner, in its sole discretion, to be in the best interest of the Owner.
Pima County Community College District
District Office – Purchasing
4905 East Broadway, Room 232
Tucson, Arizona 85709-1420
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
Instructions To Bidders
1
Contract and General Conditions between Owner and Contractor
(Includes Exhibit A - Specifications) Note: Drawings only available at
Reproductions Inc.
2
Bid Form
3
List of Subcontractors
4
Attached
Bid Bond
Payment Bond
Performance Bond
Bidder’s Information
Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens
Federal Debarred List Certification
Affidavit of Non Collusion
Davis Bacon Wage Determination
5
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
SECTION ONE
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.
BIDS
To be entitled to consideration, Bids must be made in accordance with the following instructions:
a.
Before submitting a Bid, each bidder shall examine the Notice Inviting Sealed Bids, these
Instructions to Bidders, the Drawings, Specifications, Contract and General Conditions Between Owner
and Contractor, and all other documents comprising the Contract Documents, and fully inform himself
of all existing conditions and limitations, and include in the Bid a sum to cover the cost of all work
required by the Contract Documents. The failure of any bidder to receive or examine any form,
instrument, addendum, or other document, or visit the site and acquaint himself with conditions existing
there, shall in no way relieve any bidder from obligations with respect to his Bid or the Contract
Documents.
b.
Bids shall be made only upon the form provided therefor. All blank spaces in the form
shall be filled in completely. If some spaces do not apply, so state. Monetary amounts shall be stated
both in writing and in numerals and, in case of any discrepancy between the two, the amounts in writing
shall take precedence. The signature shall be in longhand and shall be that of an individual legally
authorized to sign such form and bind the bidder. The completed form shall be without interlineation,
alteration, or erasure.
c.
Bids shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral, telegraphic, fax
or telephonic bids or modifications shall be considered.
d.
Bids shall be delivered to the place designated in the Notice Inviting Sealed Bids on or
before the date and hour set for the opening of bids. Bids shall be enclosed in an opaque, sealed
envelope, bearing the Bid Number, the title of the Project and the name of the bidder, except for that
portion of the Bid bearing the title "List of Subcontractors and Material Vendors," which shall be
enclosed in a separate, opaque, sealed envelope, as hereinafter specified in these Instructions to Bidders.
It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to deliver his bid before the scheduled closing time. Any bids
received after the scheduled closing time will be returned unopened.
e.
The Contract Amount quoted is to include the furnishing of all materials, plant,
equipment, tools, and all other facilities called for in the Contract Documents, and the performance of all
labor and services necessary or proper for the completion of the Project, except such as may be
otherwise expressly provided for in the Contract Documents.
f.
2.
The Bid form must be used without alteration.
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL VENDORS
a.
For use of the Owner in determining competency and capability of those who will work
on the Owner's Project, and quality and workmanship of those who will supply material to the Owner's
Project, each bidder is required to submit with his bid a list naming the subcontractors who will be used
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
in performing the work. The list shall include any subcontractor that might be used in the event any or
all of the various alternates are chosen by the Owner. The circumstances under which each subcontractor
will be used must be specifically set forth by identifying alternates for which a particular subcontractor
would be used.
b.
ONE, and only one, subcontractor shall be submitted for each portion of the work for the
Base Bid. The listing of more than one Subcontractor for any separate portion of the work shall be
considered grounds for rejection of the bid by the Owner at the Owner's sole discretion.
c.
The list shall be filled out and enclosed in a separate, opaque, sealed envelope bearing the
title "List of Subcontractors," and the name of the bidder, and the envelope then inserted in the general
bid envelope with the other forms. The list submitted by the successful bidder will be privately opened
and will be retained by the Owner for record as a part of the Bid. The lists of other bidders will be
returned unopened.
d.
No subcontractor not named in such list and approved by the Owner may be employed on
the Owner's Project without express written permission of the Owner, notwithstanding any other
provision of the Contract Documents which may be interpreted to the contrary. Should a change in the
approved list become necessary in the opinion of the successful bidder, a written request shall be
submitted to the Owner stating the reason for the change, and written approval of the Owner must be
obtained before such change is made. This provision shall apply to work listed to be performed by the
bidder, as well as work listed to be performed by vendors or subcontractors.
e.
By this requirement of a List of Subcontractors, the Owner does not establish any
contractual relation between the Owner and any subcontractor, nor will the Owner inquire into
contractual or other relations of the bidder with any subcontractor, nor does this list establish limits to
the contracts between the bidder and any subcontractor. The sole purpose and function of such
requirement is set forth in the first sentence of the first paragraph of this section.
f.
If prior to the signing of the Contract the Owner has a reasonable objection to any person
or organization on the List of Subcontractors, the Owner shall notify the apparent successful bidder in
writing of such objection. Failure of the Owner to make an objection to any person or organization on
the list prior to the award shall constitute acceptance of such person or organization except in the case
where a subcontractor is later found not to be qualified by law.
g.
If, prior to the signing of the Contract, regardless of whether the Owner has evidenced
any intention to award the Contract to Contractor or not, the Owner has a reasonable and substantial
objection to any person or organization on such list, and refuses in writing to accept such person or
organization except where such refusal is a result of the failure of a subcontractor to qualify by law, the
apparent successful bidder may, prior to the signing, withdraw his bid without forfeiture of bid security.
If the bidder submits an acceptable substitute the Owner may, at his discretion, accept or disqualify the
bid.
3.
BASE BID AND ALTERNATES
The Base Bid shall include all work as set forth on the Drawings, in the Specifications, and in all
Contract Documents, plus the specified Contingency Reserve Fund and Cash Allowance, if any.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
Alternate bid items are described in the Specifications and indicated on the Bid. The Owner shall have
the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination and to determine the low bidder on the basis
of the sum of the Base Bid and the Alternates accepted.
4.
BID SECURITY
All Bids shall be accompanied by the bid security in the form and amount as published in the
Notice Inviting Sealed Bids and as acceptable to the Owner, and shall be payable without conditions to
the Owner as a guarantee that the bidder, if awarded the Contract, will promptly execute such Contract
in accordance with the Bid and in the manner and form required by the Contract Documents, and will
furnish good and sufficient bonds for the faithful performance of the work and payment of all claimants
supplying labor or materials. The bid security must be enclosed in the same envelope with the Bid.
Note: The Notice Inviting Sealed Bids requires that this bid security will also serve as liquidated
damages in the event the Contractor fails or refuses to enter into a contract. Mistake shall not
excuse any failure or refusal to enter into a contract.
5.
WITHDRAWAL OF BID
Any bidder may withdraw his Bid, either personally or by telegraphic or written request, at any
time before the scheduled closing time for receipt of Bids. No bid may be withdrawn for at least fortyfive (45) days after the date the bids are opened, nor may any bid be withdrawn between the scheduled
closing time for receipt of Bids and the time the bids are actually opened.
6.
INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
Following the Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference, all prospective bidders shall have an opportunity
to submit questions or request clarifications to drawings or other Contract Documents in writing to the
Owner regarding the Project. The due date for these questions or clarifications is specified on the
NOTICE INVITING SEALED BIDS for the project. The Owner shall post a response or Addendum to
the Bid documentation on the College website under the Bid Number. The bidder submitting a request
for interpretations will be responsible for its prompt delivery. All requests for interpretations shall be
made in writing. The Owner will not be responsible for any explanations or interpretations except those
duly issued in the form of written addenda. Receipt of any addenda so issued during the time of bidding
shall be included in the bid and shall be acknowledged in the Bid and be made a part of the Contract
Documents.
7.
APPROVAL OF EQUAL ITEMS OF EQUIPMENT AND/OR MATERIALS BEFORE
SUBMISSION OF BIDS
Products are generally specified by reference standard and/or manufacturer's name and model
number or trade name. When specified only by reference standard, the bidder may select any product
meeting this standard by any manufacturer. When several products or manufacturers are specified as
being equally acceptable, the bidder has the option of using any product and manufacturer combination
listed.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
When a specific manufacturer, installer (where pre-qualification is required), trade name or
material is specified, or indicated, it is to establish a standard of quality and shall not be construed as
limiting competition. If the bidder desires to use other than that specified, he shall request approval of
such substitution in the manner specified below:
a.
Prior Approvals: Substitutions will be considered only when a written request has been
submitted by a bidder, who shall be a general contractor qualified to submit a bid to the Owner, for
approval at least fourteen (14) calendar days prior to the original date for receipt of bids. No approvals
will be granted to suppliers, distributors or subcontractors. Each request shall include all information
requested hereinafter. If the Owner approves any proposed substitution, such approval shall be set forth
in an Addendum.
b.
Submittal Requirements: All requests shall contain sufficient information, descriptive
brochures, drawings, performance and test data, samples or other data as is necessary for complete
evaluation and shall indicate by direct comparison how the proposed substitution compares with the
specified equipment or material in every material respect with that specified. Each submittal shall be
well marked and identified as to the type and kind of items proposed to be substituted. It is the sole
responsibility of the bidder to submit complete descriptive and technical information so that the Owner
can make a complete evaluation. Lack of sufficient information will be cause for rejection. References
to catalogs will not be acceptable. Submittals shall be accompanied by a written statement from the
manufacturer or contractor on his letterhead certifying that the proposed substitution meets or exceeds
that specified in all aspects and that it will coordinate properly with related construction. Any redesign
necessitated by the substitution shall be paid for by the Contractor.
c.
As set forth in the Specifications, the bidder’s request for prior approval shall include,
without limitation:
(1)
Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with the
Contract Documents.
(2)
(3)
Product identification, including manufacturer's name, address and telephone
number.
A tabulation comparing the specified product manufacturer’s complete product
description, performance test data and reference standards with the same
information for the proposed products.
(4)
Samples and colors of the proposed products.
(5)
Names and addresses of similar projects in which the proposed product was used
and the date of installation.
(6)
For construction methods, include a detailed description for proposed method and
drawings illustrating same.
(7)
Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or
method specified.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
d.
Any bidders, other than the bidder who requested a particular substitution, who choose to
utilize a prior approved item, as approved by Addendum, shall comply with all terms and conditions of
the original prior approval submittal. All provisions of this Paragraph 8 regarding using of substitutions
shall apply to any bidder who chooses to utilize such substitution.
8.
BIDDERS INTERESTED IN MORE THAN ONE BID
No person, firm, or corporation shall be allowed to make, file, or be interested in more than one
bid for the same work. A person, firm, or corporation who has submitted a sub-bid to a bidder, or who
has quoted prices on materials to a bidder, is not thereby disqualified from submitting a sub-bid or
quoting prices to other bidders.
9.
ACCEPTANCE OR REJECTION OF BIDS
The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informalities in the Bids
received. The award of the Contract, if made by the Owner, will be made to the responsible and
qualified bidder submitting the lowest bid, but the Owner shall determine in its own discretion whether a
bidder is responsible and qualified to perform the Contract, what bid is the lowest, and whether it is in
the interest of the Owner to accept the bid.
10.
AGREEMENT AND BONDS
The form of agreement which the successful bidder will be required to execute, and the forms
and amounts of surety bonds required at the time of execution of the agreement, are included in the
Contract Documents and must be carefully examined by the bidder. As noted in the instructions, all bids
must include any exceptions requested from the Contract Documents; subsequent requests for deviation
from the Contract Document will not be considered. All sureties must be authorized to do business in
Arizona, listed on the U.S. Department of Treasury's list of approved sureties, and must be satisfactory
to the Owner. No individual sureties are acceptable. The successful bidder must furnish the required
bonds and insurance certificates and commence work within five (5) days after issuance of the Notice of
Intent to Award and Notice to Proceed. By submission of a Bid, a bidder will be deemed, and agrees to
be so treated, to have actual notice of every term of every Contract Document.
11.
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
The successful bidder, before the award of the Contract, shall submit to the Owner non-collusion
affidavits covering the bidder and all subcontractors.
12.
LIST OF COMPARABLE PROJECTS
If requested by Owner, the bidder must submit, within 24 hours after bid opening, a list of all
projects undertaken within the three (3) years immediately preceding the bid date and a Contractor's
Qualification Statement in the form of AIA A-305. Such list shall include the name, address and phone
number of the owner and the architect of each project, the contract amount, and the starting date. Bidder
consents to the use of the list and Qualification Statement by Owner to inquire into bidder's fitness,
capabilities and responsibility in connection with Owner's consideration of the bid. Bidder agrees to hold
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
harmless the Owner, the Architect, and each owner and architect listed from any action or claim that
might arise from any adverse report received by Owner concerning bidder's performance on the projects
listed. Failure to furnish a complete list and Qualification Statement as required herein may be
considered grounds for rejection of the bid by the Owner, at the Owner's sole discretion.
13.
BID PROTESTS
Any bid protests concerning this bid must be filed with the District Purchasing Director no later
than the tenth calendar day following the date of award at: 4905D East Broadway Blvd, Tucson, Arizona
85708-1420.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
SECTION TWO
CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS
BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
THIS AGREEMENT, made this ______ day of ____________, 201__, by and between
_________________________________________________________,
hereinafter
called
the
"Contractor," and Pima County Community College District, operating in Pima County, hereinafter
called the "Owner":
W I T N E S S E T H:
That the Contractor and the Owner agree as follows:
ARTICLE 1
THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.1
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
1.1.1
The following listed documents constitute the Contract Documents, and they are all as
fully a part of the Contract and General Conditions as if herein repeated:
1. This Contract and General Conditions between Owner and Contractor; Exhibit B to
Construction Agreement Supplemental Conditions for Federal Grant-Funded
Construction Projects, Davis Bacon Wage Determination.
2. Project Manual
3. Notice of Award and Receipt of Notice
4. Notice to Proceed and Receipt of Notice
5. Performance Bond and Payment Bond.
6. Addenda Nos. __________________ dated _______________.
7. Specifications and Drawings (as modified by the above-referenced Addenda and selected
alternates as listed herein, if any) as set forth in the bid document, incorporated herein by
reference.
8. Bid Form, dated ______________________.
9. Instructions to Bidders.
10. Notice Inviting Sealed Bids.
11. Certificates of Insurance.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
1.1.2
In the event of any inconsistency between any of the terms of the before enumerated
documents, such inconsistencies shall be resolved by giving precedence to the terms of the lowest
numbered of the above numbered documents. Anything in these Contract Documents to the contrary
notwithstanding, the provisions of all pertinent general public laws of the State of Arizona in effect at
the time of the execution of this Contract shall be a part of the Contract between the parties and shall
take precedence over all of the other Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 2
SCOPE OF WORK
2.1
As required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall furnish and install all of the
materials and labor and perform all of the work for the Owner's Project known as West Campus Dental
Clinic Phases 3 & 4 ("Project" herein).
ARTICLE 3
CONTRACT AMOUNT, TIME, LIQUIDATED DAMAGES AND EARLY COMPLETION BONUS
3.1
CONTRACT AMOUNT.
The Owner shall pay the Contractor the sum of
_______________________________________ Dollars ($______________) for the Base Bid and
alternates ___________, which is the Contract Amount. This sum is subject to additions or deductions
made in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents.
3.2
CONTRACT TIME. See Schedule in Project Manual
3.3
N/A
3.3.1
N/A
3.3.2
An Early Completion Bonus N/A
3.4
CHANGE ORDERS. Limits on the amount of overhead and profit allowed on Change
Orders are specified in Article 15. An item of additional work or change in Plans and Specifications
which involves an extra cost shall be valid only if authorized by Change Order in accordance with
Article 15 of this Contract and General Conditions.
ARTICLE 4
DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS
4.1
OWNER, OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE AND CONTRACTOR. The Owner,
Owner’s Representative and the Contractor are those herein defined in this Contract and General
Conditions. They are treated throughout the Contract Documents as though each were of the singular
number and masculine gender.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
4.2
SUBCONTRACTOR. See Article 8.
4.3
NOTICE. See Articles 7 and 10.
4.4
TIME. See Articles 3 and 11.
4.5
COST. The term "Cost" shall include all charges, costs, losses and expenditures of every
kind whatsoever for the Work or portion thereof to which reference is made with respect to this term.
4.6
Article 11.
FINISH, SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL COMPLETION DATES. See
4.7
MODIFICATIONS. See also Article 1. A Modification is:
.1
A written amendment to the Contract and General Conditions signed by
.2
A Change Order properly signed by all parties pursuant to Paragraph 15.1;
all parties;
or
.3
A Field Order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Owner
pursuant to Paragraph 15.4.
A Modification may be made only after execution of the Contract and General Conditions.
4.8
CONTRACT. The Contract consists of all the Contract Documents enumerated in
Article 1. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and
supersedes all prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract
may be amended or modified only by a Modification as defined in Paragraph 4.7.
4.9
WORK.
The term "Work" includes, without limitation, furnishing all labor,
administrative services and supervision necessary to produce the construction required by the Contract
Documents and furnishing and installing all materials and equipment incorporated, or to be
incorporated, in such construction to complete the Project.
4.10
PROJECT. The Project is the total construction designed by the Owner of which the
Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part.
4.11
EXECUTION, CORRELATION, INTENT AND INTERPRETATIONS OF THE
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
4.11.1
The Contract and General Conditions shall be signed by the Owner and the Contractor.
By executing the Contract and General Conditions, each party accepts and agrees to be bound by each of
the Contract Documents listed in Article 1.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
4.11.2
By executing the Contract and General Conditions, the Contractor represents and
warrants that he has visited the site, has familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the
Work is to be performed, including any and all relevant weather conditions or records or both, and
correlated all of his observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
4.11.3
The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by any one shall be as
binding as if required by all. The intention of the Contract Documents is to include, without limitation,
all labor, materials, equipment and other items as provided in Subparagraph 7.4.1 necessary for the
proper execution and completion of the Work. Words and abbreviations which have well known
technical or trade meanings are used herein in accordance with such recognized meanings.
4.11.4
The organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and the
arrangements of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors
or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade, or constituting part of the Contract or
having any legal or contractual significance.
4.11.5
Written interpretations necessary for the proper execution or progress of the Work, in the
form of drawings or otherwise will be issued with reasonable promptness by the Owner in accordance
with any schedule agreed upon, or with reasonable promptness in any case. Such interpretations shall be
consistent with and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents.
4.12
COPIES FURNISHED AND OWNERSHIP.
4.12.1
The Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, all copies of Contract Documents
reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work as determined by the Owner in his sole discretion.
4.12.2
All Drawings, Specifications and other data, and copies thereof, furnished to the
Contractor are and shall remain the property of the Owner. They are not to be used on any other project,
and, with the exception of one set for each party to the Contract, are to be returned to the Owner upon
request at the completion of the Work.
4.12.3
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that each Subcontractor, Subsubcontractor and supplier has a current set of those portions of the Construction Documents that may be
required for proper execution of their respective portions of the Work.
ARTICLE 5
OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE
Drawings and Specifications for this Project were prepared by GLHN Architects and Engineers, Inc.,
(Owner’s Representative, hereinafter referred to as ‘OR’), who shall act as OR pursuant to the Contract
Documents.
5.1
OR: DEFINITION
5.1.1
The OR is the person or organization identified as such in this Contract and General
Conditions, and the term OR means the OR or his authorized representative.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
5.1.2
Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship
between the OR and the Contractor.
5.2
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT.
5.2.1
The OR will be the Owner's representative during construction, until final payment and
including the warranty period. The OR will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner, unless
otherwise modified by written instrument which will be shown to the Contractor. The OR will advise
and consult with the Owner, and all of the Owner's instructions to the Contractor shall be issued through
the OR, except where the Owner deems direct communication with the Contractor necessary. Any
direct communication between Owner and Contractor shall be copied to the OR. The OR and any person
designated by Owner as Special Agent shall be Special Agents acting for and on behalf of the Owner for
the duration of this Contract.
5.2.2
The OR shall at all times have access to the Work wherever it is in preparation and
progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the OR may perform their functions
under the Contract Documents.
5.2.3
Neither the OR's authority to act under this Contract, nor any decision made by him in
good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority, shall give rise to any duty of responsibility
of the OR to the Contractor, any Subcontractor or material supplier, any of their agents or employees, or
any other performing any of the Work.
5.2.4
The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the OR as the Owner's
representative during construction as set forth in Articles 1 through 18, inclusive, of this Contract and
General Conditions will not be modified or extended without written consent of the Owner and the OR,
notice of which will be given to the Contractor.
5.2.5
The OR will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, any
Subcontractors or Material Vendors, or any of their agents or employees, or any other persons
performing any of the Work.
5.2.6
In case of the termination of the employment of the OR, the Owner shall appoint a
successor, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former OR.
ARTICLE 6
OWNER – CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION
6.1
DEFINITION. The Owner is the person or organization identified as such in the
Contract and General Conditions.
6.2
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT.
6.2.1
The OR will provide general administration of this Contract, including performance of
the functions hereinafter described.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
6.2.2
The Owner and the OR shall at all times have access to the Work wherever it is in
preparation and progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the Owner and the
OR may perform their functions under the Contract Documents.
6.2.3
The OR shall make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress and quality of the
Work and to determine if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. These
visits shall be of the frequency necessary to adequately observe the progress of the Work. On the basis
of his on-site observations, he shall endeavor to guard against defects and deficiencies in the Work of
the Contractor. The Owner shall not be responsible for the Contractor's ways and means, methods,
techniques and procedures in the construction of the Project or for enforcement of safety requirements
on the Project.
6.2.4
Based on such observations and the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the OR will
make recommendations as to the amounts owing to the Contractor and will issue Certificates for
Payment in such amounts, as provided in Subparagraph 12.4.1.
6.2.5
The OR will be, in the first instance, the interpreter of the requirements of the Contract
Documents and the judge of the performance thereunder by the Contractor, except where otherwise
provided herein. The OR will promptly render such interpretations as he may deem necessary for the
proper execution or progress of the Work.
6.2.6
All claims, disputes and other matters in question relating to the execution or progress of
the Work, payment, time extension or interpretation of the Contract Documents shall be submitted to the
Owner in the manner provided by Subparagraph 12.4.4, within the time limits prescribed in
Subparagraph 15.2.1, for decision by the Owner, as the subject of the matter may require, which will be
rendered in writing within a reasonable time.
6.2.7
The Owner's decisions in matters relating to artistic effect will be final if consistent with
the intent of the Contract Documents.
6.2.8
If a decision of the Owner states that it is final but subject to appeal, no claim, dispute or
other matter covered by such decision may be made later than thirty (30) days after the date on which
the party making the demand received the decision.
6.2.9
The OR shall have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract
Documents. Whenever, in the OR's reasonable opinion, he considers it necessary or advisable to ensure
the proper implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, he will require the Contractor to
stop the Work or any portion thereof, or to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided
in Subparagraph 10.8.2, whether or not such Work be then fabricated, installed or completed.
6.2.10
The OR will review Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples promptly as provided in
Subparagraphs 7.12.1 through 7.12.8, inclusive.
6.2.11
The OR will prepare Change Orders in accordance with Article 15 and will have
authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving extra cost as provided in Subparagraph 15.3.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
6.2.12
The OR will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion
and Final Completion and shall issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion and of Final Completion.
He will receive written guarantees, record drawings, maintenance manuals and related documents
required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor.
6.2.13
The Owner will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, any
Subcontractors or Material Vendors, or any of their agents or employees, or any other persons
performing any of the Work.
6.3
INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER.
6.3.1
The Owner shall furnish all surveys describing the physical characteristics, legal limits
and utility locations for the site of the Project.
6.3.2
Information or services under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner with
promptness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work.
6.3.3
All final decisions concerning Change Orders, Payments, Substantial Completion, Final
Completion, Liquidated Damages and Contract Time shall be reserved to the Owner, and this provision
of the Contract shall take precedence over any other term hereof.
6.3.4
The foregoing are in addition to other duties and responsibilities of the Owner
enumerated herein and especially those in respect to Work by Owner or by separate contractors,
payments, completion and insurance in Articles 9, 12 and 14, respectively.
ARTICLE 7
CONTRACTOR
7.1
DEFINITION.
7.1.1
The Contractor is the person or organization identified as such in this Contract and
General Conditions and the term "Contractor" means the Contractor or his authorized representative.
The Contractor, and all Subcontractors employed on the Project, shall possess valid Arizona Contractor's
Licenses as required by law.
7.1.2
Whenever the words "as may be directed," "suitable," "or equal," "as approved," or other
words of similar intent and meaning are used within the Contract Documents implying that judgment or
discretion is to be exercised or a decision is to be made, it is understood that it is the judgment,
discretion or decision of the OR to which reference is made.
7.1.3
All materials and articles of any kind necessary for this Work are subject to the approval
of the Owner as provided in the Contract Documents.
7.1.4
After execution of the Contract, changes of brand named, trade named, trademarked,
patented articles, or any other substitutions will be allowed only by written order signed by the Owner,
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
in which case the Owner shall receive all benefit of the difference in cost involved, except where choice
of material or method is designated "or equal" or "acceptable alternates" in the Specifications.
7.2
REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND EXAMINATION OF SITE.
7.2.1
By executing this Contract, the Contractor warrants that he has examined the site and
carefully studied and compared the Contract and General Conditions, Drawings, Specifications,
Addenda, and all other Contract Documents before so executing the Contract. The Contractor shall at
once report to the Owner any error, inconsistency or omission he may discover. The Contractor shall
not be liable to the Owner for any damage resulting from any such errors, inconsistencies or omissions
so long as the Owner is notified thereof, unless discovery of such error, inconsistency or omission
should have been made by careful examination of the Contract Documents prior to submitting a Bid.
The Contractor shall do no Work without appropriate Contract Documents, or where required, approved
Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or interpretations from the Owner.
7.2.2
The Contractor shall be required to use for data and dimensions, figures marked on the
drawings in preference to what the drawings may measure to scale. In the absence of figured
dimensions, the Owner shall be notified and the dimensions provided within a reasonable time.
Drawings shall not be scaled in the absence of figured dimensions.
7.2.3
The Contractor shall verify all dimensions shown and check all measurements in
connection with any present building or buildings, levels of grades, walks, driveways, or other existing
conditions, before executing any work. Contractor shall immediately report to the Owner any
discrepancies between the Plans and actual field conditions. Failure to report any discrepancy within 24
hours after discovery will constitute a waiver of any claim arising out of such discrepancy. This
provision shall have precedence over any other notice provisions contained herein.
7.3
SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES. The Contractor shall
supervise the Work, using his best skill and attention. He shall be solely responsible for all construction
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work
under the Contract.
7.4
LABOR AND MATERIALS.
7.4.1
Unless otherwise specifically noted, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor,
materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, heat, utilities, transportation and
any other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, whether
temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. No
materials shall be incorporated into this Work that contains any asbestos.
7.4.2
Any work necessary to be performed after regular working hours, on Sundays or legal
holidays, shall be performed without additional expense to the Owner unless approved in advance by
Change Order.
7.4.3
The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his
employees and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task assigned
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
to him. When requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall remove from the Project any person who
commits trespass or is, in the opinion of the Owner, disorderly, dangerous, insubordinate, incompetent
or violates any policies of the Owner. The owner will document the request within 1 work day if
requested by the Contractor. The Contractor shall keep the Owner harmless from damages or claims for
compensation that may occur in the enforcement of this requirement. The Contractor shall not permit
the use of tobacco products (except in designated areas), alcohol or illegal drugs on the project site.
7.5
WARRANTY.
7.5.1
The Contractor warrants to the Owner that all materials and equipment furnished under
this Contract will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all Work will be of good quality, free from
faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All Work not so conforming to
these standards may be considered defective. If required by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish
satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.
7.5.2
The warranty provided in Paragraphs 7.5 and 18.1 shall be in addition to and not in
limitation of any other warranty or remedy available pursuant to law or the Contract Documents.
7.6
TAXES. The Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, transaction privilege and
other taxes required by law in connection with the performance of this Contract, whether in force as of
the date of this Contract or later imposed. If the Contractor's principal place of business is not in
Arizona, Contractor shall post a bond for taxes in compliance with A.R.S. § 42-5007 and furnish
evidence of such bond to Owner prior to submitting any application for payment hereunder
7.7
PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES.
7.7.1
Unless otherwise provided in the Plans, Specifications or by Addendum, the Contractor
shall secure and pay for all permits, fees, inspections and re-inspections necessary for the proper
execution and completion of the Work, including, without limitation, the following permits and fees:
building, plumbing, mechanical, electrical permits, water meters, water service fees, sewer connection
fees, sewer fees or assessments, gas service fees and electric service fees payable to the utility
companies. The Contractor shall procure and pay for all necessary utilities for the Project, including
temporary utility hook-ups and utilities used in course of construction.
7.7.2
The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations and orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work. If the
Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith in any respect, he
shall promptly notify the Owner in writing. If the Contractor performs any Work knowing it to be
contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner, he shall
assume full responsibility therefor and shall bear all costs attributable thereto, including any attorneys’
fees incurred by Owner in connection therewith.
7.8
SUPERINTENDENT. The Contractor shall employ a competent Superintendent and
necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during the progress of the Work. The
Contractor shall assign to the Project a Superintendent prior to the pre-construction meeting and shall
furnish to the Owner the Superintendent's resume. The Superintendent shall be satisfactory to the
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
Owner and shall not be changed except with the consent of the Owner, unless the Superintendent proves
to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in his employ. The Superintendent shall represent
the Contractor, and all communications given to the Superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the
Contractor. Important communications will be confirmed in writing. Other communications will be so
confirmed on written request in each case.
7.9
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THOSE PERFORMING THE WORK. The Contractor shall
be responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of all his employees and all Subcontractors, their
agents and employees, and all other persons performing any of the Work or supplying any material or
equipment to be incorporated in the Work under a contract of any nature with the Contractor.
7.10
PROGRESS SCHEDULE AND REPORTS.
7.10.1
The Contractor, within fourteen (14) days after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare
and submit for the Owner's review his planned Construction Progress Schedule for the Work as provided
in the Specifications. The Construction Progress Schedule shall be related to the entire Project and shall
indicate the dates for the starting and completion of the various components and phases of construction
and shall be revised monthly or as required by the conditions of the Work, upon request of and subject to
the review of the Owner. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Specifications in
connection with the preparation and revision of the Construction Progress Schedule. The Contractor
agrees to promptly respond to all inquiries by the Owner concerning significant deviation of the progress
of construction from the Construction Progress Schedule. Failure to timely respond to such request or
significant delay from the Construction Progress Schedule may result in progress payments being
withheld. Approval of the Construction Progress Schedule by the Owner shall not relieve the Contractor
from his obligation to complete the Project within the Contract Time.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner four (4) copies of a complete list of all major
items of architectural, mechanical, plumbing and electrical equipment and materials within fourteen (14)
days of the Start Date. Include projected dates of submittal of all items of material for which submittals
are required and delivery dates of all items of material and equipment that are considered by the Owner,
in his sole discretion, critical or which may require, in order to obtain, long lead time. Submit a
complete list. A partial list will not be acceptable unless prior permission is obtained from the Owner.
The Contractor shall prepare and provide to the Owner a weekly Construction Schedule Status Report
which will inform the Owner that, with respect to each category of the Construction Progress Schedule
and each item on the material delivery date list, the work or delivery is: (a) on schedule; (b) behind
schedule, but will not interfere with the completion of the Project within the Contract Time specified in
the Contract; or (c) behind schedule and may prevent the completion of the Project within the Contract
Time. In the event that the Construction Schedule Status Report indicates that a delay has occurred or
may occur that may prevent the completion of the Project within the Contract Time because the Work in
a particular category is behind schedule or a delay in material deliveries is anticipated, the Construction
Schedule Status Report shall contain a statement of what corrective measures are being undertaken by
the Contractor.
7.10.2
For purposes of determining time extensions resulting from additional work ordered by
the Owner, adverse weather or other delays, all float or slack time in the Construction Progress Schedule
shall be owned and controlled by the Owner. The Owner shall allow use of such float or slack time by
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
the Contractor as long as such allocation of float or slack time does not adversely affect the completion
date of the Project. No additional time shall be allowed for claims for delay, whether or not caused by
or the fault of the Owner, if such delay is less than the available float or slack time available for the
particular task.
7.11
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AT THE SITE.
7.11.1
The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one (1) copy of all Drawings,
Specifications, Addenda, approved Shop Drawings, Change Orders, other Modifications, and
manufacturers' printed specifications and recommendations, in good order and marked carefully, legibly
and accurately to record on a daily basis all changes made during construction, all of which shall be
available to the Owner at all times. These Drawings shall be delivered to the OR upon completion of the
Work. The Drawings indicating the changes shall be maintained throughout the duration of the Project
and are the Record Drawings which shall be transferred to electronic media by the Owner
7.11.2
The Contractor shall also submit to the Owner for his record three (3) copies each (unless
otherwise specified) of all manufacturers' maintenance manuals, printed specifications and
recommendations, which by reference in the several divisions of the Specifications are a part thereof.
7.12
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES.
7.12.1
Shop Drawings and Product Data are drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules,
performance charts, brochures and other data which are required by the Contract Documents and are
prepared by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or
distributor, and which illustrate or describe some portion of the Work.
7.12.2
Samples are physical examples furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials,
equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the Work will be judged.
7.12.3
The Contractor shall review, correct any errors, stamp with his approval and submit, with
promptness and in orderly sequence so as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other
contractor, all Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples required by the Contract Documents or
subsequently by the OR as covered by Modifications. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples shall
be properly identified as specified, or as the OR may require. At the time of submission, the Contractor
shall inform the Owner in writing of any deviation in the Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples from
the requirements of the Contract Documents. The OR's responsibility for reviewing Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples and other submissions of the Contractor are limited to those required by the
Contract Documents or Modifications to the Contract Documents.
7.12.4
By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, the Contractor
thereby represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria,
materials, catalog numbers and similar data, and that he has checked and coordinated all Shop Drawings,
Product Data and Samples with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
7.12.5
The OR will review and take other appropriate action with respect to Shop Drawings,
Product Data and Samples with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay, but only for
conformance with the Contract Documents.
7.12.6
The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the OR to comply with the
Contract Documents and shall resubmit the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings,
Product Data or new Samples until approved. The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing or
on resubmitted Shop Drawings and Product Data to revisions other than the corrections requested by the
Owner on previous submissions.
7.12.7
The OR's review of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples shall not relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
the Contractor has informed the Owner in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the
OR has given written approval to the specific deviation, nor shall the Owner's approval relieve the
Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples.
7.12.8
No portion of the Work requiring a Shop Drawing, Product Data or Sample submission
shall be commenced until the submission has been approved by the Owner. All such portions of the
Work shall be in accordance with approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
7.13
CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK. Any cutting and patching required shall be
performed in accordance with instructions contained in the technical specifications of this project.
7.14
CLEANING UP.
7.14.1
The Contractor at all times during the progress of the Work shall keep the buildings and
site free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by his operations. At the completion of
the Work, he shall remove all his waste materials and rubbish from and about the Project, as well as all
his tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials not specified to be left at the site, and
shall clean all glass surfaces and other areas or materials as specified, and leave the Work "broom-clean"
or its equivalent, except where more stringent cleaning requirements are provided by the Contract
Documents.
7.14.2
If the Contractor fails to satisfactorily clean up, the Owner will do so and the cost thereof
shall be charged to the Contractor as provided in Paragraph 10.6.
7.15
COMMUNICATIONS. The Contractor shall forward all written communications to the
OR except where otherwise required herein.
7.16
INDEMNIFICATION. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall
defend, indemnify and hold harmless the District, its agents, representatives, officers, directors, officials
and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including but not limited to
attorney fees, court costs, and the cost of appellate proceedings), relating to, arising out of, or alleged to
have resulted from the acts, errors, mistakes, omissions, work or services of the Contractor, its
employees, agents, or any tier of subcontractors in the performance of this Contract. Contractor’s duty
to defend, hold harmless and indemnify the District, its agents, representatives, officers, directors,
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
officials and employees shall arise in connection with any claim, damage, loss or expense that is
attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, death, or injury to, impairment, or destruction of property
including loss of use resulting therefrom, caused by any acts, errors, mistakes, omissions, work or
services in the performance of this Contract including any employee of the Contractor or any tier of
subcontractor or any other person for whose acts, errors, mistakes, omissions, work or services the
Contractor be legally liable.
The amount and type of insurance coverage requirements set forth herein will in no way be construed as
limiting the scope of the indemnity in this paragraph.
ARTICLE 8
SUBCONTRACTORS
8.1
DEFINITION.
8.1.1
A Subcontractor is a person or organization who has a direct contract with the Contractor
to supply materials or equipment or to perform any of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is
referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender and
means a Subcontractor or his authorized representative.
8.1.2
A Sub-subcontractor is a person or organization who has a direct or indirect contract with
the Subcontractor to perform any of the Work at the site, or to supply any materials or equipment to be
used in the Project. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as
singular in number and masculine in gender, and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized
representative thereof.
8.1.3
Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual, master-servant
or principal-agent relationship between the Owner, and any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor.
8.2
AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF
THE WORK.
8.2.1
If, after the actual signing of this Agreement, the Owner refuses to accept any person or
organization on the Subcontractor and Material Vendor List for good and substantial reason, the
Contractor shall submit an acceptable substitute and the Contract Amount shall be increased or
decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution and an appropriate Change Order
shall be issued. However, no increase in the Contract Amount shall be allowed for any such substitution
unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting a name with respect thereto.
8.2.2
The Contractor shall not contract with any Subcontractor proposed to perform portions of
the Work designated in the Construction Documents, or if none is so designated, with any Subcontractor
proposed for the principal portions of the Work who has not been accepted by the Owner. The
Contractor will not be required to contract with any Subcontractor against whom he has a reasonable
objection.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
8.2.3
If the Owner requires a change of any proposed Subcontractor previously accepted by it,
the Contract Amount shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such
change and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued.
8.2.4
The Contractor shall not make any substitution for any Subcontractor who has been
accepted by the Owner unless the substitution is approved in writing by the Owner.
8.2.5
Notwithstanding any provisions to the contrary in the Contract Documents, if any
Subcontractor listed is found not to be qualified to perform public work as a matter of law, upon written
notice from the Owner, the Contractor shall submit a qualified Subcontractor for the Owner's approval
and shall substitute such qualified and approved Subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
8.3
SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS.
8.3.1
All work performed for the Contractor by a Subcontractor shall be pursuant to an
appropriate written agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor (and where appropriate
between Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors) which shall contain provisions that:
.1
preserve and protect the rights of the Owner under the Contract with
respect to the Work to be performed under the subcontract so that the subcontracting thereof
will not prejudice such rights;
.2
require that such work be performed in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents;
.3
require submission to the Contractor of applications for payment under
each subcontract to which the Contractor is a party, in reasonable time to enable the
Contractor to apply for payment in accordance with Article 12;
.4
require that all claims for additional costs, extensions of time, damages for
delays or otherwise with respect to subcontracted portions of the Work shall be submitted to
the Contractor (via any Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor where appropriate) in the
manner provided in the Contract Documents for like claims by the Contractor upon the
Owner;
.5
waive all rights the contracting parties may have against one another for
damages caused by fire or other perils covered by the property insurance described in Article
14, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner
as trustee under Article 14; and
.6
obligate such Subcontractor specifically to consent to the provisions of
this Paragraph 8.3.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
8.4
PAYMENTS TO SUBCONTRACTORS.
8.4.1
The Owner may, on request and at his discretion, furnish to any Subcontractor, if
practicable, information regarding percentages of completion certified to the Contractor on account of
work done by such Subcontractors.
8.4.2
The Owner shall not have any obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any monies to
any Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law.
ARTICLE 9
SEPARATE CONTRACTS
9.1
OWNER'S RIGHT TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS. The Owner reserves the
right to award other contracts in connection with other portions of the Project under conditions similar to
this Contract.
9.2
MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS.
9.2.1
The Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction
to the site and storage of their materials and equipment thereon and the execution of their work, and
shall properly connect and coordinate his Work with theirs.
9.2.2
If any part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon the
work of any other separate contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Owner any
apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and
results. Failure of the Contractor to so inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the other
contractor's work as fit and proper to receive his Work, except as to defects which may develop in the
other separate contractor's work after the execution of the Contractor's Work.
9.2.3
Should the Contractor cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor
on the Project, the Contractor shall, upon written notice, promptly attempt to settle such other
contractor's claim. If such separate contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have
been so sustained, the Owner shall promptly notify the Contractor, who shall defend such proceedings at
the Contractor's expense, and if any judgment against the Owner arises therefrom, the Contractor shall
promptly pay or satisfy it and shall immediately, upon presentation to it of a statement thereof,
reimburse the Owner for all attorneys’ fees and court costs which the Owner has incurred.
9.3
CUTTING AND PATCHING UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS.
9.3.1
The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his Work that may be required
to fit it to receive or be received by the work of other contractors indicated in the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall not endanger any work of any other contractors by cutting, excavating or otherwise
altering any work and shall not cut or alter the work of any other contractor except with the written
consent of the Owner.
9.3.2
therefor.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible
9.4
OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP. If a dispute arises between the separate contractors
as to their responsibility for cleaning up as required by Paragraph 7.14, the Owner may clean up and
charge the cost thereof to the several contractors as the Owner shall determine to be just.
ARTICLE 10
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
10.1
LAW OF THE PLACE. The Contract shall be governed by the law of the State of
Arizona, and any other subordinate jurisdiction in which the Project is located.
10.2
SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. The Owner and the Contractor each binds himself, his
partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to the partners,
successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to all covenants, agreements
and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the
Contract or any part hereof or sublet it as a whole or in part without the written consent of the other, nor
shall the Contractor assign or pledge any monies due or to become due to him hereunder without the
previous written consent of the Owner.
10.3
WRITTEN NOTICE. Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if
delivered in person to the individual for whom it was intended or if delivered at or sent by registered or
certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice.
10.4
CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES. Should either party to the Contract suffer injury or damage
to person or property because of any act or omission of the other party or of any of his employees,
agents or others for whose acts he is legally liable, which claim is not covered by Article 15 hereof, a
claim shall be made in writing to such other party within a reasonable time after the first observance of
such injury or damage.
10.5
PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND. The Contractor shall furnish and
maintain performance and payment bonds as required by Arizona law covering the faithful performance
of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder in such form and amount as the
Owner may prescribe and with such sureties as may be agreeable to the Owner. The premiums shall be
paid by the Contractor. The Contractor shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit such bonds
to the Owner. Individual sureties are not acceptable.
10.6
OWNER'S RIGHT TO COMPLETE THE WORK. If the Contractor defaults or neglects
to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or fails to perform any provision of
the Contract, the Owner may, after seven (7) days written notice to the Contractor and/or his surety, if
any, and without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, proceed to make such other necessary and
reasonable arrangements to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, all at the
expense of the Contractor, including the Owner's attorneys' fees and other costs.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
10.7
ROYALTIES AND PATENTS. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.
He shall defend all suits or claims from infringement of any patent right and shall save the Owner
harmless from loss on account thereof, including Owner's attorneys' fees and court costs, except that
Owner shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular
manufacturer or manufacturers is specified. But, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the design,
process or products specified is an infringement of a patent, he shall be responsible for such loss unless
he promptly gives information to the Owner prior to starting the Work.
10.8
TESTS.
10.8.1
Where the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any
public authority having jurisdiction require any of the Work to be inspected, tested or approved, the
Contractor shall give the OR timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the OR may
observe such inspection, testing or approval. The Owner shall pay the cost of all such tests, except
where otherwise provided herein, and except for retest or re-inspection of Work which fails to comply
with the Contract Documents.
10.8.2
All equipment and materials used in the construction of the Project, especially those upon
which the strength and durability of the structure may depend, shall be subject to adequate inspection
and testing in accordance with accepted standards to establish conformity with Specifications, applicable
codes and standards and suitability for use intended, all as set forth more particularly in the
Specifications.
10.8.3
If after the commencement of the Work the OR determines that any of the Work requires
special inspection, testing or approval which Subparagraph 10.8.1 does not include, he will, upon
written authorization from the OR, order such special inspection, testing or approval, and the Contractor
shall give notice of readiness as in Subparagraph 10.8.1. If such special inspection or testing reveals a
failure of the Work to comply:
.1
with the requirements of the Contract Documents, or
.2
with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority
having jurisdiction over the Work,
the Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including the cost of the Owner's additional services made
necessary by such failure, and the costs of such inspection or testing and other expenses related thereto,
including without limitation Owner's legal fees, if any, incurred in connection with advising Owner of
such failure of compliance; otherwise, the Owner shall bear such costs.
10.8.4
Required certificates of re-inspections or testing to secure compliance with Clauses
10.8.3.1 or 10.8.3.2 above shall be paid for by the Contractor.
10.8.5
If the Owner wishes to observe the inspections, tests or approvals required by this
Paragraph 10.8, he will do so promptly and, where appropriate, at the source of supply.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
10.8.6
Neither the observations of the OR or the Owner in their administration of the
Construction Contract, nor inspections, tests or approvals by persons other than the Contractor, shall
relieve the Contractor from his obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
10.9
LEGAL FEES AND COSTS. The prevailing party shall be entitled to recover its
attorneys’ fees, any costs of suit, any expert witness fees and the actual cost of any test or inspection
incurred in connection with any effort undertaken to enforce any of the terms of this Contract.
ARTICLE 11
TIME AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
11.1
CONTRACT TIME, LIQUIDATED DAMAGES AND RELATED PROVISIONS.
11.1.1
It is understood and agreed that the construction of the Work under the Contract
Documents shall be commenced on the date stated in the Notice to Proceed issued by the Owner and
shall be Substantially Complete by the Contractor no later than the number of consecutive calendar days
from that date, which number is the Contract Time as specified in Paragraph 3.2, herein. The Contract
Time is the period of time from (1) the date specified in the Notice to Proceed as the date upon which
the Contractor is to commence the Work (the "Start Date"), through (2) the date when the agreed time
for Substantial Completion of the construction of the Project expires (the "Finish Date"). The date of
beginning, rate of progress, and time for completion are essential conditions of the Contract, and the
Contractor agrees that said Work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently and uninterruptedly at such
rate of progress as will ensure full completion thereof within the Contract Time specified. It is expressly
agreed that the Contract Time is reasonable.
11.1.2
If the Substantial Completion Date as defined in Subparagraph 11.1.3 for the Project or
any Phase thereof occurs after the expiration of the Contract Time, the Contractor shall pay the Owner
the amount or amounts stated in Article 3 as liquidated damages for each calendar day the Work remains
incomplete after expiration of the Contract Time. These amounts are agreed upon because of the
impracticability and extreme difficulty of ascertaining the actual damages the Owner would sustain. It is
expressly agreed that the amounts of liquidated damages set forth herein are reasonable. Said amounts
may be retained from time to time by the Owner from payments due the Contractor.
11.1.3
The date of the Substantial Completion of the Work, or designated portion thereof, is the
date established by a Certificate of Substantial Completion prepared by the OR when construction is
sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents as they may have been modified by
any Change Orders agreed to by the parties, so that the Owner may occupy the Project, or a designated
portion thereof, if he so elects, for the use for which it is intended. Certification of a designated portion
of the Work by the OR as being "Substantially Complete" and occupancy of that portion thereafter by
the Owner shall neither release, or otherwise operate to excuse, the Contractor from his duty to complete
the remainder of the Work within the Contract Time nor relieve the Contractor from any liability for not
completing expeditiously the remainder of Work.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
11.1.4
The Final Completion Date is the calendar date when all items of the Work are one
hundred percent (100%) finished, with no items of any scope, large or small, outstanding and remaining
to be completed, and all known defective work has been corrected. When the Owner certifies in writing,
pursuant to the terms of Subparagraph 12.6.2, that the Final Completion Date is reached and it is
approved by the Owner, the Contractor may make application for final payment pursuant to
Subparagraph 12.6.2.
11.2
PROGRESS AND COMPLETION.
11.2.1
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.
11.2.2
The Contractor shall begin the Work on the Start Date as defined in Subparagraph 11.1.1.
He shall carry the Work forward expeditiously with adequate forces and shall complete it as required
herein.
11.3
DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME.
11.3.1
If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any cause which
the OR determines may justify the delay, including, but not limited to, unforeseeable cause beyond the
control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, its agents and employees and
Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors and their agents and employees, including, but not restricted to:
acts of God, acts of the public enemy, acts of the Owner, acts of another contractor in performance of a
contract with the Owner, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and
unusually severe weather over the entire Contract Time, then the Contract Time shall be extended by
Change Order for such reasonable time as the OR may determine. No extension of the Contract Time
pursuant to this paragraph shall relieve the Contractor from any obligation attendant upon him under any
of the provisions of this Contract. It is expressly agreed that the Owner's liability for delay from any
cause shall be limited to granting a time extension to the Contractor, and there is no other obligation,
expressed or implied, on the part of the Owner to the Contractor for delay from any cause other than
Owner caused delay. If the Contractor makes a claim for delay, as provided herein, for which he alleges
that the Owner is responsible, which is unreasonable under the circumstances and which was not within
the contemplation of the parties, the Owner agrees to negotiate with the Contractor the validity of such
claim and the amount of damages incurred by the Contractor, if any.
11.3.2
The Contractor's Construction Progress Schedule must reflect the anticipated adverse
weather delays on all weather dependent activities.
11.3.3
All claims for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owner no more than
fifteen (15) days after the occurrence of the delay; otherwise, they shall be waived. In the case of a
continuing cause of delay, only one claim is necessary, and the Contractor shall promptly notify the
Owner in writing of the date of the termination of the continuing cause of delay.
11.3.4
If no schedule or agreement is made stating the dates upon which written interpretations
as set forth in Subparagraph 4.12.5 shall be furnished, then no claim for delay shall be allowed on
account of failure to furnish such interpretations until fifteen (15) days after demand is made for them,
and not then unless such claim is reasonable.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
ARTICLE 12
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
12.1
CONTRACT AMOUNT. The Contract Amount is as stated in this Contract and General
Conditions and is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for the performance of the
Work under the Contract Documents, subject to credits or increases resulting from Change Orders.
12.2
SCHEDULE OF VALUES. Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor
shall submit to the Owner a schedule of values reflecting as nearly as reasonably possible the actual
values of the various components of the Work aggregating the total Contract Amount, prepared in such
form as Owner may require, and supported by such data to substantiate its correctness as the Owner may
require. Each item in the schedule of values shall include its proper share of overhead and profit. This
schedule shall be used only as a basis for the Contractor's Application for Payment.
12.3
PROGRESS PAYMENTS IF PRE-AUTHORIZED BY OWNER
12.3.1
On or about the first day of each calendar month during the course of construction, the
Contractor shall submit to the OR an itemized Application for Payment, which shall be AIA Document
G702 and G703, supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner
may require.
12.3.2
Payments shall be based on the Work actually performed during the preceding calendar
month. Payment may be made for materials not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably
stored at the site under such conditions agreed upon in writing by the Owner.
12.3.3
Material delivered and suitably stored at the site by the Contractor, Subcontractors, Subsubcontractors, or Material Vendors shall be insured to the full value of the material and shall be
suitably stored and protected. Only such material that is in accordance with the Contract Documents
shall be installed into the Work. Until the Final Completion and acceptance of the Work by the Owner,
it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to protect all materials installed in or delivered to the Project.
12.3.4
The Contractor warrants and guarantees that title for all work, materials and equipment
covered by the Contract Documents shall pass to the Owner upon Final Completion and acceptance by
the Owner and that such work, materials and equipment shall be free and clear of all liens, claims,
security interests or encumbrances, hereinafter referred to in this Article 12 as "claims".
12.4
CERTIFICATION OF PAYMENT.
12.4.1
If the Contractor has made Application for Payment as above, the OR shall approve or
modify the Application and forward for payment for such amount as the OR determines to be properly
due, or state in writing the OR's reasons for withholding, in whole or in part, the amount applied for as
provided in Subparagraph 12.5.1.
12.4.2
Owner, that:
The Application for Payment will constitute a representation by the Contractor to the
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
.1 the Work has progressed to the point indicated;
.2 to the best of his knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is
in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a
functioning whole upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests
required by the Contract Documents, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents
correctable prior to Final Completion, and to any specific qualifications stated in his
certification of the Application for Payment); and
.3 the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified.
12.4.3
The Owner shall make a payment to the Contractor on the basis of the value of the Work
actually performed during the preceding calendar month in accordance with Subparagraph 12.3.2, less
the amount of retention specified in Subparagraph 12.4.5 hereof. Such payments shall be made within
thirty (30) days after receipt of Application for Payment. If the Contractor has properly requested the
Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 12.3.1 of this Contract and General Conditions to accept substitute
security, the Owner shall pay to the Contractor one hundred percent (100%) of the value of the Work
actually performed during the preceding calendar month in accordance with this Paragraph 12. If the
Contractor did not request an acceptance of substitute security, made an incomplete or incorrect
assignment or made a legally insufficient assignment of substitute security, as determined by Owner or
Owner's attorney, the Owner shall retain the amount of such approved Application for Payment
specified in Subparagraph 12.4.5 hereof as a guarantee of the complete performance of the Contract.
Any amounts retained or any securities held by Owner shall be returned to the Contractor within sixty
(60) days after the Final Completion Date as specified in Subparagraph 12.6.2 of this Contract and
General Conditions, provided the Contractor has by that time duly furnished the Owner any and all
documents indicated to be furnished by the close out requirements of the Specifications or required for
the proper maintenance and functioning of the Work as a whole. The Contractor shall submit along with
the Application for Payment lien waivers from each subcontractor, materials or equipment supplier, the
aggregate sum of which shall be the amount of the previous progress payment issued to the Contractor.
If lien waivers from all subcontractors, materials or equipment suppliers do not equal the aggregate sum
of the previous progress payment, the Contractor shall submit the following statement along with the
current progress payment request: "I hereby certify as General Contractor on this project that I have
paid all subcontractors, materials or equipment suppliers, for the Work provided in conjunction with the
Project for which I have previously received payment."
12.4.4
In his Application for Payment, or in a separate notice, the Contractor shall include and
itemize, and furnish such supporting particulars as the Owner shall require, all claims for additional
compensation against the Owner arising under the Contract Documents or any covenant thereof, express
or implied, or from any cause whatsoever, within the time limits prescribed in Subparagraph 15.2.1. It is
expressly covenanted that the purpose of this provision is to guard the Owner against surprise claims, to
permit the Owner to investigate claims as the same may arise, and to prevent vexatious litigation of
claims. It is expressly covenanted that the Owner shall have no liability on any claim unless such claim
was submitted in writing at the time and in the manner required hereby.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
12.4.5
The Owner shall retain ten percent (10%) of the amount of each Application for Payment
as insurance of proper performance of the Contract. Once the Contract is fifty percent (50%) complete,
one-half of the retention then held shall be paid to the Contractor provided the Contractor is making
satisfactory progress and there is no specific cause or claim requiring a greater amount to be retained.
After the Contract is fifty percent (50%) completed, five percent (5%) of the amount of each subsequent
Application for Payment shall be retained provided the Contractor is making satisfactory progress on the
Project. If at any time the Owner determines that the Contractor is not making satisfactory progress,
then the Owner may retain ten percent (10%) of all subsequent Applications for Payment.
12.4.6
No certificate for a progress payment, nor an acceptance of any security in lieu of the
cash retention, nor any progress payment, nor any partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the
Owner, shall constitute an acceptance of any Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.
12.5
PAYMENTS WITHHELD.
12.5.1
The OR may decline to certify payment and may withhold his Certificate in whole or in
part if, in his opinion, he is unable to make representations to the Owner as provided in Subparagraph
12.4.2. The OR may also decline to certify any Applications for Payment or, because of subsequently
discovered evidence or subsequent inspections, he may nullify the whole or any part of any Certificate
for Payment previously issued to such extent as may be necessary in his opinion to protect the Owner
from loss because of:
.1
defective work not remedied,
.2
claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims,
.3
reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the unpaid balance
of the Contract Amount,
.4
damage to the Owner or another contractor,
.5
reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed within the
Contract Time, or
.6
unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work by the Contractor.
12.5.2
When the grounds in Subparagraph 12.5.1 are removed, or in the case of 12.5.1.3 above,
when the Owner is satisfied that the Contractor will complete the Project at the agreed upon price,
payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.
12.6
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT.
12.6.1
When the Contractor believes that the Work or a designated portion thereof acceptable to
the Owner is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the OR a "punch list"
of items to be completed or corrected. Any item on such list shall be completed or corrected before the
Final Completion Date without regard to whether such item may be characterized by anyone as a
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
"warranty item" or otherwise. The failure to include any items on such punch list does not alter the
responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
When the OR, on the basis of an inspection, determines that the Work or a portion thereof is
substantially complete, he will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion, which shall be AIA
Document G704, which shall state the responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor for maintenance,
heat, utilities and insurance. The Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the
Owner for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.
12.6.2
Upon receipt of written notice from the Contractor that the Work is ready for final
inspection and acceptance, the OR will promptly make such inspection and, when the OR finds (1) the
Work acceptable under the Contract Documents; (2) the Contract fully performed; and (3) the Final
Completion Date has been reached, as that term is defined in Subparagraph 11.1.4, then, and only then,
the Contractor shall promptly issue a final Invoice stating that, to the best of his knowledge, information
and belief, and on the basis of observations and inspections, the Work has been fully completed in
accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, that the entire balance found to be
due the Contractor is payable, and that any securities held by the Owner in lieu of a cash retention are
returnable. The Contractor's written notice required by this Paragraph shall state the Date of Final
Completion.
12.6.3
Neither the final payment nor the remaining retained percentage shall become due until
the Contractor submits to the Owner (1) an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment,
and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or his property might in any way
be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied; (2) consent of surety to final payment; (3) if
required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, to the
extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner; and (4) written certification by the
Contractor, and such subcontractors, material suppliers and manufacturers as the Owner shall designate,
that no materials have been incorporated into the Work which contain any asbestos.
12.6.4
The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor
except previously made in writing and still unsettled.
ARTICLE 13
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
13.1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS. The Contractor shall be responsible for
initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work
in compliance with all local, state and federal laws and regulations.
13.2
SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY.
13.2.1
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall provide
all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss, to:
.1
affected thereby;
all employees engaged in the Work and all other persons who may be
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
.2
all the Work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,
whether in storage on or off the site, under the care, custody or control of the Contractor or any of his
Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors; and
.3
other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs,
lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or
replacement in the course of construction.
13.2.2
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and
orders of any public authority having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them
from damage, injury or loss. He shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and the
progress of the Work, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs
and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of
adjacent utilities.
13.2.3
When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is
necessary for the execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on
such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel.
13.2.4
All damage or loss to any property referred to in Clauses 13.2.1.2 and 13.2.1.3 caused in
whole or in part by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be
remedied by the Contractor.
13.2.5
The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of his organization at the site whose
duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's Superintendent unless
otherwise designated in writing by the Contractor to the Owner.
13.2.6
The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the Work to be loaded so as to
endanger its safety.
13.3
EMERGENCIES. In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the
Contractor shall act, at his discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional
compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work shall be
determined as provided by the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 14
CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
14.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The Contractor, at Contractor’s own expense, shall
purchase and maintain the herein stipulated minimum insurance with companies duly licensed to do
business in the State of Arizona with policies and forms satisfactory to the District and possessing a
current A.M. Best, Inc. Rating of B++6.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
All insurance required herein shall be maintained in full force and effect until all work required to be
performed under the terms of the Contract is satisfactorily completed and formally accepted; failure to
do so may, at the sole direction of the District, constitute a material breach of the Contract.
The Contractor’s insurance shall be primary insurance, and any insurance or self-insurance maintained
by the District shall not contribute to it.
Any failure to comply with the claim reporting provisions of the policies or any breach of an insurance
policy warranty shall not affect coverage afforded under the policy to protect the District.
All policies, except Workers’ Compensation, shall contain a waiver of transfer rights of recovery
(subrogation) against the District, its agents, representatives, directors, officers, and employees for any
claims arising out of the Contractor’s work or service.
The insurance policies may provide coverage which contains deductibles or self-insured retentions.
Such deductible and/or self-insured retentions shall not be applicable with respect to the coverage
provided to the District under such policies. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for deductible
and/or self-insured retention and the District, at its option, may require the Contractor to secure the
payment of such deductible or self-insured retentions by a surety bond or an irrevocable and
unconditional letter of credit.
The District reserves the right to request and to receive, within 10 working days, certified copies of any
or all of the herein required insurance policies and/or endorsements. The District shall not be obligated,
however, to review same or to advise Contractor of any deficiencies in such policies and endorsements,
and such receipt shall not relieve Contractor from, or be deemed a waiver of the District’s right to insist
on, strict fulfillment of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract.
The insurance policies, except Workers’ Compensation, required by the Contract shall name the District,
its agents, representatives, officers, directors, officials, and employees as Additional Insureds.
14.2
REQUIRED COVERAGE
14.2.1
General Liability - Contractor shall maintain Commercial General Liability insurance
with a limit of not less than $2,000,000 for each occurrence with a $2,000,000 Products and Completed
Operations Aggregate and $2,000,000 General Aggregate Limit. The Contractor’s policy shall be
endorsed to include a separate designated construction project general aggregate limit applicable to this
project with a per project limit of $1,000,000 which coverage will be at least as broad as insurance
Service Office, Inc. Policy Form CG 25030397. The policies shall include coverage for bodily injury,
broad form property damage, personal injury, products/completed operations and blanket contractual
coverage including, but not limited to, the liability assumed under the indemnification provisions of the
Contract, which coverage will be at least as broad as Insurance Service Office, Inc. Policy Form CG
000211093 or any replacement thereof. The coverage shall not exclude X, C, U.
Such policies shall contain a severability of interest provision, and shall not contain a sunset provision or
commutation clause, or any provision that would serve to limit third party action over claims.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
The Commercial General Liability additional insured endorsement shall be at least as broad as the
Insurance Service Office, Inc’s, Additional Insured, Form B CG20101185, and shall include coverage
for Contractor’s operations and products and completed operations.
14.2.2
Certificates if Insurance - Prior to commencing Services under the Contract, Contractor
shall furnish the District with Certificates of Insurance, or formal endorsements as required by the
Contract, issued by Contractor’s insurer(s), as evidence that policies providing the required coverages,
conditions and limits required by the Contract are in full force and effect.
In the event any insurance policy(ies) required by the contract is(are) written on a “claims made” basis,
coverage shall extend for two years past completion and acceptance of the contractor’s work or services
and as evidenced by annual Certificates of Insurance.
If a policy does expire during the life of the contract, a renewal certificate must be sent to the District
thirty (30) days prior to the expiration date.
All Certificates of Insurance required by the Contract shall be identified with a bid serial number and
title.
Insurance evidenced by these certificates shall not expire, be canceled, or materially changed without
thirty (30) days prior written notice to the District.
14.2.3
Automobile Liability - Contractor shall maintain and cause any subcontractors to
maintain Commercial/Business Automotive Liability insurance with a combined single limit for bodily
injury and property damage of not less than $1,000,000 each occurrence with respect to the Contractor’s
owned, hired, and non-owned vehicles assigned to or used in performance of the Contractor’s work.
Coverage will be at least as broad as coverage code 1, “any auto”, (Insurance Service Office, Inc. Policy
Form CA 00011293, or any replacements thereof). Such insurance shall include coverage for loading
and off loading hazards. If hazardous substances, materials or wastes are to be transported, MCS 90
endorsement shall be included and $5,000,000 per accident limits for bodily injury and property damage
shall apply.
14.2.4
Workers’ Compensation - This Contractor shall carry Workers’ Compensation insurance
to cover obligations imposed by federal and state statutes having jurisdiction of Contractor’s employees
engaged in the performance of the work; and, Employer’s Liability insurance of not less than $2,000,000
for each accident, $1,000,000 disease for each employee, and $1,000,000 disease policy limit.
In case any work is subcontracted, the Contractor will require the Subcontractor to provide Workers’
Compensation and Employer’s Liability to at least the same extent as required of the Contractor.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
ARTICLE 15
CHANGES IN THE WORK AND CLAIMS
15.1
CHANGE ORDERS.
15.1.1
The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the
general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions. The Contract Amount
and/or the Contract Time shall be adjusted accordingly pursuant to the terms of the Contract Documents.
15.1.2
A Change Order is a written amendment to the Contract Documents signed by the
Owner, OR and the Contractor, issued after the execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the
Work or an adjustment in the Contract Amount or the Contract Time. The Contract Amount and the
Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order.
15.1.3
The debit or credit, as the case may be, to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work
shall be determined in one or more of the following ways as mutually agreed:
.1
by a lump sum properly itemized and supported as described below in
order to permit evaluation;
.2
by unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed
.3
by actual cost and specified percentage fee covering overhead and profit.
upon; or
The total amount of overhead and profit allowed on any Change Order, whether increase
or decrease, shall not exceed 15% of the direct costs of the Change Order Work when the Work is
performed by the Contractor, or 5% of the Direct Costs for the Contractor's overhead and profit and 15%
for the Subcontractor's overhead and profit when the Work is performed by any level of Subcontractor
or Sub-subcontractor. The aforesaid amounts shall include the general conditions, overhead and profit
for both the Contractor, Subcontractor(s), and Sub-subcontractor(s), if any. The costs of bond premiums
and sales tax shall be added, in that order, after calculation and addition of overhead and profit.
The overhead and profit margin shall cover the costs of any additional supervision and
project management, including the Contractor's and any Subcontractor's job superintendent, project
manager, estimator, field office support, home office support, small tools and all other general
conditions items.
For each and every proposed change in the Contract Amount, the Contractor shall
provide an itemized breakdown of direct costs, hereinafter called the cost breakdown, that: (1) clearly
describes each item, location and scope of work; (2) identifies in detail all labor (by trade classification),
materials, equipment and services required to complete the work; (3) lists and extends all respective man
hours (or unit hours), labor rates, quantities of materials, dimensions used to compute quantities,
material units and unit prices, equipment time and rental rates. This cost breakdown shall be organized
in a format that clearly identifies the subtotal of direct costs before overhead (if any), profit, bond and
tax are added. The cost breakdown format is subject to the approval of the Owner.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
Change bids from the Contractor shall include separate cost breakdowns as described
above from any and all Subcontractors involved with the change. Subcontractor cost breakdowns are to
be in writing on their letterhead and signed by the Subcontractor. Contractor shall provide any
additional data needed to substantiate costs of changes, including invoices from suppliers and payroll
information upon request of the Owner. The Contractor shall respond to requests for quotations from
the Owner within five (5) calendar days.
The Direct Cost is defined as the lowest locally available cost to the Contractor or
Subcontractor after all discounts, rebates and concessions are calculated. The Direct Cost is the basis for
computing Contractor and Subcontractor overhead and profit margins. The Direct Costs that may be
included in the price of a change are limited to the following items directly attributable to the change in
the Work:
1.
Costs of materials, including cost of delivery;
2.
Cost of labor, including social security, old age and employment
insurance, and fringe benefits required by agreement and workers’ compensation insurance;
3.
Rental value of equipment used to perform the Work.
15.1.4
If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if
the quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order that application of the
agreed unit prices to the quantities of Work proposed will create a hardship on the Owner or the
Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted to prevent such hardship.
15.1.5
Should concealed conditions encountered in the performance of the Work below the
surface of the ground be at variance with the conditions indicated by the Contract Documents or should
unknown physical conditions below the surface of the ground of an unusual nature, differing materially
from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character
provided for in this Contract, be encountered, the Contract Amount shall be adjusted by Change Order
upon claim by either party made in compliance with Subparagraph 12.4.4 and within the time limits
prescribed in Subparagraph 15.2.1.
15.1.6
If the Contractor claims that additional cost or time is involved because of:
.1
any written interpretation issued pursuant to Subparagraph 4.12.5,
.2
any order by the Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Subparagraph 5.2.11
where the Contractor was not at fault, or
.3
any written order for a minor change in the Work issued pursuant to
Paragraph 15.3, the Contractor shall make such claim as provided in Paragraph 15.2.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
15.2
CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST OR TIME. If the Contractor decides to make a
claim for an increase in the Contract Amount or any other claim, except one for an extension of Contract
Time, he shall give the Owner written notice thereof within fifteen (15) days after the occurrence of the
event giving rise to such claim or include such notice in the Application for Payment for the month in
which the event giving rise to the claim occurred, whichever is earlier. Notice of a claim for extension
of Contract Time shall be given within fifteen (15) days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to
such claim. Any notice other than one made for an extension of the Contract Time shall be given by the
Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work which is the subject matter of the claim, except in an
emergency endangering life or property, in which case the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with
Subparagraph 13.3.1. All claims shall be made as provided in Subparagraph 12.4.4 within the time
limits prescribed herein, and no such claim shall be valid unless so made. No change in the Contract
Amount or Contract Time resulting from such claim shall be valid unless approved by the Owner and
authorized by Change Order.
15.3
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK. The OR has authority to order minor changes in
the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Amount or an extension of the Contract Time and
not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents.
15.4
FIELD INFORMATION MEMOS. The OR may issue written Field Information Memos
which interpret the Contract Documents in accordance with Subparagraph 4.12.5 or which order minor
changes in the Work in accordance with Paragraph 15.3 without change in Contract Amount or Contract
Time. The Contractor shall carry out such changes specified in the Field Information Memos promptly.
ARTICLE 16
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
16.1
UNCOVERING OF WORK.
16.1.1
If any Work should be covered contrary to the request of the OR, it must, if required by
the OR, be uncovered for his observation and replaced, all at the Contractor's expense.
16.1.2
If any other Work has been covered which the OR has not specifically requested to
observe prior to being covered, the OR may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the
Contractor. If such Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, the cost of
uncovering and replacement after approval by the OR shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to
the Owner. If such Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor
shall pay such costs unless it is found that this condition was caused by a separate contractor employed
as provided in Article 9, and in that event, the Owner shall be responsible for the payment of such costs.
16.2
CORRECTION OF WORK.
16.2.1
The Contractor shall promptly correct all Work rejected by the Owner as defective or as
failing to conform to the Contract Documents whether observed before or after Final Completion and
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such
rejected Work.
16.2.2
If, within two (2) years after acceptance of the Work by the Owner or within such longer
period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required
by the Contract Documents, including the original conformance with the Contract Documents, any of
the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor,
without cost to the Owner, shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from the Owner to
do so. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.
16.2.3
All such defective or non-conforming Work under Subparagraphs 16.2.1 and 16.2.2 shall
be removed from the site where necessary, and the Work shall be corrected to comply with the Contract
Documents without cost to the Owner.
16.2.4
The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work of separate contractors
destroyed or damaged by such removal or correction.
16.2.5
If the Contractor does not remove such defective or non-conforming Work within a
reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Owner, the Owner may remove it and may store the
materials or equipment at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the cost of such
removal and storage within ten (10) days after receipt of a statement of charges therefor, the Owner
may, upon ten (10) additional days written notice, sell such Work at auction or at private sale and shall
account for the net proceeds thereof after deducting all the costs that should have been borne by the
Contractor, including compensation for additional architectural services and any attorneys' fees incurred
by Owner in connection therewith. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all costs which the Contractor
should have borne, the difference shall be charged to the Contractor and an appropriate Change Order
shall be issued. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such
amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner, and all attorneys' fees and other costs that
the Owner may incur in collecting same.
16.2.6
If the Contractor fails to correct such defective or non-conforming Work, the Owner may
correct it in accordance with Paragraph 10.6.
16.2.7
The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph 16.2 shall be in addition to and not
in limitation of any obligations imposed upon him by special guarantees required by the Contract
Documents or otherwise prescribed by law.
16.3
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NON-CONFORMING WORK. If the Owner
prefers to accept defective or non-conforming Work, he may do so instead of requiring its removal and
correction, in which case a Change Order will be issued to reflect an appropriate reduction in the
Contract Amount, or, if the amount is determined after final payment, it shall be paid by the Contractor.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
ARTICLE 17
TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT
17.1
TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR. If the Work is stopped for a period of thirty
(30) days, and the Owner is immediately notified of such stopping, under an order of any court or other
public authority having jurisdiction through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their
agents or employees or any other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with the
Contractor, and by reason of some act or omission of Owner, then the Contractor may, upon thirty (30)
days written notice to the Owner, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for all
Work executed and for any proven loss sustained upon any materials, equipment, tools, construction
equipment and machinery, including the percentage profit stated in Paragraph 3.4 herein for Work
accomplished through the date the notice of termination is given.
17.2
TERMINATION BY THE OWNER.
17.2.1
If the Contractor files or has filed against it any petition in bankruptcy, or if he makes a
general assignment for benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency,
or if he refuses or fails, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough
properly skilled workmen or sufficient and proper materials to complete the Work in accordance with
the Progress Schedule and Contract Time, or he fails to make prompt payments to Subcontractors or for
materials or labor, or disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority
having jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of a material breach of any provision of the Contract
Documents, then the Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the
Contractor and/or his surety seven (7) days written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor
and take possession of the site and all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and
machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the Work by whatever method he may deem
expedient. In such case, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the
Work is finished. Termination of the Contract under this Subparagraph 17.2.1 shall not relieve the
Contractor of any warranty obligations he would otherwise have on all Work performed hereunder, and
such obligations shall survive termination of this Contract.
17.2.2
If the unpaid balance of the Contract Amount exceeds the costs of finishing the Work,
including attorneys' fees and all other costs incurred by Owner in completion of the Contractor's
obligations, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed such unpaid balance, the
Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
ARTICLE 18
WARRANTY AND SITE CONDITIONS
18.1
TWO-YEAR WARRANTY.
18.1.1
The Contractor shall warrant all Work under this Contract against defects of material and
workmanship for a period of at least two (2) years from the Final Completion Date; provided, however,
that those items of the Work specified as having longer warranties shall be warranted for the period
specified.
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
18.1.2
The Contractor shall be responsible for the total cost of repairing and restoring such
defective Work to a new condition, at no cost to Owner.
18.1.3
In any case where the subject matter of the defect relates to Work done under a
subcontract between the Contractor and any Subcontractor, it is the responsibility of the Contractor, not
the Owner, to secure the Subcontractor's performance in compliance with this Paragraph and, in the
event of the Subcontractor's failure or refusal within a reasonable time to perform after notice, it shall be
the Contractor's responsibility to repair and restore such defective Work to a new condition, at no cost to
Owner.
18.1.4
In any case where the defective Work has been brought to the attention of the Contractor
by the Owner and the Contractor fails or refuses to correct it, the Owner may elect, without precluding
its use of any other remedy it may have available to it, to have the defective Work repaired and restored
to a new condition in whatever manner it deems appropriate, regardless of the cost, and the Contractor
shall be liable to the Owner for the total cost thereof, including, without limitation, any architectural and
legal fees related to effecting the repair.
18.1.5
Material and workmanship made good through compliance with such warranty shall be
subject to the same warranty period as the original materials and workmanship. Such warranty period
shall begin on the date the replaced material and work is certified as acceptable in writing by the Owner.
18.2
USE OF PREMISES.
18.2.1
The Contractor shall confine his equipment and plant, the storage of materials, and the
operations of his workmen to limits indicated by law, ordinances, permits, or directions of the Owner
and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with materials or equipment.
18.3
SEVERABILITY. In the event any provision in this Contract is held invalid by any court
of competent jurisdiction, the remaining provisions in this Contract shall be deemed severable and shall
remain in full force and effect.
18.4
IMMIGRATION LAW COMPLIANCE.
18.4.1
The Contractor warrants compliance with the Federal Immigration and Nationality Act
(FINA) and all other Federal and State immigration laws and regulations related to the immigration
status of its employees. Contractor shall obtain statements from its subcontractors of every tier
certifying compliance and shall furnish the statements to the Owner upon request. These warranties
shall remain in effect through the term of the Contract, and the Contractor and its subcontractors of
every tier shall also maintain Employment Eligibility Verification forms (I-9) as required by the U.S.
Department of Labor’s Immigration and Control Act for all employees performing work pursuant to this
Contract. I-9 forms are available for download at USCIS.GOV.
18.4.2
The Owner may request, and the Contractor agrees to furnish, verification of compliance
from the Contractor or its subcontractors of any tier performing work pursuant to this Contract. Should
the Owner reasonably believe or discover that the Contractor or its subcontractors of any tier are not in
compliance, the Owner may pursue any and all remedies allowed by law, including, but not limited to:
suspension of work, termination of the Contract for default, and suspension and/or debarment of the
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
Contractor or its subcontractors. All costs necessary to verify compliance are the responsibility of the
Contractor.
18.5
CANCELLATION.
This Agreement is subject to cancellation by the Owner for
violation of the provisions of Arizona Revised Statutes Section 38-511.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, four (4) identical counterparts of this Agreement, each of
which shall for all purposes be deemed an original thereof, have been duly executed by the parties
hereinabove named, on the day and year first above written.
OWNER: Pima County Community College
By _________________________________Date_______________
Its _________________________________
CONTRACTOR:___________________________________
By _________________________________Date_______________
Its _________________________________
Bid No. B16/9926
February 1, 2016
EXHIBIT A
West Campus Dental Clinic Phases 3 & 4
1.
Project Manual/Specifications dated ____________, 201__.
2.
Drawing List
Sheet No.
Sheet Title
Sheet Date
(Revision Date (if any)
PROJECT MANUAL
for
Upgrades and Renovation of the
Pima County Community College District
West Campus – K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
Tucson, Arizona
January 8, 2016
Pima County Community College District
Facilities Operations & Construction
Maintenance and Security
6680 South Country Club Road
Tucson, AZ 85709-1810
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION
01 11 00
01 14 00
01 24 00
01 25 00
01 26 00
01 29 00
01 31 19
01 32 00
01 33 00
01 41 00
01 51 00
01 52 00
01 55 00
01 56 00
01 60 00
01 65 00
01 73 00
01 77 00
01 78 36
01 89 30
SUMMARY OF THE WORK
WORK RESTRICTIONS
VALUE ANALYSIS
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PROJECT MEETINGS
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
EXECUTION
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
WARRANTIES
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
ATTACHMENTS
GLHN Dental Lab Drawings
GLHN Dental Clinic Drawings
January 8, 2016
January 8, 2016
END OF DIVISION 1 – TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION
01 11 00
SUMMARY OF THE WORK
01 11 00.01
A.
GENERAL:
The scope of this contract consists of all supervision, labor, materials, equipment,
appliances unless noted to be furnished by Others, transportation, tools, equipment rentals,
fees, taxes and incidentals necessary to perform all operations required to install, alter,
construct and complete, all in accordance with this Project Manual and the applicable
drawings and documents, and work reasonably inferable from the Project Manual and
drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract.
1. The work includes:
a. Upgrade and Renovations to the Pima County Community College
District, West Campus, K Building, Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase
3 & 4 per drawings and Project Manual prepared by GLHN Architects and
Engineers.
b. One purchase order is proposed to be issued to the General Contractor.
Because a portion of the funding for this project is from a Title V Department
of Education Federal grant, the construction work on site has been phased,
and is continuing to be completed over the next two construction phases
during the College’s summer break periods. There may be at times,
construction tasks which are before or extend past the summer break
periods, or occurs during off hours, or on holidays and weekends.
c. The General Contractor shall provide value engineering services including
constructability reviews, and material reviews. These services should
result in increased project quality and lower lifetime costs associated with
the project.
d. The General Contractor shall assist Pima Community College and the
Architect with developing the construction sequencing and the project’s
construction schedule. Critical time of construction may have to be phased
and needs to be tailored to minimally impact the educational schedules.
e. At the end of each phase the work shall be inspected for Substantial
Completion by the College and College’s Owner Representative.
f. This purchase order includes federal funding and is covered by the DavisBacon Act requirements. All laborers and mechanics employed by the
General Contractor and Subcontractors for the construction or renovation
of this project must be paid wages at least once a week and no less than
the prevailing wage rate as determined by the Department of Labor.
Weekly certified payroll reports must be submitted to the PCC Facilities
Project Manager, Cynthia Sylvester.
g. This project is partially funded with Title V grant monies, and the General
Contractor shall follow the requirements of the grant. The General
Contractor’s pricing shall be based on Davis Bacon Wages pertinent to the
project’s location. Prior to submitting the proposal or bid, the Contractor
shall verify that Davis Bacon Wages have not been updated, and adjust his
proposal if necessary. The most current wage determination can be found
at:
http://www.wdol.gov/dba.aspx
Scroll down and select:
x Arizona as the State
x Pima as the County
x Building for the construction type
h. The Contractor and his subcontractors shall participate in a meeting prior to
construction beginning on site which will cover the Davis-Bacon
administrative requirements.
i. The College will furnish to the General Contractor the Summer class
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
schedules for the West Campus K Building when they becomes available.
j. Warranties shall be for a minimum 2 year period commencing on Substantial
Completion of the current construction phase or longer as noted within the
Project Manual.
2. Work by the College:
a. Unless noted otherwise, the College will provide inspections, and tests as
required and noted by the drawings and Project Manual.
b. All applicable governmental agency permits (for example:
Fire
Alarm/Construction Plan permits with the Arizona State Fire Marshal, EPA)
shall be obtained and paid for by Pima Community College (PCC) unless
noted otherwise in Division 1 - Section.01 41 00 “Regulatory
Requirements”, and Section 01 25 00 “Product Substitution Procedures”,
and as noted within the other sections of the Project Manual.
c. Per plans and Project Manual the College shall furnish and install the
following systems except as noted scope to be provided by the General
Contractor:
i. Energy management control system upgrades shall be furnished
and installed by Others hired by the College. However, the
infrastructure pathway shall be provided by the General Contractor.
ii. Master clock system upgrades shall be furnished and installed by
Others hired by the College. However, the infrastructure pathways
shall be provided by the General Contractor.
iii. IT cabling shall be furnished and installed by Others. However, the
infrastructure pathways and cable tray shall be provided by the
General Contractor.
iv. Card readers shall be furnished and installed by Others hired by
the College. However, the infrastructure cabling pathway and
cover plates shall be provided by the General Contractor.
v. Sound system. Scope of work not in contract.
d. Per the Drawings and the Project Manual, the General Contractor shall
coordinate the installation of equipment noted as furnished by College or
Others and as noted below:
i. Dental Clinic equipment and Dental Lab moveable equipment shall
be furnished by the College or Others unless noted otherwise. The
General Contractor shall coordinate the installation of the
equipment within the Dental Clinic and Dental Lab with the dental
equipment suppliers. However, the Dental Lab cabinetry, Dental
Lab K209 hoods and workstations, and corresponding utilities in
K209 (Dental Lab) and K276 (Porcelain Room) shall be furnished
and installed by the General Contractor.
ii. Dental Lab K209 audio visual equipment shall be furnished by the
College. The General Contractor shall provide the infrastructure
pathways, wall support blocking, and electrical.
iii. Dental Clinic operatory cabinetry, and the Dental Clinic operatory
chairs shall be furnished and installed by Others hired by the
College. The General Contractor shall coordinate the installation
with the dental operatory cabinet suppliers and vendors. However,
the General Contractor shall make all final utility connections, and
attachment of the cabinetry pieces to the concrete floor slab below
the raised floor system.
iii. Cut sheets for all equipment shall be provided to the Contractor for
his use. Contractor shall participate in meetings with the Dental
Equipment vendors to coordinate the work.
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
01 11 00.02
CONTRACT TIME:
TABLE 01 11 00 – Contract Time
TASK
Submittal Process
Anticipated Notice to Proceed
A.
DATES
Commences on Notice to
Proceed
March 30,2015
Construction on site begins for
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic
Phase 3
Monday, May 23, 2016
Installation of Dental Operatory
Cabinetry in Dental Clinic Phase
3 area
June 20 - July 8, 2016
Substantial Completion
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic
Phase 3 for College’s
Occupancy within areas affected
by the work
August 12, 2016
PCC Classes Begin for Fall
Semester
August 24, 2016
Final Completion Dental Lab and
Dental Clinic
Phase 3 Construction
September 30, 2016
Construction on site for
Dental Clinic Phase 4 begins
May 19, 2017
Substantial Completion
Dental Clinic Phase 4
August 12, 2017
Final Completion Dental Clinic
Phase 4 Construction
September 30, 2017
Contract Time:
1. If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by an act or
neglect of the College or Architect, or of an employee of either, which the Architect
determines justifies relief, then the Contract time shall be extended by Change
Order for such reasonable time as the Architect or College may determine.
2. An extension of time shall be the Contractor’s sole remedy for delay. The
Contractor expressly agrees not to make, and hereby waives any claim for damages
against the College on account of any delay, obstruction, or hindrance for any cause
whatsoever, and agrees that the Contractor’s sole right and remedy in the case of
delay shall be an extension of the time fixed for completion of the contract.
3. The Contract Time shall not be adjusted unless a change affects the critical path of
the Work.
B.
Warranty: If, within two years after the date of Substantial Completion of the particular
phase of the work, any of the work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written
notice from the College. See also Section 01 78 36 “Warranties”.
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
C.
Liquidated Damages:
1. /'
V KDYH EHHQ UHPRYHG IURP WKLV SURMHFW KRZHYHU Whe Contractor shall meet
the Substantial Completion deadline for Phase 3 andPhase 4 so that the College
can occupy and conduct classes within all Dental Clinicand Dental Lab spaces.
2. During the final walk-through if all or a portion of the work is found by the Architect
to not be substantially complete by the Contract Time deadline, and the Architect
can’t issue a Substantial Completion certificate at that time, the College will seek a
temporary Occupancy permit and approval from the Arizona State Fire Marshal’s
office.
01 11 00.03
DEFINITIONS:
A.
The term "Architect" or “College’s Owner Representative” as used herein means the firm
of GLHN Architects and Engineers, Inc. and its employees.
B.
The term "Contractor" means the person or organization awarded the contract to complete
work specified herein, and shall be a General Contractor registered and licensed by the
State of Arizona, who has successfully completed a minimum of three comparable
remodeling projects and can provide references for those projects.
C.
The term "College" as used herein means Pima County Community College (PCC) District
of the State of Arizona. The Director of Facilities Operations and Construction or the PCC
Facility’s Project Manager assigned to this Project shall act on behalf of the College.
Communication to Pima Community College is not received unless directed to the attention
of the PCC Director of Facilities Operations and Construction, or the PCC Facilities Project
Manager assigned to this project.
01 11 00.04
INTENT OF DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and the Project Manual specifications are cooperative and supplementary.
Portions of the work which can be best illustrated by drawings may not be included in
Project Manual specifications, and portions best described by the Project Manual may not
be depicted on the drawings. The intent of the drawings and the Project Manual
specifications is to include labor, materials and services necessary for proper completion
of this project.
B.
Completeness and correctness of the drawings and the Project Manual shall be verified
before execution by the Contractor who shall notify the Architect of any errors,
inconsistencies or omissions within ten (10) days from the Notice to Proceed. The
Contractor shall be liable to the College or the Architect for any damages resulting from
any errors, inconsistencies or omissions and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. If
the Contractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves a recognized error,
inconsistency or omission in the drawings and Project Manual without such notice to the
Architect, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such performance and
shall bear an appropriate amount of attributable costs for correction.
C.
Where the drawings and the Project Manual appear to conflict, the Project Manual shall
govern. Detail drawings have priority over other drawings and large scale plans have
priority over small scale plans. Discrepancy in figures, drawings or the Project Manual shall
be promptly submitted to the Architect, who shall promptly make a determination in writing.
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
6
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
01 11 00.05
A.
DETAIL DRAWING INTERPRETATION:
Before doing any work or ordering any materials, the Contractor shall verify measurements
of existing and new work and be responsible for their correctness. Differences which may
be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the
work. No extra compensation will be allowed because of differences between actual
dimensions and those indicated on working drawings. The Contractor will be responsible
for verifying the locations and elevations indicated by the drawings.
01 11 00.06
PROTECTION OF ADJACENT PROPERTY:
A.
Contractor is responsible for preservation of public and private property on the surface or
underground, along and adjacent to the work, and shall conduct his operations so as to
ensure the prevention of injury or damage thereto.
B.
Whenever direct or indirect damage or injury is done to public or private property by or on
account of acts, omissions, neglect or misconduct in the execution of the work, or in
consequence of non-execution thereof on the part of the Contractor, such property shall
be restored by Contractor at his expense, to a condition equal to that existing before such
damage or injury was done, by repairing, rebuilding or otherwise restoring same, or the
Contractor shall make good such damage or injury in an acceptable manner to the College.
END OF SECTION 01 11 00
SECTION
01 14 00
WORK RESTRICTIONS
01 14 00.01
A.
WORK RESTRICTIONS:
Work involving excessive noise or which will disrupt classroom instruction shall be
scheduled during non-normal business hours. The Contractor shall anticipate disruptive
work activities required by the project which will occur outside of normal business hours.
Work outside of normal business hours shall be included in the project bid. No change
orders will be issued for work outside of normal business hours required by the project
documents.
1. Normal Business hours: Monday through Saturday 8:00 am to 10:00 pm
2. Pima Community College Holiday Schedule can be found at the following internet
website: http://www.pima.edu/calendars/index.html
B.
C.
Work involving shutdown of utilities, and building systems (for example: water service,
electric service, heating/cooling, life safety shall be scheduled during non-school hours) A
minimum of 48 hour notice to the PCC Project Director, PCC Facilities Project Manager,
Campus Operations Manager and the College’s Owner Representative is required. Major
scheduled utility shutdowns will require a minimum of 3 weeks notification so that PCC
Facilities Department can notify the campus administrators.
Contractor may schedule work to be completed between the hours of 10pm and 8 am
however, a 48 hour notice shall be given to PCC Facilities Project Manager.
END OF SECTION 01 14 00
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
7
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
SECTION
01 24 00
VALUE ANALYSIS
01 24 13
VALUE ENGINEERING PROPOSALS (VEP):
A.
The Contractor is encouraged to develop, prepare, and submit value engineering proposals
(VEP's).
B.
The Contractor shall include the following information in each VEP:
1. A description of the difference between the existing Contract requirement and that
proposed VEP which includes:
a. The requirements of Section 01 25 00, Product Substitution Procedures
b. The comparative advantages and disadvantages of each
c. A justification when an item's function or characteristics are being altered.
2. A separate, detailed cost estimate for (a) the affected portions of the original
contract requirement and (b) the VEP. The cost reduction associated with the VEP
shall take into account the Contractor's overhead and profit, and a statement of the
time by which a contract modification accepting the VEP must be issued in order to
maximize cost reduction, and the effect, if any, on the Contract Time.
3. Submission, review, and acceptance or non-acceptance of VEP's shall be in
accordance with standard change order proposal requirements. The cost savings
shall reduce the Contract Sum by the amount(s) indicated on the VEP(s). After the
purchase order has been issued, change orders shall be issued for accepted VEP's.
END OF SECTION 01 24 00
SECTION
01 25 00
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01 25 00.01
APPROVAL:
A.
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST PRIOR TO PROPOSAL SUBMISSION – PRIOR
Refer to the Instructions to Bidders for prior approval requirements.
01 25 00.02
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST AFTER PURCHASE ORDER HAS BEEN ISSUED:
A.
After the purchase order has been issued to the General Contractor, a substitution request
will be considered only if the specified product or system has gone out of production, or
has been deemed illegal or dangerous subsequent to bidding.
B.
The General Contractor shall submit a substitution request after the bid has been awarded
using a separate request for each substitution. Include, at a minimum, in each request:
1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with the
drawings and Project Manual, include:
a. Product identification, manufacturer's name and address.
b. Product specifications and data per 01 33 00.
c. Samples per 01 33 00 if applicable.
2. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the specified products, listing
all variations, including size and weight.
3. Data relating to changes in the construction schedule.
4. Any effect on the in-place construction or other materials and systems to be
installed.
5. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the specified product.
a. Engineering fees and additional agency permit costs required by the
substitution submittal will be paid for by the General Contractor.
6. Designation of availability of maintenance services and sources of replacement
materials.
7. Advantages to the College of accepting the substitution.
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
8
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
01 25 00.04
A.
Substitutions will not be considered when:
1. They are indicated or implied on submittals without formal request.
2. Acceptance may require revision of Contract documents, unless Contractor agrees
to compensate the College for the Architect's additional design and engineering
services, and additional costs related to the substitution.
3. The requested substitution is directly from a Subcontractor, a manufacturer, a
vendor, or supplier’s representative. All substitution requests have to be submitted
for consideration only by the General Contractor.
01 25 00.05
A.
SUBSTITUTE PRODUCT:
Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance by the
Architect and the College.
01 25 00.06
A.
SUBSTITUTIONS NOT CONSIDERED:
SUBSTITUTION DATA:
Based on the submitted data, the Architect will determine if the proposed substitution
meets the requirements of the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 01 25 00
SECTION
01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01 26 33
A.
01 26 53
A.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK:
The Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work,
not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document
G710, “Architect’s Supplemental Instructions” (ASI) or similar form as approved by the PCC
Facilities Project Manager. An ASI which involves change in Contract Time, or Contract
Sum needs to be approved by the College prior to issuing to the Contractor.
CHANGE ORDER REQUESTS (COR):
College-Initiated Change Order Request (COR): Architect will issue a detailed description
of the proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or
the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised
drawings and revisions to the Project Manual.
1. Change Order Requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not
consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the
proposed change without authorization and approval from the College and the
Architect.
2. Within 10 days after receipt of Change Order Request, submit a quotation
estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary
to execute the change. Contractor to submit the following items:
a. Include an itemized list of quantities of materials, supplies, and equipment
(including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed)
required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and
credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate
quantities. The pricing shall be determined using 2015 RS Means Cost
Data for the Tucson, AZ area or as substantiated from local Tucson,
Arizona material supply vendors.
b. At the PCC Project Manager’s discretion, he/she may request additional
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
9
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
Contractor-Initiated Change Order Request (COR): Contractor may propose changes by
submitting a request for a change to Architect, properly itemized and supported by
sufficient substantiating data for permit evaluation, plus a fee; such costs shall be itemized
by crafts as defined within the Schedule of Values and limited to the following items directly
attributable to the change in the Work:
1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 01 25 00, “Product Substitution
Procedures” if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system
for product or system specified.
2. At the PCC Project Manager’s discretion, he/she may request additional supporting
documentation such as actual receipts indicating material costs, and actual payroll
time cards or copies of the payroll checks.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change
on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the
effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include an itemized list of quantities of materials, supplies, and equipment (including
cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed) required or eliminated
and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested,
furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
3. Include applicable costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees,
taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental (exclusive of hand tools), and amounts of
trade discounts required or eliminated.
4. Include itemized costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change,
including social security, unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by
agreement or custom, and workers’ compensation insurance required or eliminated.
5. Include an updated Contractor’s Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish
times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
6. For deductive change order requests, Contractor may add appropriate preparation
7. Include within the COR the costs for performance and payment bonds, and taxes.
01 26 57
A.
supporting documentation such as actual receipts indicating material costs,
and actual payroll time cards or copies of the payroll checks.
Include applicable costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit
fees, taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental (exclusive of hand tools),
and amounts of trade discounts required or eliminated.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change,
including social security, unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required
by agreement or custom, and workers’ compensation insurance required or
eliminated. Davis Bacon Wage rates apply for this project.
Include an updated Contractor’s Construction Schedule that indicates the
effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity
duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total
float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Product Substitution
Procedures” if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or
system for product or system specified.
For deductive change order proposals, Contractor may add appropriate
preparation costs.
Include within the COR the performance and payment bonds, and taxes.
CHANGE ORDERS – (CO):
On the College’s approval of a Change Order Request (COR), the College will issue a
Purchase Order modification to increase or decrease the purchase order sum. The
purchase order modification is also known by the term “Change Order”. The purchase
order modification may combine more than one change order request at the discretion of
the PCC Facilities Project Manager.
END OF SECTION 01 26 57
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
10
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
SECTION
01 29 00
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 29 00.01
A.
Application and Certification for Payment using AIA Form G702 or similar form as approved
by the PCC Facilities Project Manager must be submitted, in triplicate, to the attention of
the Architect for certification and processing then to the PCC Facilities Project Manager.
An Application and Certification for Payment will normally be processed and a check ready
within 14 days after receipt of the certified pay application by the College. Applications for
payment which are not properly submitted will be delayed. Application and Certification for
Payment mailed to Pima College Accounts Payable Department are NOT properly
submitted. The Contractor shall submit a draft Application and Certification for Payment,
and Schedule of Values for review and approval by the Architect and the PCC Facilities
Project Manager at the last construction meeting of each month.
01 29 00.02
A.
PROGRESS PAYMENT:
Payments on account of this Contract will typically be made monthly as the Work
progresses. The Contractor shall submit to the College through the Architect, in the
manner and form prescribed by the College, an Application and Certification for Payment,
and, if required by the Architect and/or PCC Facilities Project Manager, the General
Contractor shall provide receipts or other vouchers showing his payments for materials
suitably stored at the construction site and labor, including payments to the Subcontractors.
01 29 00.04
A.
PROGRESS PAYMENT APPLICATION PROCEDURES:
Contractor shall provide the items listed below with each Application and Certification for
Payment. Provide three notarized originals to the Architect for him/her to certify.
Applications for payment which do not include these items will not be certified:
1. Updated project schedule per Section 01 32 00, showing the actual progress for
each task during the pay application period.
2. A copy of the Schedule of Values completed for the period of time covered by the
application, including the percent of each task complete as shown on the updated
project schedule. Use AIA document G703 certification for payment continuation
sheet or similar document as approved by the PCC Facilities Project Manager.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of the subsequent Application and Certificate for Payments and progress
reports. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with the construction
schedule and Subcontractor list.
3. Invoices for materials stored on-site. Payment will not be made for materials stored
off-site.
4. Lien Waivers: After the first application for payment, the General Contractor shall
submit with each application for payment a partial lien release for the work and
partial lien releases from each Subcontractor and/or for each separate line item on
the schedule of values, for the work equal to the amount approved on the last
application for payment, less retainage.
5. Copies of Superintendent’s daily log upon request by the College or Architect.
6. Prior to final payment also refer to Section 01 77 00.
01 29 00.03
A.
APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATION FOR PAYMENT:
INVOICE DETAIL:
Invoices shall include the following: Contractor’s invoice number; invoice date; official
project title; current purchase order number and reference to any change orders for which
payment is being requested; number of invoice pages; and dates covered by the invoice.
Payment of invoices that do not indicate the correct current purchase order may be
delayed. Use AIA G702 and G703 or similar forms as approved by the PCC Facilities
Project Manager. In addition the Contractor shall submit certified payroll forms required by
Davis- Bacon.
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
11
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
01 29 00.05
A.
01 29 00.06
A.
RETENTION:
Retention: All invoices shall provide a line item indicating retention of 10% of the dollar
amount due at the time. Upon 50% completion the retention may be reduce to 5% upon
the College’s discretion. Final payment of retention will not occur until all punch list items
are completed in a manner acceptable to the College and per Section 01 77 00. Retention
will be released at the College’s discretion at the completion of each construction phase.
PROMPT PAY:
The General Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment
from the College, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such
Subcontractor’s portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled,
reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of
such Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The General Contractor shall, by appropriate
agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to subSubcontractors in a similar manner.
END OF SECTION 01 29 00
SECTION
01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS
01 31 19.01
A.
A pre-construction conference will be called by the College's Owner Representative for the
purpose of discussing execution of the work. The General Contractor and any
Subcontractors whose presence is necessary or requested must attend.
01 31 19.02
A.
COORDINATION MEETINGS:
Job site Coordination Meetings may be called by College or Architect as deemed
necessary to coordinate, expedite, or schedule the work of this Contract.
01 31 19.03
A.
PRECONSTRUCTION MEETINGS:
PROGRESS MEETINGS:
When demolition and construction begins on site, weekly Progress Meetings will be held
at the job site with the PCC Facilities Project Manager, the Architect, and the Contractor's
Project Manager and Site Superintendent. The weekly progress meeting agenda shall
include however not be limited to the following:
1. Review and approval of the meeting minutes taken at the previous progress
meeting.
2. Review of schedules and the job progress in relation to the current project schedule.
3. Review of the "as-built" drawings for work accomplished since the last meeting.
4. Notification by the General Contractor of potential delays due to action or inaction
by the College and/or the Architect.
5. Review of Architect’s Supplemental Instructions (ASI), Construction Change Order
Requests (COR), Request for Information (RFI), shop drawing status etc.
6. Critical Work Sequencing: Discuss coordination requirements, working hours and
critical path.
7. Review status of the Shop Drawing Submittal Log.
8. The General Contractor will notify the Architect and/or College of any action
required on their part prior to the next meeting.
9. The General Contractor is responsible for meeting minutes and distribution to the
attendees on a weekly basis.
END OF SECTION 01 31 19
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
12
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
SECTION
01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTION
01 32 16
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE:
A.
The construction progress schedule shall be coordinated with the College’s work and
activities in the construction area and surrounding areas which may be affected by the
General Contractor’s work. The schedule shall be reviewed at the weekly construction
progress meeting. Refer also to Section 01 11 00.
B.
Prepare the construction progress schedule as follows:
1. The schedule shall be a Gantt (bar chart) with a horizontal time scale and activities
listed vertically using the Critical Path Method (CPM). Note on the schedule any
assumptions made, including but not limited to, Request for Information (RFI)
turnaround times.
2. At a minimum, no task on the schedule shall have duration greater than 15
(calendar) days. All activities shall include tasks for shop drawing review or other
submittals, approvals, procurement, fabrication, delivery, installation, start-up and
testing as required. The schedule shall clearly indicate the start and completion
date of each activity, and the predecessor activity.
3. The initial construction schedule shall be developed and based on the Contract
Time as indicated in Section 01 11 00 – Summary of the Work.
C.
The construction progress schedule shall anticipate the following number of normal
adverse weather days as indicated in the following Table 013216. No extension of the
Contract time will be granted unless the actual adverse weather days exceed the
cumulated normal adverse weather days for the duration of the Contract Time and the
actual adverse weather days had an effect on the scheduled construction. The number of
adverse weather days was determined by using the following number of average days with
greater than one quarter (1/4) inch of rain in Tucson, Arizona: No additional days will be
allowed for adverse weather, as building is roofed and dried in, exception-loss of power for
longer than a 3-hours period during normal working hours of 6am to 10pm.
D.
If the Architect determines that the start or completion of any activity on the schedule
deviates from the schedule by more than seven days, the General Contractor shall revise
and reissue the schedule within seven days of the determination that an activity has
deviated by more than seven days.
E.
An updated CPM schedule will be required to request as adjustment in the Contract Time.
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
13
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
Month
Weather
Days
Month
Weather
Days
Month
Weather
Days
January
1
May
0
September
1
February
1
June
1
October
0
March
1
July
2
November
1
April
0
August
2
December
2
TABLE 013216 – ABOVE
NORMAL ADVERSE WEATHER DAYS
END OF SECTION 01 32 16
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
14
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
SECTION
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 33 00.01
A.
START-UP SUBMITTALS:
Start-up Submittals: Within 10 days after the Notice to Proceed, submit:
1. Schedule of Values per Division 1, Section 01 29 00.
2. Submittal review schedule per Division 1, Section 01 33 00.
3. Construction Schedule for the work per Division 1, Section 01 32 00.
4. A letter stating which individual within the Contractor’s organization is authorized to
sign change orders on behalf of the Contractor.
5. No construction work shall be started and no progress payments made until the
above are submitted and accepted.
6. Submittals shall be submitted to the Architect in a timely manner to not cause delay
and so that the General Contractor can complete the work in the specified contract
time.
7. The Contractor shall submit Material Data Safety Sheets to the PCC Facilities
Project Manager per section 01 33 00. Prior to start of Work, the Contractor must
provide an inventory list of chemicals that will be used on this project per section 01
33 00.
01 33 00.02
OTHER COMMUNICATIONS:
A.
Project Communications: Routine written communications between the Contractor and the
Architect shall be in letter, field memo or PDF format. Such communication shall not
substitute for any other written requirement or submittal.
B.
Request for Information (RFI):
A request from the Contractor seeking an interpretation
or a clarification of some requirement of the contract documents. The RFI shall be logged
and numbered sequentially. The contractor shall clearly and concisely set forth the issue
for which they seek clarification or interpretation and why a response is needed. The
request shall include specific reference to drawings, description of plan location, room
number, detail number, specification section, etc. The Contractor shall, in the written
request, set forth their interpretation or understanding of the contract’s requirements along
with the reasons why they have reached such an understanding. Responses to the RFI
will not change any requirements of the contract documents unless so noted in the Request
for Information response.
C.
Architect’s Supplemental Instruction (ASI) for Drawing/Plan Clarifications: An answer from
the Architect, in response to an inquiry from the Contractor, intended to make some
requirement(s) of the drawings or plans clearly understood. Drawing clarifications/plan
clarifications may be sketches, drawings or in narrative form. If the ASI involves changes
which would affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the College shall approve the ASI
prior to being issued to the General Contractor.
D.
Communications with the College: Pima Community College’s Facilities Project Manager
is the General Contractor’s official contact person with the College. Communication to
Pima Community College is not received unless directed to the attention of the PCC
Director of Facilities Operations and Construction, or the PCC Facilities Project Manager
assigned to this project. The Facilities Project Manager is the only person from the College
authorized to communicate changes to the work.
E.
The Architect is acting as a College Owner’s Representative is authorized to interpret and
enforce the requirements of the Contract documents.
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
01 33 00.03
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS (MSDS):
A.
The General Contractor shall provide the College with MSDS (do not provide a copy to the
Architect because the Architect will not review) for all material which may affect the
College's students or staff 10 days prior to delivery of material to the job site.
B.
Prior to start of Work, the General Contractor must provide an inventory list of chemicals
that will be used on this project. A copy of this list shall be provided by the Contractor to
the PCC Facility Project Manager. The Contractor is responsible for maintaining Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) at the job site. Copies must be readily accessible and
available for review by both College employees and regulatory authorities.
C.
The General Contractor shall maintain a binder at the job site with MSDS for all materials
used in the work.
01 33 23
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
A.
Review Times: submittal review schedule shall include 10 working days for review of
submittals and shop drawings by the Architect. Revise submittal review schedule and
resubmit when progress deviates from previous schedule by 7 days. The shop drawing
and submittal review tasks must be included with the Construction Progress Schedule.
(See Section 01 32 00)
B.
Submit Shop Drawings in electronic pdf format. Provide drawing scale large enough to
clearly show all elements of the work. Show how adjacent work relates. Reference the
shop drawing to the sheet, detail and/or schedule, and Project Manual specification
section. The number of shop drawing copies will be determined at the preconstruction
meeting. For most shop drawing submittals, the College will prefer electronic pdf copies.
C.
Submit manufacturer's standard product data in electronic pdf format. Include reference
standards and warranty information. Provide references to sheet, detail, schedule, and/or
specification section. Show dimensions and clearances specific to the work. For most
product data submittals, the College will prefer electronic pdf copies.
D.
Submit up to four (4) samples of which the College will retain two sets. The number of
samples needed for the project will be discussed and determined at the Preconstruction
Meeting.
E.
Submittals without indication of Contractor's review and approval of conformance with the
drawings and Project Manual will be returned without Architect's review, and will have to
be resubmitted by the General Contractor.
F.
Electronic submittals are allowed if all parties, College, General Contractor, and Architect,
agree to their use.
G.
At the project’s completion the Architect shall provide an electronic copy of all the approved
submittals, shop drawings, and product data. Approved samples used at the jobsite shall
be given to the College.
END OF SECTION 01 33 23
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
16
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
SECTION
01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
01 41 00.01
STANDARDS, CODES, AND LAWS:
A.
Project shall be completed in accordance with Federal, State, and local codes, laws,
regulations, and rules that govern such operations, including fire codes. Applicable codes
are listed on the drawings.
B.
Material and products are specified for their appropriateness in the completed work. The
Contractor is responsible for providing training and education to the Contractor's
employees and obtaining and distributing information regarding the potential dangers and
appropriate safety measures for material and products during the work as required by the
Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Hazard Communication Standard and the
State of Arizona.
C.
Contractor and his Subcontractors shall follow PCC Policies and Standard Policy
Guidelines related to safety. Copies will be distributed at the pre-construction meeting.
01 41 00.02
PERMITS, LICENSES, AND REGULATORY FEES:
A.
Required governmental agency permits (for example: Fire Alarm and Construction Plan
permits with the Arizona State Fire Marshal, EPA) shall be obtained and paid for by the
College - Pima Community College (PCC), except for the following circumstances:
1. If the permit and or fee is an additional requirement resulting from a Contractor’s
substitution request per Section 01 25 00 “Product Substitution Procedures”
2. If the permit and or fee is an additional requirement resulting from modifications or
changes related to a Contractor initiated Proposal Request.
3. As required by Specification Section 01 51 00 “Temporary Utilities”.
B.
The following permits and fees will be paid for by the College when required by the Local,
State and Federal regulations and the pertinent Authority Having Jurisdiction except as
indicated in Section 01 41 00.02 A above:
1. Building Permits
2. State of Arizona Fire Marshal Permit Application fees
3. Plumbing, Electrical, Mechanical Permits
4. Permanent Water Meters Installed by Utility Water Company
5. Utility Water Company Service and Plan Review fees
6. Sewer Tap Connection fees
7. Sewer Fees or Assessments
8. Utility Gas Company Service fees
9. Electric Utility Company Service and Design fees
10. Systems Furniture Vendor Design fee
11. Permits required by the local, State and Federal Environmental Protection Agencies
12. Hazardous materials abatement
13. All required governmental agency licenses
14. Deferred shop drawing permit review submittals
01 41 00.03
REGULATORY TESTING AND SPECIAL INSPECTIONS:
:
A.
The College will hire a company or companies to perform special inspections, and tests as
required by the Contract drawings and Project Manual unless noted to be provided by the
General Contractor.
B.
The General Contractor shall provide the Test and Balance Report, and all commissioning.
C.
The General Contractor shall hire a utility location company to x-ray the second floor within
the area of work prior to core drilling.
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
17
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
D.
The General Contractor shall hire a third party to certify the vacuum system as required by
the specifications within the Project Manual.
END OF SECTION 01 41 00
SECTION
01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A.
Prior to start of ANY trenching or excavation, Contractor shall employ a utility location
specialist to locate all utilities; including irrigation lines, in areas not under the jurisdiction
of Arizona Bluestake, and shall include expense of such work in the bid or proposal. Prior
to site work beginning (if applicable) the General Contractor shall call Arizona Bluestake at
811 and shall schedule the utility location services. The Contractor shall review As-Built
drawings and other information supplied by the College, as well as information provided by
utility location specialist if applicable, prior to submitting the initial Construction Schedule.
Any down time for utilities that may be required due to the location of utility lines found,
shall be shown on the initial Construction Schedule. See Section 01 32 00.
B.
College will provide temporary (if applicable to the scope of work) water and electricity from
the existing points of connection for the General Contractor’s use during construction until
Substantial Completion. Temporary modifications and extensions to the water and
electrical connections shall be the responsibility and paid for by the General Contractor.
The temporary utility connections shall be made and maintained in a safe and secure
condition. The General Contractor shall be responsible for any temporary meters,
temporary backflow preventers, and maintaining temporary climate control as required by
the Contract Documents, and obtaining and paying for temporary use permits.
C.
The General Contractor is responsible to hire a vendor to x-ray the concrete floor slabs
and roof, prior to the General Contractor creating any floor and/or roof penetrations.
SECTION
01 52 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
01 52 13
FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS:
A.
For this project, a temporary field office trailer or storage trailer will be furnished and paid
for by the Contractor as needed at no additional expense to the College. The PCC
Facilities Project Manager will make arrangements to have weekly on site progress
meetings within an available campus meeting room, classroom, or within the construction
work area.
B.
The Contractor shall provide at his expense temporary storage container/s, as needed, to
secure tools and materials during the construction period. The storage container/s shall
be located per the College’s direction, and as required by law, ordinances, and permits.
C.
Contractor's Project Manager and Superintendent shall have, as a minimum, a cellular
telephone and e-mail and shall provide the telephone number and e-mail address to the
College’s Facilities Project Manager and the Architect.
D.
The Contractor will have to make arrangements off-site or use his own resources to make
copies, send faxes, make phone calls or other office related functions because the College
resources will not be available for use by the Contractor or his Subcontractors.
01 52 19
A.
SANITARY FACILITIES:
The Contractor shall not use College restrooms for any construction purpose.
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
18
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
Accommodations may be made to use existing toilet facilities for non-construction
purposes. Provide portable toilets for use by construction personnel. Location of portable
toilets shall be approved by PCC Project Manager before placement. Toilets shall be
cleaned a minimum of 2-times per week.
END OF SECTION 01 52 19
SECTION
01 55 00
VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
01 55 00.01
A.
CONSTRUCTION VEHICLE PARKING:
Parking arrangement for Contractor's crew to be made during the Pre-Construction
conference. Contractor will be responsible for restricting his employees', subcontractors'
and suppliers' vehicles to the designated area.
END OF SECTION 01 55 00
SECTION
01 56 00
TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
01 56 16
A.
B.
C.
TEMPORARY DUST BARRIERS:
Controlling construction-related dust and preventing the spread of flying particles is the
Contractor's responsibility. HVAC return air paths must be sealed to prevent dust and
odors from spreading to occupied parts of the building. The HVAC ducts shall be cleaned
by the General Contractor if there is construction dust within the ductwork.
The General Contractor shall provide temporary dust partitions consisting of 3-5/8” metal
studs at 16” on center with 5/8” gypsum wall board each side with sound batts to structure
above. Heavy plastic dust partitions can be used if acceptable to the College and Architect.
Seal around all penetrations to prevent and mitigate the passage of dust, odors and noise
to the adjoining spaces.
The General Contractor shall provide walk-off mats to mitigate the dust from being
transferred to outside the construction areas.
01 56 23
A.
TEMPORARY BARRICADES, FENCING AND WARNING SIGNS:
Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain barricades, barriers, construction fencing and
warning signs, etc., required for protection of persons and property in compliance with
applicable statutes.
01 56 36
TEMPORARY SECURITY ENCLOSURES:
A.
Contractor is responsible for: providing appropriate safety and warning signs; securing
materials stored on site to prevent theft; and securing the work in-place to prevent
vandalism. The College will not be responsible for theft or vandalism of equipment and
materials left on the site.
B.
The Contractor will be issued a set of keys for access to existing College facilities if
required. The Contractor will be responsible for loss or theft of keys issued and will be
liable for the cost of re-keying all or a portion of the College's existing facilities. The General
Contractor is responsible for securing the areas where the General Contractor and his
Subcontractors have access.
END OF SECTION 01 56 36
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
19
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
SECTION
01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 60 00.01
PRODUCT OPTIONS:
A.
Products are generally specified by reference standard and/or manufacturer’s name and
model number or trade name. When specified only by referenced standard, the Contractor
may select any product meeting this standard by any manufacturer. When several
products or manufacturers are specified as being acceptable, the Contractor has the option
of using any product and manufacturer combination listed.
B.
When a specific manufacturer, installer (where pre-qualification is required), trade name or
material is specified, or indicated, it is to establish a standard of quality and shall not be
construed as limiting competition. Any brand names or names of manufacturers listed in
the contract documents are provided as guidelines for the purpose of establishing the
minimum acceptable specifications.
C.
Items of the same kind are to be by the same manufacturer.
D.
For product substitution procedures after the Contract award refer to Section 01 25 00.
END OF SECTION 01 60 00
SECTION
01 65 00 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
01 65 00.01
DELIVERY & STORAGE:
A.
Deliveries may be made directly to job site, however, it shall be the sole responsibility of
the Contractor to receive, handle, and store such items in a safe and secure manner.
B.
Materials required for this project shall be stored on-site at locations and in a manner
mutually acceptable to College and Contractor. Store materials per the manufacturer's
written instructions.
C.
Deliveries shall be made during normal working hours only and shall be accepted by
General Contractor. PCC WILL NOT ACCEPT DELIVERIES ON BEHALF OF
CONTRACTOR. The Contractor shall verify and accept all delivery orders prior to being
turned over to the College.
01 65 00.02
MAINTENANCE OF IN-PLACE MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION:
A.
Provide maintenance per manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations, and
industry recommendations until Substantial Completion.
B.
Maintenance required elsewhere in the contract documents shall continue after Substantial
Completion as specified.
01 65 00.03
A.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS:
Materials and equipment incorporated into the work shall be installed or applied per the
manufacturer's written instructions, the Project Manual, and Manufacturer’s
recommendations; unless specifically modified by written instruction from the
manufacturer. Submit any modifications to Architect as product data per Section 01 33 00
“Submittal Procedures”
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
20
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
END OF SECTION 01 65 00
SECTION
01 73 00
EXECUTION
01 73 29
CUTTING AND PATCHING:
01 73 29.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
2. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the
building.
3. Project Manual specifications and the drawings for specific requirements and
limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
01 73 29.02
A.
SUMMARY:
This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
01 73 29.03
DEFINITIONS:
A.
Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance
of other Work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after
installation of other Work. The patch materials will match the adjoining materials finish, and
color.
01 73 29.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements unless noted within the
construction documents.
B.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity perform as intended or those results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements
include the following:
1. Primary operational systems and equipment.
2. Fire-suppression systems – if applicable.
3. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.
4. Control systems.
5. Communication systems.
6. Electrical wiring systems.
C.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the
exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the
building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and
patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
21
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
D.
Do not alter the fire rating of any existing or new partition or assembly by cutting or
patching. Penetrations made to floor assemblies, walls, roofs and ceiling assemblies, in
existing or new construction, are required to be in-filled to meet the existing or new
assembly requirements. All fire walls, fire assemblies, and fire partitions must be fire
caulked per code and per the manufacturer’s requirements.
E.
All penetrations in existing sound rated floor, doors, walls, ceiling and roof assemblies shall
be resealed to match the existing sound barrier assembly.
01 73 29.05
MATERIALS:
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces,
use materials than visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
01 73 29.06
A.
EXAMINATION:
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching
are to be performed.
1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
01 73 29.07
PREPARATION:
A.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C.
Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption
passage to adjoining areas.
D.
Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems:
Where existing
services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such
services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.
E.
For work affecting the existing Fire Alarm: Fire Alarm testing and shutdowns will be
conducted only after approval by PCC Environmental Health and Safety Department. 48
hour notice must be provided to the College prior to the work. Please contact the College
– PCC Facility Project Manager to coordinate.
F.
The General Contractor and his Subcontractors shall not use the existing elevators during
construction to assist in removal or delivery of materials and equipment without approval
from the PCC West Campus Operations Manager.
G.
The Contractor shall notify the College prior to the start of all Hot Work. This work involves
cutting torches, welding, grinding, open flame, or produces slag, sparks, or excessive heat.
The PCC Environmental Safety Department shall authorize this Hot Work in accordance
with the PCC Hot Work Management Program. Whenever possible, the Contractor shall
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
of
free
22
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
utilize construction methods that do not require cutting torches or open flames.
01 73 29.08
PERFORMANCE:
A.
General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting
and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components
or
performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore
surfaces to their original condition.
B.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and
similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements
retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original
Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or
a diamond-core drill.
4. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
C.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar
operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as
invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified
in other Sections.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate
evidence of patching and refinishing.
a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other
finishing materials.
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend from one
finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new
space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate
paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken
surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends
with adjacent surfaces.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an
even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure
to a weather-tight condition.
D.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
END OF SECTION 01 73 27
SECTION
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
23
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
01 77 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00.01
A.
Initiate Substantial Completion procedures a minimum of 7 days prior to the date for
substantial completion.
01 77 00.02
A.
INITIATE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:
PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:
Prior to substantial completion complete the following:
1. Contractor prepared Punch list of all incomplete items and corrections to be made.
2. Punch list: When the Contractor considers that the Work is Substantially Complete,
the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of
items to be completed or corrected. By submitting a request for substantial
completion inspection the Contractor thereby certifies that the Work, or the
designated portion, is functionally ready for Occupancy by the College and that the
remaining incomplete or defective work required by the Contract Documents shall
be completed within 7 days. The Contractor shall proceed promptly to complete
and correct items on the list. Failure to include an item on the list does not alter the
responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
3. Schedule Punch list inspection with the College’s Representative in order to exhibit
the completeness of the work. College’s Representative will not participate in an
inspection unless a full Punch list is submitted 5 days prior to inspection.
4. Remove all temporary facilities and controls.
5. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting.
01 77 00.03
PUNCH LIST:
A.
If the Architect’s inspection discloses an item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s
punch list, which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,
the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete
or correct the item upon notification by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion.
When the Work or designated portion is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare
a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish responsibilities of the College
and Contractor for maintenance, damage to the Work, insurance, and the Final Punch list
and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the Final Punch
list accompanying the Certificate. Satisfactory completion of all items on the Final Punch
list shall be final completion of the work. Warranties required by the Contract Documents
shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion
unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Project shall
not be deemed substantially complete until the Certificate is issued.
B.
Neither Final Payment by Phase nor any remaining retainage or substituted securities shall
become due until the Contractor submits to the College:
1. An affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness
connected with the Work for that Phase have been paid or otherwise satisfied,
2. Consent of surety to final payment for that Phase or release of substituted securities
and other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts,
releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising
out of the Contract.
C.
Acceptance of Final Payment for the Phase by the Contractor, Subcontractor or material
supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in
writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Invoice.
D.
The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform
to the requirements of the contract documents, whether observed before or after
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
24
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The
contractor shall bear costs of correcting such rejected work, including additional testing
and inspections and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made
necessary thereby.
E.
If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable Time, the College
may correct it. If the Contractor does not proceed with correction of such nonconforming
Work within a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Architect, the College may
remove it and store the salvageable materials at the Contractor’s expense.
F.
The General Contractor shall schedule 10 working days into schedule for completion of
punch list.
01 77 00.04
RECORD DRAWINGS AS-BUILTS:
A.
Maintain a clean, undamaged set of Contract Documents and Shop Drawings. Mark the
set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work
as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully
and accurately; where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross reference at the
corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed
elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. Tape or paste
addenda, architect’s supplemental instructions, proposal requests and other information
onto the appropriate sheet to provide a complete record of the work.
B.
Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colors to distinguish between
variations in separate categories of the Work. The Architect will either approve the as-built
submittal or note corrections to be made prior to approval.
C.
Mark new information that is important to the College, but was not shown on Contract
Drawings or Shop Drawings.
D.
Note related Change Order numbers where applicable.
E.
Organize record Shop Drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover
sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set.
Upon completion of the work for all Phases, submit complete sets to the Architect. The
Architect will either approve the as-built submittal or note corrections to be made prior to
approval.
F.
Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall scan the approved as-built documents,
shop drawings and other data and provide the College and Architect with PDF copies. The
Contractor shall deliver to the Architect these record drawings “as-builts”. Unless
contracted otherwise between the Architect/College, these record drawing “as-builts” shall
be transferred to electronic media by the Architect, and delivered to the College.
01 77 00.05
A.
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:
Provide four (4) copies of the closeout submittals in three ring notebooks with section tabs,
organized in CSI format for each Phase:
1. Updated Subcontractor list with names and phone numbers.
2. From each Subcontractor and material and equipment supplier, provide the
following:
a. Guarantees and Warranties.
i. Provide minimum Two Year Warranty
b. Operation and Maintenance data, including:
i. Emergency instructions
ii. Spare parts list
iii. Wiring diagrams
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
25
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
iv. Recommended “turn around” cycles
v. Inspection procedures
vi. Shop Drawings and Product Data
vii. Special inspection documentation
c. Testing Reports.
01 77 00.06
A.
PRIOR TO FINAL PAYMENT BY PHASE:
Prior to Final Payment for each phase complete the following and items noted below:
1. Schedule a time with the Architect and College to inspect the work following the
completion of the final punch list by the Contractor.
2. Provide a letter documenting that the project has been completed in accordance
with Contract Documents and Warranting materials and work.
3. Provide Operations and Maintenance Manuals per 01 77 00.
4. Record Documents
5. Final Cleaning
6. Submit Warranties and Bonds
7. Davis Bacon payroll submissions
01 77 00.07
CLEANING:
A.
Final Cleaning:
1. Thoroughly clean the interior and exterior of the project areas, removing misplaced
mastic, paint, and other finishes. Remove dust, dirt, and stains from new and
existing materials.
B.
Sweep all exterior paving areas, remove debris and stains. Remove debris from
landscaping areas. Rake and/or remove debris from all other areas affected by the work.
END OF SECTION 01 77 00
SECTION
01 78 36
WARRANTIES
01 78 36.01
WARRANTY PERIOD:
A. Unless noted otherwise as extended, standard general warranty period shall be two (2)
years from the date of Substantial Completion of each phase. Refer to Project Manual
specifications for additional warranty requirements.
01 78 36.02
EXCLUSIONS:
A. The Contractor warrants to the College and Architect that materials and equipment furnished
under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by
the Contract Documents, that the work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality
required or permitted, and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract
Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly
approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes
remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor,
improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under
normal usage.
01 78 36.03
A.
CONTRACTOR GUARANTEE:
Neither the final payment nor any provision in the Contract Documents shall constitute an
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
26
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
acceptance of the Work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents or relieve
the Contractor or its sureties of liability with respect to any warranties or responsibility for
faulty materials and workmanship. The Contractor guarantees that the Work will conform
to the Contract Documents.
01 78 36.04
A.
FAILURE TO REMEDY DEFECTS:
If the Contractor fails to remedy any defects or damage, the College may correct the Work
or repair the damages, and the cost and expense incurred in such event shall be paid by
or be recoverable from the Contractor or Surety, or offset against any amounts owing the
Contractor.
01 78 36.05
TIME OF WARRANTY SUBMISSION:
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions
of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion
is indicated.
01 78 36.06
A.
B.
C.
D.
WARRANTY SUBMISSION:
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of
the Project Manual.
Bind warranties and bonds in 3-ring, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to
accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8 ½ x 11.
Provide dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify
product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including
the name of the product and the name, address and telephone number of the installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title “WARRANTIES,”
Project name, and name of Contractor.
01 78 36.07
A.
ADDITIONAL COPIES:
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.
END OF SECTION 01 78 36
SECTION
01 89 30
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
01 89 30.01
A.
SUMMARY:
This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
01 89 30.02
DEFINITIONS:
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site,
unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Contractor to salvage the following items and turn them over to the
College for first right of refusal and as noted on the Contract Documents and Project
Manual:
1. Life safety devices
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
27
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Public address speakers
Toilet accessories
Light fixtures and exit signs
Energy Management Control system parts
Door hardware
Exterior metal panels, doors, and windows
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse,
and reinstall them where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are
not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
01 89 30.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
01 89 30.04
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A.
College will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so College's operations will not be disrupted.
B.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by College
as far as practical.
C.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and the Contract Drawings
and Project Manual before proceeding with selective demolition.
D.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in
the Work. An Asbestos Plan is in place at PCC; areas known to contain asbestos are clearly
marked with approved signage. Asbestos may be present in mastics, insulation, floor and
roofing materials.
1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not
disturb, and immediately notify Architect and College. The PCC Facility Project
Manager will notify. PCC’s Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) Department
so that the materials are sampled, and PCC EH&S will arrange to have all required
hazardous materials removed under a separate contract.
E.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
01 89 30.05
EXAMINATION:
A.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent
of selective demolition required.
B.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with
intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
28
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
01 89 30.06
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:
A.
Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect
them against damage during selective demolition operations.
B.
Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated
utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively
demolished.
1. If required, arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before
proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that
bypass the area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of
services/systems to other parts of building.
01 89 30.07
PREPARATION:
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
B.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to
prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
01 89 30.08
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION EXECUTION:
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within
limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining
construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing, not
hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces.
Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid
marring existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches.
4. At concealed spaces, such as duct and
pipe interiors, verify condition and
contents of hidden space.
5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not
to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
6. Remove demolished items and materials promptly from Project area.
B.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and
soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect and College, items may
be removed to a suitable, protected, insured, storage location during selective demolition
and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
C.
Existing Items to Be Salvaged and Given to College. The Contractor shall meet with the
Facilities Project Manager prior to demolition to confirm the items to be salvaged. The
College shall have the first right of refusal for all items indicated to be demolished. Salvaged
items rejected by the College shall be disposed of by the General Contractor. The following
is a list of items to be salvaged:
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
29
Pima County Community College District
Upgrades and Renovation of the West Campus K Building
Dental Lab and Dental Clinic Phase 3 & 4
1. Any fire alarm devices removed during demolition will be given to the PCC
Environmental Health and Safety Department or the PCC District Facilities Project
Manager assigned to this Project.
2. White boards
3. Ceiling mounted projection system
4. Wireless Access Points
5. Fire extinguishers and cabinets
6. Dental Laboratory model trimmer cabinets
7. Door hardware
8. Dental Lab filtration system
9. Clocks
10. Equipment
11. Lab hoods
12. Paper towel dispensers
13. Plumbing fixtures
14. Energy management control system components
D.
The Contractor and Subcontractors are expected not to activate the College’s fire alarm
system due to dust generating activities such as drywall sanding, using vacuums without
filters, sweeping etc. If the fire alarm system or fire alarm devices such as smoke or heat
detectors need to be temporarily disabled or covered, the Contractor shall notify the PCC
Facilities Project Manager (with 48 hour minimum notice prior to beginning work) who then
will notify the PCC Environmental Health and Safety Department to coordinate this portion
with PCC.
E.
The Contractor shall notify the College prior to the start of all Hot Work. This work involves
cutting torches, welding, grinding, open flame, or produces slag, sparks, or excessive heat.
The PCC Environmental Safety Department shall authorize this Hot Work in accordance
with the PCC Hot Work Management Program. Whenever possible, the Contractor shall
utilize construction methods that do not require cutting torches or open flames.
01 89 30.09
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS:
A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged,
reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain College's property, remove demolished
materials from Project site and legally dispose of them.
B.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off College's property and legally dispose of
them off site.
01 89 30.10
CLEANING:
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
demolition operations began.
B.
The Work area shall be cleaned up on a daily basis.
END OF SECTION 01 89 30
END OF DIVISION 1
PROJECT MANUAL
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
30
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 26 00
10 44 13
10 44 16
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11 53 00
11 53 33
LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
EMERGENCY SAFETY APPLIANCES
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 35 53.13
12 35 53.16
12 36 16
12 36 23.13
12 36 53
12 36 61
12 48 13
METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK (DENTAL LAB)
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD LABORATORY CASEWORK (DENTAL LAB)
METAL COUNTERTOPS (DENTAL LAB)
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS (DENTAL CLINIC)
LABORATORY COUNTERTOPS (DENTAL CLINIC)
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES (DENTAL LAB)
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NONE THIS CONTRACT)
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NONE THIS CONTRACT)
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION (NONE THIS CONTRACT)
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 05 17
22 05 18
22 05 23
22 05 29
22 05 53
22 07 19
22 11 16
22 13 16
22 13 19
22 61 13
22 62 13
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
VACUUM PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
23 01 30.51
23 05 16
23 05 93
23 07 13
23 08 00
23 09 00
23 31 13
23 33 00
233423
23 37 13
HVAC AIR DUCT CLEANING
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
DUCT INSULATION
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
METAL DUCTS
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
TOC - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Table of
Contents
DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION (NONE THIS CONTRACT)
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 10
26 05 19
26 05 23
26 05 26
26 05 29
26 05 33
26 05 44
26 05 53
26 22 00
26 24 16
26 25 00
26 27 26
ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLING
CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PANELBOARDS
ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
WIRING DEVICES
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
27 01 00
27 05 26
27 05 28
27 05 36
27 05 53
27 11 00
27 15 00
27 53 14
BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
CLOCK SYSTEMS
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 05 13
28 31 11
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK (NONE THIS CONTRACT)
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (NONE THIS CONTRACT)
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES (NONE THIS CONTRACT)
DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION (NONE THIS CONTRACT)
DIVISION 35 - WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION (NONE THIS CONTRACT)
DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTEGRATION (NONE THIS CONTRACT)
DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING, AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT (NONE THIS CONTRACT)
DIVISION 42 - PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND EQUIPMENT (NONE THIS CONTRACT)
DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT (NONE THIS
CONTRACT)
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
TOC - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Table of
Contents
DIVISION 44 - POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT (NONE THIS CONTRACT)
DIVISION45 - INDUSTRY SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT (NONE THIS CONTRACT)
DIVISION 48 - ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION (NONE THIS CONTRACT)
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
TOC - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Table of
Contents
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building.
Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
Section 011100 "Summary of Work" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owneroccupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.
Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent
damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall
where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
1.5
Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
024119 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Selective
Demolition
B.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far
as practical.
1.
Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:
a.
C.
Operating equipment.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
1.
Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
a.
2.
The only suspected potential hazardous materials in this project are roofing
materials. Please notify the Owner prior to any new or modified roof penetrations so
an asbestos survey can be accomplished in the subject areas before the roofing is
disturbed.
If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate
contract.
D.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
E.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
1.6
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
Notify warrantor before proceeding. Existing warranties include the following:
1.
B.
Roof system.
Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that
existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at
Project closeout.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
024119 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Selective
Demolition
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
B.
Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not
guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.
C.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
3.2
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect
them against damage.
1.
Comply with requirements for existing
Section 011100 "Summary of Work."
2.
Owner Facilities Manager will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when
requested by Contractor.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems,
equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
services/systems
interruptions
specified
in
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and
cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled:
Disconnect and cap services.
Remove, clean, and store equipment; and
reinstall, reconnect, and make
equipment operational by other hired by Owners.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
024119 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Selective
Demolition
3.3
PREPARATION
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls:
Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
B.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.4
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015100
"Temporary Utilities."
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area
and to and from occupied portions of building.
Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas.
Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling
specified in Section 015100 "Utilities.”
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain[ fire watch and] portable
fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
024119 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Selective
Demolition
B.
Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for reuse
of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on
Drawings without Architect's approval.
C.
Removal and Salvaged Items and reinstallation by Owner as noted on drawings.
D.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A.
Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain
and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.
B.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
remove.
C.
Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations
in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use
methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers.
3.6
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise
indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally
dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
B.
Burning: Not allowed at any time.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.7
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
024119 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Selective
Demolition
SECTION 033053 - MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture
design, placement procedures, and finishes.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing readymixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production
facilities and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCRETE, GENERAL
A.
Comply with ACI 301.
B.
Comply with ACI 117.
2.2
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B.
Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn
steel wire into flat sheets.
2.3
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Materials:
1.
2.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type II.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
033053 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Miscellaneous
Cast-in-Place Concrete
B.
Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
C.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.
D.
Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and
that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened
concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
2.4
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A.
2.5
Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and
designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches
long.
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick; or plastic sheet,
ASTM E 1745, Class C.
B.
Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or selfexpanding cork.
2.6
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
B.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C.
Water: Potable.
D.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
2.7
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
Normal-Weight Concrete:
1.
2.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.
Maximum W/C Ratio:0.45.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
033053 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Miscellaneous
Cast-in-Place Concrete
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.8
Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash as needed to reduce the total amount of portland
cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.
Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of
trowel-finished floor slabs to exceed 3 percent.
Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not
less than a rate of 1.0 lb/cu. yd..
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
deliver
concrete
according
to
When air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.
EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION
A.
Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with
longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.
1.
3.4
Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint tape.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting
reinforcement.
1.
3.5
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
033053 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Miscellaneous
Cast-in-Place Concrete
B.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of concrete thickness, as follows:
C.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions
with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other
locations, as indicated.
1.
3.6
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete
surface unless otherwise indicated.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 301.
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
C.
Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
3.7
FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for
concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies
to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater
appears on surface.
1.
Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.
C.
Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and surfaces to receive concrete floor
topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other
bonded cementitious floor finishes unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor
and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, fluid-applied or directto-deck-applied membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
E.
Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces
exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a
cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.
F.
Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to
surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset
or thinset methods. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly
scarify surface with a fine broom.
G.
Slip-Resistive Broom Finish: Apply a slip-resistive finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior
concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked
surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
033053 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Miscellaneous
Cast-in-Place Concrete
3.8
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hotweather protection during curing.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C.
Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
D.
Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a
combination of the following methods:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
3.9
Water.
Continuous water-fog spray.
Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven
days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and
waterproof tape.
Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests: Perform according to ACI 301.
1.
Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction
thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.
END OF SECTION 033053
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
033053 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Miscellaneous
Cast-in-Place Concrete
SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One
and Two Family Dwellings."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc.
California Expanded Metal Products Company.
ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc.
Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division.
Craco Mfg., Inc.
Custom Stud Inc.
Design Shapes in Steel.
Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company.
Formetal Co. Inc. (The).
MarinoWARE.
MBA Building Supplies, Inc.
Nuconsteel; a Nucor Company.
Olmar Supply, Inc.
Quail Run Building Materials, Inc.
SCAFCO Corporation.
Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc.
State Building Products, Inc.
Steel Construction Systems.
Steel Network, Inc. (The).
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
054000 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Cold-Formed
Metal Framing
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
2.2
Steel Structural Systems.
Steeler, Inc.
Super Stud Building Products, Inc.
Telling Industries, LLC.
United Metal Products, Inc.
United Steel Manufacturing.
COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and
coating weight as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Steel Sheet for Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as
follows:
1.
2.
2.3
Grade: ST33H (ST230H) minimum ST50H (ST340H).
Coating: G60 (Z180).
Grade: 50 (340), Class 1.
Coating: G60 (Z180).
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A.
Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,
with stiffened flanges, and as shown on drawings.
B.
Steel Track:
Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as shown on drawings.
C.
Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips, capable of accommodating upward
and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical
attachment to stud web.
D.
Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with
unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with
flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as
shown on the drawings.
2.4
FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A.
Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade,
Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.
B.
Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration.
2.5
ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A.
Steel Shapes and Clips:
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
054000 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Cold-Formed
Metal Framing
B.
Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength
design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to
the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing
agency.
C.
Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICCES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190
conducted by a qualified testing agency.
D.
Mechanical Fasteners:
drill screws.
1.
2.6
ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel
Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
B.
Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, standard widths to match width of
bottom track or rim track members.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and
the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to ensure a
uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.
B.
Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of
foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
assembled.
B.
Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C.
Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened.
D.
Install framing members in one-piece lengths.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
054000 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Cold-Formed
Metal Framing
E.
Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in
intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent
connections to framing are secured.
F.
Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum
allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet:
3.3
EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A.
Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to
supporting structure as indicated.
B.
Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as
follows:
1.
Stud Spacing: 16 inches (406 mm).
C.
Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or
warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D.
Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads
while providing lateral support.
E.
Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but
not less than 6’-0” on center. Fasten at each stud intersection.
1.
2.
3.
F.
3.4
Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of
single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid
blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.
Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched
studs.
Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and
stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud
flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles,
continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing
system.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
C.
Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
054000 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Cold-Formed
Metal Framing
D.
Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
E.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.5
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 054000
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
054000 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Cold-Formed
Metal Framing
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1.
1.4
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections.
Show anchorage and accessory items.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation with dental equipment installer hired by Pima Community College.
Contact information to be provided by Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
055000 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal Fabrications
2.2
FERROUS METALS
A.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
2.3
FASTENERS
A.
Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
B.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where
indicated, flat washers.
C.
Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1.
D.
Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
E.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
2.5
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099123 Interior Painting.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only
as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value
of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
C.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
D.
Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
055000 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal Fabrications
F.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
G.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
2.6
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges
and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C.
Field Welding: Not allowed in building:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
3.2
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for
use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and
other connectors.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust equipment supports as needed to allow for installation of equipment by others.
END OF SECTION 055000
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
055000 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal Fabrications
SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
Wood blocking and nailers.
Plywood backing panels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1.
2.
B.
2.2
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
Blocking.
Nailers.
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
B.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species.
C.
For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any
of the following species and grades:
1.
Mixed southern pine, No. 3 grade; SPIB.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
061053 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Miscellaneous
Rough Carpentry
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Eastern softwoods, No. 3 Common grade; NELMA.
Northern species, No. 3 Common grade; NLGA.
Western woods, Standard or No. 3 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A.
2.4
Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not
indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this article for material and manufacture.
B.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
C.
Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing:
manufacturer for material being fastened.
ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
B.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring
backing panels.
D.
Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
1.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
END OF SECTION 061053
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
061053 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Miscellaneous
Rough Carpentry
SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.
Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced
architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet
installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products; high-pressure decorative
laminate cabinet hardware and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection:
1.
2.
D.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Plastic laminates.
PVC edge material.
Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
Wood-grain plastic laminates, 12 by 24 inches, for each type, pattern and surface finish.
Thermoset decorative panels, 8 by 10 inches, for each color, pattern, and surface
finish, with edge banding on one edge.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For fabricator.
B.
Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates:
certificates.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
064116 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
AWI Quality Certification Program
Plastic-Laminate-Faced
Architectural Cabinets
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service
performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have
been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas,
store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field
Conditions" Article.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90
deg F and relative humidity between 17 and 50 percent during the remainder of the construction
period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions
of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying
the Work.
1.
C.
1.8
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish
dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and
coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed
as indicated.
B.
Hardware Coordination:
Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in
Section 087100 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" to fabricator of architectural
woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
064116 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plastic-Laminate-Faced
Architectural Cabinets
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1.
Provide labels from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including
installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
B.
Grade: Custom.
C.
Type of Construction: Frameless.
D.
Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.
E.
Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch.
F.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
G.
Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGL.
Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
Edges: Grade VGS PVC T-mold matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish, color as
noted on drawings.
Pattern Direction: Vertical.
Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
I.
Abet Laminati, Inc.
Formica Corporation.
Lamin-Art, Inc.
Panolam Industries International, Inc.
Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.
Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative
laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
064116 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plastic-Laminate-Faced
Architectural Cabinets
J.
Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws
from interior of body.
1.
K.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of
exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.2
Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical
fasteners.
Match Architect's sample.
WOOD MATERIALS
A.
Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard
for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of
referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Wood Moisture Content: 4 to 9 percent.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2-2002, conforming to ANSI MR50 (having a 24
hour soak thickness swell of less than or equal to 5.5%), made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.
Thermoset Decorative Panels: Medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally-fused,
melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of
NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
The cabinet material for any custom millwork in the Sterilization Room, K283 (Phase 4), the
Dental Lab, K209, and the Porcelain Room, K209A shall be Quality Panels; Xcelamine 3/4”
thick moisture resistant board with a 24 hour soak thickness swell of less than 0.08%, or
approved equal.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets except for items specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."
B.
Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening,
self-closing, by BLUM Manufacturing only -- No substitutions accepted.
C.
Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid brushed aluminum, 4 inches.
D.
Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071.
1.
Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
064116 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plastic-Laminate-Faced
Architectural Cabinets
E.
Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07122.
1.
2.
G.
Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel or epoxycoated steel with polymer rollers.
Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated-steel
ball-bearing slides.
For drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm)
wide, provide Grade 1.
For drawers more than 3 inches (75 mm) high but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high
and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.
For drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide,
provide Grade 1HD-200.
For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1HD-100.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Olympus Lock,
Inc.; 100DR Deadbolt Cabinet Door Lock or comparable product.
Key all cabinet doors alike – 915, with catch, and spacer for pair of doors.
Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07042.
1.
2.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Olympus Lock,
Inc.; 200DW Deadbolt Cabinet Drawer Lock or comparable product.
Key all cabinet drawers alike – 915.
H.
Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03031.
I.
Exposed Hardware Finishes:
For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1.
J.
2.4
Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class
requirements in BHMA A156.9.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than
15 percent moisture content. Installed behind gypsum wall board. Cabinet fabricator to provide
shop drawing of required blocking locations.
B.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrousmetal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
C.
Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
waterproof.
D.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate and Edges: Unpigmented contact cement. Adhesive
shall be waterproof.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
064116 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Adhesives shall be
Plastic-Laminate-Faced
Architectural Cabinets
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
B.
Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent
possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment
and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing,
trimming, and fitting.
C.
Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work,
and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to
produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and
burrs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
B.
Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as
required.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B.
Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop.
C.
Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D.
Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
E.
Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening,
countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
1.
F.
Use filler matching finish of items being installed.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately
aligned.
Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1.
Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
064116 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plastic-Laminate-Faced
Architectural Cabinets
2.
3.3
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16
inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into
wood, blocking.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION 064116
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
064116 - 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plastic-Laminate-Faced
Architectural Cabinets
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
Glass-fiber blanket.
Section 075216 "Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing"
for insulation specified as part of roofing construction.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product test reports.
B.
Research reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GLASS-FIBER BLANKET
A.
Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion
characteristics.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Guardian Building Products, Inc.
Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
Knauf Insulation.
Owens Corning.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
072100 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Thermal
Insulation
2.2
ACCESSORIES
A.
Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:
1.
Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.
B.
Insulation Anchors, Spindles, and Standoffs: As recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier
materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without
damaging insulation and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain, or snow at any time.
C.
Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill
voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D.
Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths,
and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or
required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more
than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit
between ends.
Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or
protected from contact with insulation.
For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced
blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to
flanges of metal studs.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
072100 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Thermal
Insulation
B.
Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to
prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1.
Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume
equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft..
END OF SECTION 072100
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
072100 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Thermal
Insulation
SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Building wrap.
Flexible flashing.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
1.4
For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing
according to referenced standards.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC-ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER
A.
Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes
of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap.
DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek.
Ludlow Coated Products; Barricade Building Wrap.
Pactiv, Inc.; GreenGuard.
Raven Industries Inc.; Fortress Pro Weather Protective Barrier.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
072500 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Weather
Barriers
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.2
Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 20 perms ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method
(Procedure A).
Air Permeance: Not more than 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. at 0.3-inch wg when tested according to
ASTM E 2178.
Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months.
Building-Wrap Tape:
Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.
by
building-wrap
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber
or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or
spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); DuPont Flashing Tape.
Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Butyl Self
Adhered Flashing.
Protecto Wrap Company; BT-25 XL.
Raven Industries Inc.; Fortress Flashshield.
Advanced Building Products Inc.; Wind-o-wrap.
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500.
Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Fortiflash 25.
Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Plus SelfAdhered Flashing.
MFM Building Products Corp.; Window Wrap.
Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard JT-20 Tape.
Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Presto-Seal.
B.
Primer for Flexible Flashing:
substrate.
Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for
C.
Nails and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION
A.
Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely fastened to
framing immediately after sheathing is installed.
B.
Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:
1.
2.
Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansionor control-joint locations.
Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap unless otherwise
indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
072500 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Weather
Barriers
C.
Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing
with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
D.
Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.2
Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.
Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at flashing
flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings.
Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings.
After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure
that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.
END OF SECTION 072500
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
072500 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Weather
Barriers
SECTION 074213.13 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Exterior, concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.
Reuse existing, salvaged wall panels to extent possible, and if necessary, furnish and install
additional matching panels per this specification.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of new product.
B.
Samples: For each type of new metal panel indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
B.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
2.2
Test-Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. (137 Pa).
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS
A.
General: Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and
interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to
supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight
installation.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
074213.13 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Formed Metal
Wall Panels
B.
Flush-Profile, Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with vertical panel edges and a flat
pan between panel edges; with flush joint between panels.
1.
Manufacturer: Available from Star Aluminum, 809 N. Irvington Rd., Tucson, AZ 85756. (520)
889-7070.
2.
Aluminum Sheet: Alloy as standard with manufacturer, with temper as required to suit
forming operations and structural performance required.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
2.3
Thickness: match existing.
Surface: Embossed finish.
Exterior Finish: Field painted to match existing.
Color: Match existing.
Panel Coverage: 12 inches (305 mm).
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system
including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers,
closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim to match existing, formed from same material as
metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations
include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes,
fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system
as adjacent metal panels.
C.
Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed
fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied
coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.
D.
Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with
panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's
standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements
demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and
structural requirements.
B.
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that
apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
074213.13 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Formed Metal
Wall Panels
2.5
FINISHES
A.
Panels and Accessories:
1.
Refer to Section 099113 Exterior Painting for field-applied paint to match existing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, sheathing, weather barrier, and other
miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal
panel manufacturer's written recommendations.
METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
Watertight Installation:
1.
2.
Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels, using
sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type panels; and
elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.
Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and
accessories.
B.
Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight
mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other
components.
C.
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and
seams that are permanently watertight.
END OF SECTION 074213.13
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
074213.13 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Formed Metal
Wall Panels
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Roof curbs.
Equipment supports.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roofmounted items.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Unless specifically noted otherwise, PVC and other plastic accessories are prohibited.
METAL MATERIALS
A.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation and mill
phosphatized for field painting where indicated.
1.
B.
Mill-Phosphatized Finish: Manufacturer's standard for field painting.
Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M unless
otherwise indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
077200 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Roof
Accessories
C.
Galvanized-Steel Tube:
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
D.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized.
2.3
ASTM A 500,
round
tube,
hot-dip
galvanized
according
to
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, thickness as indicated.
C.
Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and
metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened.
Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners.
D.
Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or silicone
or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
E.
Sealants: As recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated.
2.4
ROOF CURBS
A.
Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units with integral spring-type vibration isolators and
capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other
construction indicated on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner
joints, stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation, and integrally formed
deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
B.
AES Industries, Inc.
Curbs Plus, Inc.
Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
LM Curbs.
Metallic Products Corp.
Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Pate Company (The).
Roof Products, Inc.
Safe Air of Illinois.
Thybar Corporation.
Vent Products Co., Inc.
Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be
supported.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
077200 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Roof
Accessories
C.
Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick.
1.
2.
D.
Construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Finish: Factory prime coating.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch- thick polyisocyanurate board insulation.
Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.
Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.
Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb height
tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surface of perimeter curb is level. Equip
unit with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Equipment Supports: Internally reinforced metal equipment supports capable of supporting
superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated
on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, stepped integral
metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at
perimeter bottom.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Pate Company (The).
B.
Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be
supported.
C.
Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick.
1.
2.
D.
Finish: Factory prime coating.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch thick polyisocyanurate board insulation.
Liner: Same material as equipment support, of manufacturer's standard thickness and
finish.
Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal
and finish as equipment support.
Fabricate equipment supports to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.
Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate each support with height to
accommodate roof slope so that tops of supports are level with each other. Equip
supports with water diverters or crickets on sides that obstruct water flow.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
077200 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Roof
Accessories
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.2
Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in
alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.
Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete
installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or
loosening of fasteners and seals.
Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from
contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous
coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1.
C.
Install roof accessories
Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum or stainless-steel roof accessories with
bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious
construction.
Seal joints with sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.
REPAIR AND CLEANING
A.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.
B.
Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to
Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
C.
Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by
finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 077200
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
077200 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Roof
Accessories
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system.
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1.
1.3
Include location and design
Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting
agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration,
with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fireprotection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated
assembly.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in
compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Product test reports.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to
FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to
comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
requirements:
1.
2.
C.
Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following
Penetration firestopping tests are performed by UL FM Global.
Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in
"Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems bearing marking of qualified
testing and inspection agency.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
078413 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Penetration
Firestopping
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Hilti, Inc.
3M Fire Protection Products.
Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A.
Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according
to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction penetrated.
Penetration firestopping systems shall be
compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if
any.
B.
Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based
on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.
1.
C.
F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on
testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.
1.
2.
F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
D.
Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
E.
Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by
penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency
for firestopping indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
078413 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Penetration
Firestopping
B.
Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and
published drawings for products and applications indicated.
C.
Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths
required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1.
D.
Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1.
2.
3.
3.2
After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming
materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating
items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels.
Attach labels
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be
visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners
or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces
on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.3
The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb.
Management of Any Damage."
Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
Date of installation.
Manufacturer's name.
Installer's name.
Notify Building
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of
testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.
C.
Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection
reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
3.4
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE
A.
Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory" under product Category XHEZ.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
078413 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Penetration
Firestopping
B.
Where FM Global-approved systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers listed in FM
Global's "Building Materials Approval Guide" under "Wall and Floor Penetration Fire Stops."
C.
Firestopping with No Penetrating Items:
1.
UL-Classified Systems:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
D.
Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing:
1.
UL-Classified Systems:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
E.
C-AJ (Concrete floor or wall).
C-BJ (Concrete floor or wall).
F-A (Concrete floor).
F-B (Concrete floor).
F-E (Concrete floor and bar joist).
WJ (Concrete wall)
WL (Gypsum wall).
Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing:
1.
UL-Classified Systems:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
F.
C-AJ (Concrete floor or wall).
C-BJ (Concrete floor or wall).
F-A (Concrete floor).
F-B (Concrete floor).
F-E (Concrete floor and bar joist).
WJ (Concrete wall)
WL (Gypsum wall).
C-AJ (Concrete floor or wall).
C-BJ (Concrete floor or wall).
F-A (Concrete floor).
F-B (Concrete floor).
F-E (Concrete floor and bar joist).
WJ (Concrete wall)
WL (Gypsum wall).
Firestopping for Electrical Cables:
1.
UL-Classified Systems:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
C-AJ (Concrete floor or wall).
C-BJ (Concrete floor or wall).
F-A (Concrete floor).
F-B (Concrete floor).
F-E (Concrete floor and bar joist).
WJ (Concrete wall)
WL (Gypsum wall).
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
078413 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Penetration
Firestopping
G.
Firestopping for Cable Trays with Electric Cables:
1.
UL-Classified Systems:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
H.
Firestopping for Insulated Pipes:
1.
UL-Classified Systems:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
I.
C-AJ (Concrete floor or wall).
C-BJ (Concrete floor or wall).
F-A (Concrete floor).
F-B (Concrete floor).
F-E (Concrete floor and bar joist).
WJ (Concrete wall)
WL (Gypsum wall).
Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants:
1.
UL-Classified Systems:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
J.
C-AJ (Concrete floor or wall).
C-BJ (Concrete floor or wall).
F-A (Concrete floor).
F-B (Concrete floor).
F-E (Concrete floor and bar joist).
WJ (Concrete wall)
WL (Gypsum wall).
C-AJ (Concrete floor or wall).
C-BJ (Concrete floor or wall).
F-A (Concrete floor).
F-B (Concrete floor).
F-E (Concrete floor and bar joist).
WJ (Concrete wall)
WL (Gypsum wall).
Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants:
1.
UL-Classified Systems:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
C-AJ (Concrete floor or wall).
C-BJ (Concrete floor or wall).
F-A (Concrete floor).
F-B (Concrete floor).
F-E (Concrete floor and bar joist).
WJ (Concrete wall)
WL (Gypsum wall).
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
078413 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Penetration
Firestopping
K.
Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants:
1.
UL-Classified Systems:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
C-AJ (Concrete floor or wall).
C-BJ (Concrete floor or wall).
F-A (Concrete floor).
F-B (Concrete floor).
F-E (Concrete floor and bar joist).
WJ (Concrete wall)
WL (Gypsum wall).
END OF SECTION 078413
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
078413 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Penetration
Firestopping
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Silicone joint sealants.
Nonstaining silicone joint sealants.
Urethane joint sealants.
Mildew-resistant joint sealants.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
1.3
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.
B.
Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.
C.
Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
Joint-sealant formulation.
Joint-sealant color.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product test reports.
B.
Preconstruction laboratory test reports.
C.
Preconstruction field-adhesion-test reports.
D.
Field-adhesion-test reports.
E.
Sample warranties.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing
indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
079200 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Joint
Sealants
1.6
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A.
1.7
Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to
Project joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply
with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty
period.
1.
B.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or
replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
A.
VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing
system shall comply with the following:
1.
2.
B.
2.2
Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 775 g/L
or less.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent
movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Dow Corning Corporation.
GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
Polymeric Systems, Inc.
Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company.
Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
079200 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Joint
Sealants
B.
Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and
minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.3
Dow Corning Corporation.
GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.
Pecora Corporation.
Tremco Incorporated.
URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25
percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,
Use NT.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
B.
BASF Corporation; Construction Systems.
Bostik, Inc.
ER Systems; an ITW Company.
Pecora Corporation.
Polymeric Systems, Inc.
Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company.
Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
Sika Corporation; Joint Sealants.
Tremco Incorporated.
Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent
movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
BASF Corporation; Construction Systems.
Pecora Corporation.
Polymeric Systems, Inc.
Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company.
Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
079200 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Joint
Sealants
C.
Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent
movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M,
Grade P, Class 50, Uses T and NT.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a.
2.4
LymTal International Inc.
MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to
prevent mold and mildew growth.
B.
Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag,
plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone
joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.5
Dow Corning Corporation.
GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.
Soudal USA.
Tremco Incorporated.
JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C closed-cell material with a surface skin or
Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin); of size and density to control sealant depth and
otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
B.
2.6
BASF Corporation; Construction Systems.
Construction Foam Products; a division of Nomaco, Inc.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
079200 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Joint
Sealants
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply
with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1.
2.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as
indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 1193 and joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation
instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
C.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
D.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated. Use tooling
agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or
adjacent surfaces.
1.
Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
079200 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Joint
Sealants
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1.
Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
a.
2.
B.
3.4
Perform one test for each type of sealant/substrate.
Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand
Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or
noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove
sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements.
Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A.
Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1.
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
2.
3.
B.
Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1.
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
C.
Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units.
Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1.
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
079200 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Joint
Sealants
D.
Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1.
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
E.
Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not
subject to significant movement.
1.
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
F.
Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
Tile control and expansion joints.
Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of concrete walls and partitions.
Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors windows
and elevator entrances.
Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
Joint Sealant: Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal
nontraffic surfaces.
1.
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
END OF SECTION 079200
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
079200 - 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Joint
Sealants
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes hollow-metal work.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMMHMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions and finishes.
Elevations of each door type.
Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses.
Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
Details of each different wall opening condition.
Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
Details of accessories.
Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of
supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
081113 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit
and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
B.
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.2
Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Ceco Door.
Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
Titan Metal Products, Inc.
Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperaturerise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1.
2.3
Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled
for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with
NFPA 105.
INTERIOR FRAMES
A.
Construct interior frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication,
hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.
B.
Standard-Duty Frames: SDI A250.4, Level A. At locations indicated in the drawings.
1.
2.
Physical Performance: Level C according to SDI A250.4.
Frames:
a.
b.
3.
Materials: Primed cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch.
Construction: Slip-on drywall Face welded. Knockdown frames not allowed.
Exposed Finish: Prime.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
081113 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames
2.4
EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,
fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as
specified.
B.
Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the drawings.
1.
2.
Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.
Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Frames:
a.
b.
4.
2.5
Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
Thickness: 1-3/4 inches
Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with minimum
A40 coating.
Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.
Core: Polystyrene or Polyisocyanurate.
Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with
minimum A40 coating.
Construction: Full profile welded.
Exposed Finish: Prime.
FRAME ANCHORS
A.
Jamb Anchors:
1.
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch thick.
2.
Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
3.
Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inchdiameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall,
with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
B.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as
follows:
1.
2.6
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet:
exposed applications.
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
081113 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames
D.
Frame Anchors:
phosphatized.
1.
ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
E.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for
attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.
G.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
H.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of
fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
I.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
J.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per
coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and
other deleterious impurities.
2.7
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit
and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly
identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B.
Hollow-Metal Doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings
indicated.
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches.
Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face
sheets.
Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of
same material as face sheets.
Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture
to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by
NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond
edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing
of qualified testing agency.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
081113 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames
C.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints,
fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs
by butt welding.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor;
however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms
of jambs.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
c.
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24
inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame.
Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
D.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
E.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to
SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1.
2.
F.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted
door hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of
hollow-metal work for hardware.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where
indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted hairline joints.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollowmetal work.
Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each
glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and
frames.
Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation
types indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
081113 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames
2.8
STEEL FINISHES
A.
Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1.
2.9
Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;
compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B.
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame
installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place.
Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated.
SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.
1.
Comply with
Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
081113 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and
secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.
Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
frames and masonry with grout.
Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber
insulation.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on
exposed faces.
In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist,
and plumb to the following tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel
to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
3.4
Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations,
field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress,
and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
081113 - 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames
B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.
C.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D.
Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Factory-Finish Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with same material used for factory
finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in
painting Sections.
END OF SECTION 081113
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
081113 - 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Solid-core doors wood-veneer faces.
Factory finishing flush wood doors.
Factory machining for hardware.
Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door.
factory-finishing specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
1.4
Include details of core and edge construction and
Dimensions and locations of blocking.
Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
Dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Undercuts.
Requirements for veneer matching.
Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
Samples for Initial Selection: Factory-finished doors.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
B.
Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
081416- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Flush Wood
Doors
B.
Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C.
Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 17 and 50
percent during remainder of construction period.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.
Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch
span.
Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.2
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
Mohawk Doors; a Masonite company.
Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL
A.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's
"Architectural Woodwork Standards for, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
1.
B.
Provide AWI Quality Certification or WI Certified Compliance Labels indicating that doors
comply with requirements of grades specified.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
081416- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Flush Wood
Doors
C.
Particleboard-Core Doors:
1.
2.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde.
Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows:
a.
b.
c.
2.3
5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers.
5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop,
or armor plates.
5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.
VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Interior Solid-Core Doors all wood doors shall be solid-core:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.4
Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces.
Species: Maple.
Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced).
Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.
Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is
abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.
LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS
A.
Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads
unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
2.5
Wood Species: Same species as door faces.
Profile: Recessed tapered beads with exposed banding.
FABRICATION
A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA156.115-W, and hardware templates.
1.
C.
Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment
before factory machining.
Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.
1.
2.
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with
applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
081416- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Flush Wood
Doors
2.6
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,
including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,
before finishing.
1.
Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B.
Factory finish all wood doors.
C.
Transparent Finish:
1.
2.
3.
Grade: Premium.
Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 11, catalyzed
polyurethane.
Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and
swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
Reject doors with defects.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
C.
Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after
fitting and machining.
1.
2.
Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8
inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise
indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door
to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
Bevel doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.
D.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E.
Factory-Finished Doors:
Project site.
Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
081416- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Flush Wood
Doors
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.
Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence
of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 081416
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
081416- 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Flush Wood
Doors
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Exterior storefront framing.
Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes.
Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.
sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining
moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.
Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminumframed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
C.
1.3
Include plans, elevations,
Joinery, including concealed welds.
Anchorage.
Expansion provisions.
Glazing.
Flashing and drainage.
Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal and weather barriers.
Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Refer to Section 087100 “Door Hardware” for requirements..
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Qualification Data: For Installer.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance
manuals.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
084113 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Aluminum-Framed
Entrances and Storefront
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer, and who have a minimum of 5 years experience of similar size and
scope in the fabrication and erection of systems specified herein.
B.
Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated
by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.
1.
1.6
Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data
to Architect for review.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed
entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
Failure of operating components.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by
testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this
Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction.
B.
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:
1.
C.
No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested
according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load
design pressure, but not less than 7.00 lbf/sq. ft.
Thermal Movements:
temperature changes:
1.
Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
084113 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Aluminum-Framed
Entrances and Storefront
2.
Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,
anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to
AAMA 501.5.
a.
b.
c.
2.2
High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metalsurface temperature of 180 deg F.
Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F.
Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Arcadia AG451
Series or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
2.3
Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.
CMI Architectural.
Commercial Architectural Products, Inc.
EFCO Corporation.
Kawneer North America.
KT Fabrication, Inc.
Leed Himmel Industries, Inc.
Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope.
Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc.
TRACO.
Tubelite.
United States Aluminum.
Walters & Wolf Construction Specialties Inc.
YKK AP America Inc.
Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system,
including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.
FRAMING
A.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Construction: Non-thermally broken.
Glazing System: As indicated on Drawings.
Glazing Plane: As indicated on Drawings.
Finish: Clear anodic finish.
Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.
B.
Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not
integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
C.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining,
nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
084113 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Aluminum-Framed
Entrances and Storefront
D.
Materials:
1.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Steel Reinforcement:
Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer
complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation
and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in
SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
a.
b.
c.
2.4
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A.
Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
1.
2.
3.
Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extrudedaluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing
brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie
rods.
Door Design: As indicated.
Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
a.
2.5
Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A.
2.6
Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware is specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
GLAZING
A.
Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."
B.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,
resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
C.
Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O;
chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system
components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weathersealsealant, and structural-sealant-glazed storefront manufacturers for this use.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
084113 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Aluminum-Framed
Entrances and Storefront
2.7
ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners and Accessories:
Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1.
2.
3.
nonstaining,
Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing
system.
B.
Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate
fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials
and recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
D.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements
except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
2.8
FABRICATION
A.
Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B.
Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of
finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
C.
Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.
Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D.
Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
E.
Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block or screw-spline system.
F.
Fabricate components to resist water penetration as follows:
1.
G.
Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation
occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within aluminum-framed
entrances and storefront to exterior.
Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
1.
At exterior doors, provide continuous compression weather stripping at head and jambs.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
084113 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Aluminum-Framed
Entrances and Storefront
H.
Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
1.
At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
I.
Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.
J.
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop
Drawings.
2.9
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's
written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited
to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Do not install damaged components.
Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
Metal Protection:
1.
Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose
or by installing nonconductive spacers.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
084113 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Aluminum-Framed
Entrances and Storefront
2.
Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C.
Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
D.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E.
Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weatherstripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.
F.
Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
G.
Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant
manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind
sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
H.
Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1.
2.
3.4
Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.
Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware
according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed
fasteners to greatest extent possible.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the
following maximum tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
Alignment:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to
1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.
Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch
wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.
Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or
more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.
Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.
END OF SECTION 084113
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
084113 - 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Aluminum-Framed
Entrances and Storefront
SECTION 084329 - SLIDING STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes sliding aluminum-framed glass storefronts for interior application.
B.
The manufacturer of this product must be the same as for the aluminum-framed entrances and
storefronts (Section 084113).
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For sliding storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware,
attachments to other work, and operational clearances.
C.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Sample warranty.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.
B.
Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
C.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with
GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
084329 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sliding
Storefronts
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of sliding storefronts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
Deterioration of insulating glass as defined in Section 088000 "Glazing."
Warranty Period:
a.
b.
c.
Sliding Door: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Metal Finish: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Arcadia Architectural
Products, Inc.; 2820 Series Multislide or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.2
EFCO Corporation.
Fleetwood Aluminum Products, Inc.
Graham Architectural Products.
Hydro Aluminum North America.
Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
Milgard Windows.
MI Windows and Doors, Inc.
Peterson Architectural Products.
Plaza Door Co., Inc.
Thermal Windows, Inc.
TRACO.
HARDWARE
A.
2.3
Provide manufacturer’s standard sliding door hardware. For additional hardware items, refer to
Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
GLAZING
A.
Glass and Glazing System: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing" for safety glass, insulating-glass
units, and glazing requirements applicable to glazed sliding storefronts.
1.
Clear, insulating-safety-glass units.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
084329 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sliding
Storefronts
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
Accommodations for mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required
glazing edge clearances.
Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.
Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing doors,
hardware, accessories, and other components.
B.
Install sliding storefronts level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, warp or rack of frames
and panels, anchored securely in place to structural support and other adjacent construction.
C.
Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action
at points of contact with other materials according to ASTM E 2112, Section 5.12 "Dissimilar
Materials."
D.
Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
E.
Adjust operating panels to provide a tight fit at contact points, without binding.
F.
Adjust hardware for proper alignment, smooth operation, and proper latching without
unnecessary force or excessive clearance.
G.
Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing sliding doors. Comply with manufacturer's
written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
H.
Clean glass immediately after installing sliding storefronts. Comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and
clean surfaces.
I.
Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during construction period.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
084329 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sliding
Storefronts
J.
Protect sliding door surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact sliding door surfaces, remove
contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.
K.
Refinish or replace sliding storefronts with damaged finishes.
L.
Replace damaged components.
END OF SECTION 084329
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
084329 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sliding
Storefronts
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Mechanical door hardware for the following:
a.
b.
1.2
Swinging doors.
Sliding doors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Other Action Submittals:
1.
Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing
fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and
diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work
to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
a.
b.
c.
Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions
of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door
hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the
fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.
Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format, and use same door numbers
as in the Contract Documents.
Content: Include the following information:
1)
2)
3)
2.
Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each
door and frame.
Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor
plans and to door and frame schedule.
Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style,
function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.
Locksets: All locksets shall be ordered without cylinders. The lockset cylinders shall be ASSA
key-in-knob #65691. They shall be supplied and installed by Pima Community College’s
Locksmith upon occupancy.
a.
b.
No interchangeable core sets.
Contractor to provide own locksets for duration of construction and to remove
upon completion of work and in coordination with Pima Community College.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
087100- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Door
Hardware
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals.
Include final hardware schedule.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved
by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the
course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and
keying.
1.
2.
B.
Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing
consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and
extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows:
1.
C.
Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity.
Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) Architectural Openings
Consultant (AOC).
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer.
1.
Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door
hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications
and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction are acceptable.
D.
Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do
not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
E.
Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the
U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines
ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1.
2.
Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.
Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a.
b.
3.
4.
Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.
Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch.
Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than
1/2 inch high.
Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door
will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the
leading edge of the door.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
087100- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Door
Hardware
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to
Project site.
B.
Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door
hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with
each item or package.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory
prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for
locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B.
Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's
security consultant.
C.
Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware
with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.
D.
Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing
construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing
conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to
provide proper door operation.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
1.
Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
Faulty operation of doors and door hardware.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.
a.
b.
c.
Locks: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
Exit Devices: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
Manual Closers: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
087100- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Door
Hardware
1.8
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Maintenance Tools and Instructions:
Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and
replacement of door hardware.
B.
Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance
by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance,
repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as
required for proper door and door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies that are the
same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A.
Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article to
comply with requirements in this Section and found in Door Schedule of drawings. If there is a
conflict bring to the attention of Architect.
1.
B.
Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities
of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article.
Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1.
2.2
Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products
complying with BHMA designations referenced.
Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Article.
HINGES
A.
Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal
doors and hollow-metal frames.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
Interior wood doors: 5 knuckle ball bearing type, full mortise standard weight with
non-rising pins. 4 1/2“ length for doors to 36” wide min 3 per door up to 90” tall.
Stanley. FBB179 Satin Chrome finish.
Exterior door hinges: Stainless steel, heavy weight, full mortise, with non-removable
pins, 5” length, 3 per door up to 90” tall. Stanley FBB191 Stainless Steel with Satin
finish. .
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
087100- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Door
Hardware
2.3
MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A.
Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.
B.
Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors,
and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw.
Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw.
Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch.
C.
Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Lock Trim:
1.
2.
Description: As indicated on Drawings.
Levers: Cast.
a.
3.
4.
5.
Sierra (SR).
Escutcheons (Roses): Wrought.
Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.
Operating Device: Lever with escutcheons (roses).
E.
Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with
requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended
to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.
F.
Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000.
1.
G.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, cylindrical locksets shall be by
Arrow USA only -- no substitutions.
Sliding Glass Door Locks: Bored, BHMA A156.2; Series 4000 or Mortise, BHMA A156.13.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
H.
Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc.
Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
Don-Jo Mfg., Inc.
Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
Rockwood Manufacturing Company.
SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
Trimco.
EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
087100- 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Door
Hardware
I.
Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3.
1.
2.4
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Precision Hardware
Apex Series exit devices- no substitutions. Model: 1108 or FL-1108, standard 1/4 turn Allen
type dogging. Finish US26D, BHMA-626, Satin Chrome, trim Number 9L.
LOCK CYLINDERS
A.
Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
1.
B.
2.5
Final cylinders to be provided by Pima Community College Locksmith shop.
Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores.
Provide 10 construction master keys.
KEYING
A.
2.6
Final cylinders and keying by Pima Community College Lock Shop. Contractor to notify P.C.C
Project Manager 5 days prior to completion of work to schedule Lock Shop.
OPERATING TRIM
A.
Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; aluminum, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.7
Hager Companies.
Hiawatha, Inc.
IVES Hardware; an Allegion company.
SURFACE CLOSERS
A.
Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch
speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm.
Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door,
exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable
to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, contractor shall provide LCN
brand door closers. Model number 4040XO, cushion arm, non-handed to meet ADA
requirements. All shall be installed with through bolts. Finish aluminum. No exceptions.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
087100- 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Door
Hardware
2.8
STOPS AND BUMPERS
A.
Door bumpers/stops.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
2.9
BBW.
Quality.
Trimco
Provide wall type where conditions permit, otherwise floor type.
DOOR GASKETING
A.
Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for
gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible
seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by
manufacturer.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
2.10
A.
Natim.
Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
Zero.
At exterior doors provide metal retainers elastomeric gasket.
At all classrooms, lab, restrooms, conference rooms provide adhesive mounted bulb
gasketing.
THRESHOLDS
Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with ADA requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Hager Companies.
Pemko Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
Reese Enterprises, Inc.
Basis-of-Design for Dental Lab entry door: Pemko 158 stepped saddle, as indicated in
Drawings.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
087100- 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Door
Hardware
2.11
A.
2.12
A.
LOCK ASTRAGALS
Provide stainless steel lock astragals at exterior.
PUSH/PULL PLATES, KICK PLATES, ARMOR PLATES
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.13
A.
Kick plate: 10” high X 34” wide X 0.50” brushed stainless steel.
DOOR SILENCERS: Ives #SR64 or equal.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
2.14
BBW.
Quality.
Trimco.
Ives.
Trimco.
CASEWORK LOCKS
A.
Manufacturer: Olympus Lock Inc.
B.
Type: Pin tumbler cylinder with deadbolt.
1.
2.
2.15
Cabinet door: 100DR Deadbolt Cabinet Door Lock KD with catch and spacer for pairs.
Cabinet Drawer 200DW Deadbolt Cabinet Drawer Lock KA915..
FABRICATION
A.
Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming
method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and
hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware
units and BHMA A156.18.
B.
Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared
for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially
recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not
permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door
hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,
except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means
of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door
and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
087100- 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Door
Hardware
2.
Fire-Rated Applications:
a.
Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:
1)
2)
3)
b.
Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided:
1)
2)
3)
3.
4.
5.
2.16
Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood screws
for wood doors and frames.
Strike plates to frames.
Closers to doors and frames.
Surface hinges to doors.
Closers to doors and frames.
Surface-mounted exit devices.
Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors.
Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended
Fasteners for Wood Doors."
Gasketing Fasteners:
Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and
elsewhere as indicated.
FINISHES
A.
Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18BHMA 626 Satin Chrome or Brushed Aluminum.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other
conditions affecting performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames
according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.
B.
Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for
Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
087100- 9
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Door
Hardware
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights [indicated on Drawings] [to comply with
the following] unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.
Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.
Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood
Flush Doors."
Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been
completed on substrates involved.
1.
2.
Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C.
Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than
the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30
inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for
door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
D.
Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.
E.
Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements
specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
F.
Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware
schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.
G.
Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
H.
Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
I.
Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1.
B.
Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion,
Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door
hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door
hardware, and electrified door hardware.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
087100- 10
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Door
Hardware
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B.
Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A.
3.7
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes.
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to Drawings.
END OF SECTION 087100
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
087100- 11
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Door
Hardware
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Glass for windows, doors, and storefront framings.
Glazing sealants and accessories.
COORDINATION
A.
1.3
Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and
face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches
square.
C.
Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are
certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace
coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass
is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to
maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects
include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
088000- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Glazing
B.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulatingglass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is
defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to
maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as
needed to comply with requirements indicated.
1.
2.
Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than ¼ inch (6.0 mm).
Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout
Project.
B.
Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float
glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide
Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where fully tempered glass is
indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
C.
Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
2.2
For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites of thickness indicated.
For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit
and for each lite.
U-Factors:
Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's
WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).
Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance:
Center-of-glazing values,
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with
certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing
standard with which glass complies.
GLASS PRODUCTS
A.
Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1.
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to
bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
088000- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Glazing
2.
3.
2.3
For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).
INSULATING GLASS
A.
Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
Viracon, Inc. or comparable products by one of the following:
1.
2.
B.
Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a
dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other
requirements specified.
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.4
Guardian Industries Corp.
PPG Industries, Inc.
Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary.
Spacer: Aluminum with powdered metal paint finish, black.
Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by
designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article.
GLAZING GASKETS
A.
Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene, EPDM,
silicone, or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of
profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
1.
C.
2.5
Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864.
EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.
Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.
Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.
Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense
compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressureglazing stops on opposite side of glazing.
Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with
molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.
GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
General:
1.
Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
088000- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Glazing
2.
3.
B.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting
glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of
installation.
Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
C.
SilPruf NB SCS9000,
Applications: Exterior storefront.
Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
2.6
BASF Building Systems; Omniseal 50.
Dow Corning Corporation; 756 SMS, 791, 795, and 995.
GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilGlaze II, SCS2800,
SilPruf SCS2000, and UltraPruf II SCS2900.
May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 295.
Pecora Corporation; 864, 895, and 898.
Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-641.
Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C995.
Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2 and Spectrem 3.
Dow Corning Corporation; 799.
GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000 and UltraGlaze SSG4000AC.
May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 200 GPN and Bondaflex Sil 201 FC.
Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-631.
Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company; SM5731 Poly-Glaze Plus.
Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze SSG and Tremsil 600.
Applications: Interior glazing.
GLAZING TAPES
A.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric
tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and
complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.
AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
088000- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Glazing
B.
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1.
2.
2.7
AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a
full bead of liquid sealant.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus
5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer
to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks:
walking).
F.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
2.8
Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A.
Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B.
Heat Soaking of Tempered Glass: All exterior tempered glass must be heat soak tested to
convert nickel sulfide inclusions from the alpha phase to the beta phase.
C.
Glass Distortion: Fabricate glass by horizontal roller heating process only, with roll wave distortion
horizontal parallel to the bottom edge of the glass as installed. The deviation from flatness at any
peak (peak to valley deviation) shall not exceed 0.003 inches in the center of the lite and shall
not exceed 0.008 inches within 10.5 inches of the leading or trailing edge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other
glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced
glazing publications.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
088000- 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Glazing
B.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or
impair appearance.
C.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
D.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
E.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
F.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
G.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in
glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
3.2
TAPE GLAZING
A.
Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B.
Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C.
Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
F.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start
gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
G.
Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.3
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A.
Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B.
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with
joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
088000- 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Glazing
C.
Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and
installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners
and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without
developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.
D.
Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press
firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing
stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a
weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant
recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.4
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A.
Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and
backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance
for optimum sealant performance.
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains.
1.
C.
3.6
If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,
remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.
Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.
MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE
A.
Glass Type GL-01: All Interior glazing.
1.
2.
3.
Basis-of-Design Product: Viracon; Monolithic Glass.
Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch.
Safety glazing required.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
088000- 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Glazing
3.7
INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE
A.
Glass Type GL-01: All exterior glazing.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Basis-of-Design Product: Viracon Inc.; VNE1-63.
Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.
Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 1/4”.
Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass, blue tint.
Interspace Content: Air.
Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass.
Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second surface.
Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum.
Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.26 maximum.
Visible Light Transmittance: 62 percent minimum.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.29 maximum.
Safety glazing required.
END OF SECTION 088000
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
088000- 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Glazing
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.
Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1.
2.
B.
Steel Sheet Components:
Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
otherwise indicated.
Protective Coating:
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise
indicated.
Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use steel studs and runners.
1.
Steel Studs and Runners:
a.
b.
C.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness0.033 inch.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:
1.
Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in
thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and
with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral
bracing.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Dietrich Metal Framing.
MBA Building Supplies
Steel Network Inc.
Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
Telling Industries
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
092216- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Non-Structural
Metal Framing
D.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1.
E.
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum
1/2-inch- wide flanges.
1.
2.
2.2
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.
Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1.
B.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,
and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1.
2.
Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.
Foam Gasket:
Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to
framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Blocking to be minimum of 3/4"
plywood. Metal blocking is not acceptable.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
092216- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Non-Structural
Metal Framing
3.3
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1.
Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1.
2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install
runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a.
b.
c.
E.
3.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
4.
Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
Direct Furring:
1.
F.
Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure. Install minimum 48” o.c.
Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8
inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 092216
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
092216- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Non-Structural
Metal Framing
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.1
Interior gypsum board.
Exterior gypsum board.
Texture finishes.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
The criteria of the following organizations shall be followed as reference standards:
1.
2.
1.2
The Gypsum Association.
The United States Gypsum Company (the non-propriety aspects of the Gypsum
Construction handbook).
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples:
1.
Textured Finishes: 24 inch by 24 inch for each textured finish indicated and on same
backing indicated for Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to
those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2
GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A.
Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
that correspond with support system indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
092900 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Gypsum
Board
2.3
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
C.
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and moldresistant core and paper surfaces.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
American Gypsum.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Continental Building Products, LLC.
Georgia-Pacific Building Products.
National Gypsum Company.
PABCO Gypsum.
Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific.
United States Gypsum Company.
Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with fiberglass mat laminated to
both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
2.5
CertainTeed Corporation.
Georgia-Pacific Building Products.
Lafarge North America Inc.
National Gypsum Company.
Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific.
United States Gypsum Company.
Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
092900 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Gypsum
Board
2.6
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
2.
C.
2.7
Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
B.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according to ASTM E 90.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
D.
2.8
Accumetric LLC.
Grabber Construction Products.
Hilti, Inc.
Pecora Corporation.
Specified Technologies, Inc.
United States Gypsum Company.
Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
TEXTURE FINISHES
A.
Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
B.
New or repaired walls and ceilings in existing spaces: Match existing texture.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
092900 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Gypsum
Board
C.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent
ceiling panels not less than one framing member.
D.
Install wall panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints. Stagger abutting
end joints of adjacent wall panels one half panel length.
E.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
F.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
G.
Install control and expansion joints in locations designated on Drawings.
expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
H.
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1.
2.
3.
Form control and
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,
coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs
and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to
3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.
I.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
J.
Install wall panels continuous above door and window openings, and extend at least one full
stud width beyond the opening edge.
K.
Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached
to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
L.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both
faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking
paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
3.2
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1.
2.
Type X: Vertical and horizontal surfaces unless otherwise indicated >.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type SLX: As indicated on Drawings.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
092900 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Gypsum
Board
B.
Single-Layer Application:
1.
2.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a.
3.
4.
C.
On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
Multilayer Application:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to
framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum,
from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistancerated assembly.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member
and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on
opposite sides of partitions.
On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer
either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical
joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring
members.
Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws
or as required by fire-resistance rated assembly.
APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS
A.
Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.
1.
2.
3.4
Install with 1/4-inch open space where panels abut other construction or structural
penetrations.
Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners
used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
092900 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Gypsum
Board
C.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.5
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
L-Bead: Use where gypsum board abuts another material and the abutted joint will be
exposed.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels:
ASTM C 840:
1.
2.
Level 1: Concealed areas.
Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view.
a.
3.6
Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior
Painting."
PROTECTION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces from joint compound, adhesives, and texture finishes. Promptly remove
from floors and other non-gypsum board surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise
damaged during application.
B.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
END OF SECTION 092900
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
092900 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Gypsum
Board
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.
1.2
Acoustical panels will be provided by Owner, installed by Contractor.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver suspension-system components and accessories to Project site in original, unopened
packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected
against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface
contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.5
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 Moderate Low designation.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
095113- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Acoustical Panel
Ceilings
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
2.2
Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A.
Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS: Panels to be provided by Pima Community College.
A.
Material being provided:
white, 1913.
B.
Color: White.
C.
LR: Not less than 0.90.
D.
NRC: Not less than 0.70.
E.
CAC: 35.
F.
AC: Not less than 180.
G.
Edge/Joint Detail: Square.
H.
Thickness3/4 inch.
I.
Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.
J.
Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment.
2.3
Armstrong World Industries, Inc. – Ultima, 4’x2’, lay-in square edge
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL – Material to be provided by the Contractor.
A.
Metal Suspension-System Standard:
Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.
B.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1.
Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops
for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a
load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing
and inspecting agency.
a.
Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 for Class SC 1 service condition.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
095113- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Acoustical Panel
Ceilings
2.
C.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory
devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by
testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting
agency.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
Size:
Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but
provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.
D.
Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate
seismic forces.
E.
Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical
panels in place.
2.4
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed
from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30
coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.5
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
CertainTeed Corp.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
End Condition of Cross Runners: Butt-edge type.
Face Design: Flat, flush.
Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet.
Face Finish: Factory Painted White.
Cap Finish: Painted white.
METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
CertainTeed Corp.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
Fry Reglet Corporation.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
095113- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Acoustical Panel
Ceilings
B.
Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated,
manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design
requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for
exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
1.
2.
2.6
Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and
suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners
unless otherwise indicated.
Face Finish: Factory painted white.
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A.
Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
2.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in
reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building
construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
2.
Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant.
Concealed Joints:
Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable,
synthetic-rubber sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel
ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this
and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
B.
Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
095113- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Acoustical Panel
Ceilings
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders. Comply with
layout shown on reflected ceiling plans and notify Architect of discrepancies between site
conditions and reflected ceiling plans before proceeding with work. Proceeding before
resolution by Architect may require re-installation at contractor’s expense.
B.
Request delivery of panels to be provided by Pima Community College minimum of 5 business
days before needed and accept delivery of material from College.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design
requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling
Systems Handbook."
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form
of trapezes or equivalent devices.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye
screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not
deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
C.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
D.
Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
E.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat, precise fit.
1.
3.4
For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension-system runners and moldings.
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 095113
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
095113- 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Acoustical Panel
Ceilings
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Resilient base.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each profile, not less than 12 inches long.
C.
Color shall be black.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.5
Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
60 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time
periods:
1.
2.
3.
48 hours before installation.
During installation.
48 hours after installation.
B.
After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096513- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resilient Base and
Accessories
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE OR THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Armstrong
Flexco.
Roppe Corporation, USA.
Johnsonite.
Product Standard:
homogeneous).
1.
Style:
a.
b.
2.
ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid,
Style A, Flat.
Style B, Cove.
Location: Per drawings.
C.
Thickness: 0.125 inch.
D.
Height: 4 inches.
E.
Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F.
Outside Corners: Preformed.
G.
Inside Corners: Job formed.
H.
Colors: Black.
2.2
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient
products and substrate conditions indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096513- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resilient Base and
Accessories
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
3.2
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in
other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient
products.
B.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound;
remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C.
Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are
to be installed.
1.
D.
3.3
At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation
materials into spaces where they will be installed.
Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
products.
RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B.
Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C.
Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
D.
Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E.
Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096513- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resilient Base and
Accessories
F.
On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G.
Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
H.
Job-Formed Corners:
1.
Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not
less than 3 inches in length.
a.
3.4
Miter corners to minimize open joints.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:
1.
C.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION 096513
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096513- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resilient Base and
Accessories
SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING (DENTAL LAB)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes vinyl sheet flooring.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified in manufacturer's
standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230-mm) sections.
1.
1.3
For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches
(230 mm) long, of each color required.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient sheet flooring, as determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
B.
2.2
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
FloorScore Compliance:
certification.
Resilient sheet flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore
UNBACKED VINYL SHEET FLOORING (ROOMS 209 AND 209A)
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Gerflor; Mipolam
Esprit or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Forbo Industries, Inc.
Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company.
Mannington Mills, Inc.
Polyflor, Ltd., Distributed by Gerbert Limited.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096516- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resilient Sheet
Flooring (Dental Lab)
B.
Product Standard: ASTM F 1913.
C.
Thickness: 0.080 inch (2.0 mm).
D.
Wearing Surface: Smooth.
E.
Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer.
F.
Seamless-Installation Method: Heat welded.
G.
Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
H.
Pattern: Non-directional.
I.
Features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Homogeneous.
Suitable for heavy traffic.
Finish: Matt, no polish or wax required.
Surface Treatment: Evercare or equal for chemical resistance in healthcare environments.
Formaldehyde-free.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring
manufacturer for applications indicated.
1.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit
resilient sheet flooring and substrate conditions indicated.
1.
C.
Refer to Section 012200 “Unit Prices” for providing a unit price for excessive floor levelling, if
required.
Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 60 g/L or less.
Seamless-Installation Accessories:
1.
Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams.
a.
Color: Match flooring.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written instructions to
ensure adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096516- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resilient Sheet
Flooring (Dental Lab)
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by resilient sheet flooring
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on
pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 10
pH.
C.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound;
remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D.
Do not install resilient sheet flooring until it is the same temperature as the space where it is to be
installed.
E.
Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
sheet flooring.
3.2
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring.
B.
Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
C.
Lay out resilient sheet flooring as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Maintain uniformity of flooring direction.
Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6
inches (152 mm) away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams.
Avoid cross seams.
D.
Scribe and cut resilient sheet flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent
fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on resilient sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent
marking device.
G.
Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096516- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resilient Sheet
Flooring (Dental Lab)
H.
Seamless Installation:
1.
3.3
Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding
bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare, weld, and finish
seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient sheet
flooring.
B.
Cover resilient sheet flooring until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096516
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096516- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resilient Sheet
Flooring (Dental Lab)
SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Vinyl composition floor tile.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways,
enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
1.
Show details of special patterns.
C.
Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Qualification Data: For Installer.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are
competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method
indicated.
1.
Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by
floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096519- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resilient Tile
Flooring
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.8
Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient
temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50
deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
60 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1.
2.
3.
48 hours before installation.
During installation.
48 hours after installation.
B.
After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C.
Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E.
Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
2.2
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE (VCT)
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Excelon Series, no substitution.
B.
Wearing Surface: Smooth.
C.
Thickness: 0.125 inch.
D.
Size: 12 by 12 inches.
E.
Colors and Patterns: ChromaSpin #56815 Soft Ochre, ¼ turn for installation.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096519- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resilient Tile
Flooring
2.3
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer
for applications indicated.
1.
B.
Refer to Section 012200 “Unit Prices” for providing a unit price for excessive floor levelling, if
required.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit
floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.
1.
Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:
a.
2.
Vinyl Composition Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L or less.
Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile
Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
B.
3.2
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in
other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale
recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096519- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resilient Tile
Flooring
4.
Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to
floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:
a.
b.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb
of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.
Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative
humidity level.
C.
Access Flooring Panels:
Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method
recommended by access flooring manufacturer.
D.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound;
remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
E.
Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
1.
F.
3.3
At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials
into spaces where they will be installed.
Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
floor tile.
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B.
Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths
that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1.
C.
Lay tiles square with room axis.
Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
1.
Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern).
D.
Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to
center of door openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking
device.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096519- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resilient Tile
Flooring
G.
Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and
similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between
pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that
abut covers and to cover perimeters.
H.
Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
I.
Seamless Installation:
1.
2.
3.4
Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding
bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare, weld, and finish
seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.
Chemically Bonded Seams:
Bond seams with chemical-bonding compound to
permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare seams and apply compound
to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on
flooring surfaces.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:
1.
2.
3.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C.
Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations
and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid
floor polish.
1.
Apply three coat(s).
E.
Joint Sealant: Apply sealant to resilient terrazzo floor tile perimeter and around columns, at door
frames, and at other joints and penetrations.
F.
Sealers and Finish Coats: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient
terrazzo floor tile surfaces before applying liquid cleaners, sealers, and finish products.
1.
2.
G.
Sealer: Apply two base coats of liquid sealer.
Finish: Apply three coats of liquid floor finish.
Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096519
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096519- 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resilient Tile
Flooring
SECTION 096543 - LINOLEUM FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes linoleum sheet flooring, factory-adhered to raised access flooring panels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For linoleum flooring, as determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
B.
FloorScore Compliance: Flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification.
C.
Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of
Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
2.2
LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
2.3
Forbo Industries, Inc.; Marmoleum, Real #2707 Barley.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit
products and substrate conditions indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096543- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Linoleum
Flooring
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Prepare substrates according to linoleum flooring manufacturer's written instructions to ensure
adhesion of flooring.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing flooring.
B.
Adhere flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a
completed installation without telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface
imperfections.
END OF SECTION 096543
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096543- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Linoleum
Flooring
SECTION 096723 – RESINOUS (EPOXY) FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
High-performance resinous (epoxy) flooring systems.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical data,
application instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish required.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each resinous flooring system required, 6 inches square, applied to a
rigid backing by Installer for this Project.
D.
Product Schedule: For resinous flooring on finish schedule in drawings.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Installer Certificates:
requirements.
B.
Material Certificates: For each resinous flooring component, from manufacturer.
1.4
Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of flooring systems required for this Project.
1.
B.
Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as qualified
to apply resinous flooring systems indicated.
Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening
agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, from single source from single manufacturer. Provide
secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of
type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096723- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resinous
(Epoxy) Flooring
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other
components.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for
substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions
affecting resinous flooring application.
B.
Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent
lighting conditions during resinous flooring application.
C.
Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after
application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Key Resin Company;
Key chip 100 System – Full broadcast blends or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
2.2
Arizona Polymer Flooring, Inc.; Granitex color chip blends.
Dur-A-Flex, Inc.; Dur-a-chip- Macro chip.
DECORATIVE RESINOUS FLOORING
A.
Resinous Flooring:
Abrasion-, impact- and chemical-resistant, decorative-aggregate-filled,
epoxy-resin-based, monolithic floor surfacing designed to produce a seamless floor and integral
4” cove base.
B.
System Characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for 1/4" chip-full
broadcast blends minimum 6 colors can be a custom mix.
Wearing Surface: Manufacturer's standard wearing surface.
Overall System Thickness: 40 mil. thickness.
Federal Agency Approvals: FDA approved for food-processing environments.
Body Coats:
1.
2.
3.
Resin: Solid color two-component expoy resin coating broad cast with colored chips. .
Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.
Application Method: Self-leveling slurry Troweled or screeded.
a.
b.
Thickness of Coats: 30 mil.
Number of Coats: One.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096723- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resinous
(Epoxy) Flooring
4.
D.
Topcoat: Sealing or finish coats.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Resin: Clear 2 component UV light resistant epoxy grout and two component aliphate
urethane sealer.
Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.
Type: Clear.
Finish: Gloss.
Number of Coats: Two.
System Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum physical
property requirements when tested according to test methods indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.3
Aggregates: Vinyl flakes from manufacturers’ multi color custom blends.
Compressive Strength: 10,000 psi per ASTM C 579, 7 days.
Tensile Strength: 5300 psi per ASTM D-138.
Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 7800 psi per ASTM D-790.
Water Absorption: Nil per ASTM D-570.
Impact Resistance: No chipping, cracking, or delamination and not more than 1/16-inch
permanent indentation per MIL-D-3134 F 4.7.3.
Resistance to Elevated Temperature: No slip or flow of more than 1/16 inch per MIL-D-3134
at 158ºF.
Abrasion Resistance: 32 mg maximum weight loss per ASTM D 4060.
Flammability: Self-extinguishing per ASTM D 635.
Fungus and Bacteria Growth: Will not support growth of fungus or bacteria.
Hardness: 70-75, Shore D per ASTM D 2240.
Bond Strength: 300-400 psi, 100 percent concrete failure per ACI 503R.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and body coats indicated.
B.
Waterproofing Membrane: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and primer and
body coats indicated.
1.
C.
Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.
Reinforcing Membrane: Flexible resin formulation that is recommended by manufacturer for
substrate and primer and body coats indicated and that prevents substrate cracks from
reflecting through resinous flooring.
1.
Formulation Description: 100 percent solids.
a.
D.
Provide fiberglass scrim embedded in reinforcing membrane.
Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer
and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096723- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resinous
(Epoxy) Flooring
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
General: Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written
instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring application.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence,
curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants
incompatible with resinous flooring.
1.
Roughen concrete substrates as follows:
a.
2.
3.
4.
Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains
the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum
pickup.
Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's
written instructions.
Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within
acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing:
Verify that concrete substrates have pH within
acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with
application only after substrates pass testing.
C.
Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring
manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting
through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2
APPLICATION
A.
General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written
instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring
system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion.
Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.
At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's
written instructions.
B.
Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C.
Apply waterproofing membrane, where indicated, in manufacturer's recommended thickness.
1.
Apply waterproofing membrane to integral cove base substrates.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096723- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resinous
(Epoxy) Flooring
D.
Apply reinforcing membrane to substrate cracks.
E.
Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply
according to manufacturer's written instructions and details including those for taping, mixing,
priming, troweling, sanding, and topcoating of cove base. Round internal and external corners.
1.
F.
Integral Cove Base: 4 inches high.
Apply self-leveling slurry body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system.
1.
Broadcast aggregates at rate recommended by manufacturer and, after resin is cured,
remove excess aggregates to provide surface texture indicated.
G.
Apply troweled or screeded body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or power
trowel and grout to fill voids. When cured, remove trowel marks and roughness using method
recommended by manufacturer.
H.
Apply grout coat of type recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer, to fill voids in surface
of final body coat and to produce wearing surface indicated.
I.
Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in
writing by manufacturer.
3.3
PROTECTION
A.
Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period.
Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing
by resinous flooring manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 096723
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096723- 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Resinous
(Epoxy) Flooring
SECTION 096900 - ACCESS FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Access-flooring panels.
Understructure.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate location of mechanical, electrical, and technology work in underfloor cavity to
prevent interference with access-flooring pedestals.
B.
Mark pedestal locations on subfloor using a grid to enable mechanical and electrical work to
proceed without interfering with access-flooring pedestals.
1.3
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Review connection with mechanical, electrical, and technology systems.
Review requirements related to sealing the plenums.
Review procedures for keeping underfloor space clean.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include layout of access-flooring system and relationship to adjoining Work
based on field-verified dimensions.
1.
1.5
Details and sections with descriptive notes indicating materials, finishes, fasteners, typical
and special edge conditions, accessories, and understructures.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Qualification Data: For Installer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096900 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sliding
Storefronts
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain access-flooring system components from single source from single
manufacturer as described below.
FLOOR PANELS
A.
Floor Panels, General: fully encased cementitious filled welded steel panels supported on all four
edges by structural steel members which are designed to bolt onto adjustable height pedestal
assemblies forming a modular grid pattern.
1.
2.
B.
2.3
Size: Nominal 24 by 24 inches.
Attachment to Understructure: Bolted.
“ CC1250 Panel-24.
Access floor panels shall match existing: Tate Access Floors, Inc.; ConCore“
No exceptions.
UNDERSTRUCTURE
A.
Pedestals shall match existing: Tate Access Floors, Inc.; Type 1A. No exceptions.
B.
Stringers shall match existing: Tate Access Floors, Inc.; 4-foot Bolted Stringer. No exceptions.
1.
2.4
Stringer grid shall be 4’ stringers in a basketweave configuration ensuring maximum lateral
stability in all directions. (Also available in 2’ x 4’ and 2’ x 2’ grid patterns)
FABRICATION
A.
Fabrication Tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Size: Plus or minus 0.020 inch of required size.
Squareness: Plus or minus 0.015 inch between diagonal measurements across top of
panel.
Flatness: Plus or minus 0.035 inch, measured on a diagonal on top of panel.
Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts in floor panels for cable penetrations and service outlets. Provide
reinforcement or additional support, if needed, to make panels with cutouts comply with
structural performance requirements.
1.
2.
3.
Number, Size, Shape, and Location: As indicated.
Grommets: Where indicated, fit cutouts with manufacturer's standard brush grommets; or,
if size of cutouts exceeds maximum grommet size available, trim edge of cutouts with
manufacturer's standard plastic molding with tapered top flange. Refer to Divisions 26 and
27.
Provide foam-rubber pads for sealing annular space formed in cutouts by cables.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096900 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sliding
Storefronts
4.
C.
Finishes
1.
2.5
Provide air-tight seals at penetrations through access flooring above pressurized air
plenums.
Factory-finish the surface of floor panels with floor covering material as indicated. Refer to
Section 096543 “Linoleum Flooring.”
ACCESSORIES
A.
Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard adhesive for bonding pedestal bases to subfloor.
1.
Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B.
Panel Lifting Device: Panel manufacturer's standard portable lifting device for each type of
panel required.
C.
Perimeter Support: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard method for supporting
panel edge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer and manufacturer's representative present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Verify that substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other
Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, foreign deposits,
and debris that might interfere with attachment of pedestals.
Verify that concrete floor sealer and finish have been applied and cured.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Lay out floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at floor perimeter to a minimum.
Avoid using panels cut to less than 6 inches.
B.
Locate each pedestal, complete any necessary subfloor preparation, and vacuum subfloor to
remove dust, dirt, and construction debris before beginning installation.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install access-flooring system and accessories under supervision of access-flooring manufacturer's
authorized representative to produce a rigid, firm installation that complies with performance
requirements and is free of instability, rocking, rattles, and squeaks.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096900 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sliding
Storefronts
B.
Adhesive Attachment of Pedestals: Set pedestals in adhesive, according to access-flooring
manufacturer's written instructions, to provide full bearing of pedestal base on subfloor.
C.
Adjust pedestals to permit top of installed panels to be set flat, level, and to proper height.
D.
Stringer Systems: Secure stringers to pedestal heads according to access-flooring manufacturer's
written instructions.
E.
Install flooring panels securely in place, properly seated with panel edges flush. Do not force
panels into place.
F.
Scribe perimeter panels to provide a close fit with adjoining construction with no voids greater
than 1/8 inch where panels abut vertical surfaces.
G.
Cut and trim access flooring and perform other dirt-or-debris-producing activities at a remote
location or as required to prevent contamination of subfloor under already-installed access
flooring.
H.
Grounded Flooring Access Panel Systems: Ground flooring system as recommended by
manufacturer and as needed to comply with performance requirements for electrical resistance
of floor coverings.
1.
Panel-to-Understructure Resistance: Not more than 10 ohms as measured without floor
coverings.
I.
Clean dust, dirt, and construction debris caused by floor installation, and vacuum subfloor area
as installation of floor panels proceeds.
J.
Install access flooring without change in elevation between adjacent panels and within the
following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.4
Plus or minus 1/8 inch in any 10-foot distance.
Plus or minus 1/4 inch from a level plane over entire access-flooring area.
PROTECTION
A.
Prohibit traffic on access flooring for 24 hours and removal of floor panels for 72 hours after
installation to allow pedestal adhesive to set.
B.
After completing installation, vacuum access flooring and cover with continuous sheets of
reinforced paper or plastic. Maintain protective covering until time of Substantial Completion.
C.
Replace access-flooring panels that are broken or otherwise damaged or that do not comply
with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 096900
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
096900 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sliding
Storefronts
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
exterior substrates:
1.
2.
1.2
Metal siding
Hollow metal doors and frames
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
Behr Process Corporation.
Benjamin Moore & Co.
Dunn-Edwards Corporation.
Frazee Paint.
ICI Paints.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
Sherwin-Williams Company.
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B.
VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Colors: Match existing (blue).
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
099113 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Exterior
Painting
2.3
WATER-BASED PAINTS
A.
Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based (Gloss Level 3):
1.
Basis of Design: Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes
and primers.
C.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
3.2
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
3.3
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
APPLICATION
A.
3.4
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work
of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
B.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
099113 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Exterior
Painting
3.5
EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A.
Metal Substrates:
1.
Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:
a.
b.
Prime Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (Gloss Level 3).
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (Gloss Level 3).
END OF SECTION 099113
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
099113 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Exterior
Painting
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.
[the following interior substrates:]
1.
1.2
Gypsum board.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
C.
Gloss Level 3:
ASTM D 523.
D.
Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
E.
Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F.
Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G.
Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.3
10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Submit Samples on gypsum board minimum 8.5”x11” with appropriate texture.
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
Label each coat of each Sample.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas.
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
099123- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Use same
Interior
Painting
1.4
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.5
Paint: 2 gallons of each color and sheen. Contractor shall paint a 12” diameter circle on
painted wall from each gallon in presence of PCC Job Coordinator to verify paint color
and sheen match.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to
verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
b.
2.
Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a.
3.
4.
1.6
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in
writing.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1.
2.
1.7
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B.
Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
099123- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Interior
Painting
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
Behr Process Corporation.
Benjamin Moore & Co.
Dunn-Edwards Corporation.
Frazee Paint.
ICI Paints.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
Sherwin-Williams Company.
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in
its "MPI Approved Products List."
B.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
C.
2.3
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
Colors: Match Architect's samples as indicated in the finish schedule.
PRIMERS/SEALERS
A.
Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149.
1.
B.
2.4
Primer as specified by paint manufacturer for finish and texture. Primer shall be tinted so
Job Coordinator with PCC can verify wall have been primed.
Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood: MPI #39.
STANDARD PAINT SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Interior Acrylic Enamel, Low Sheen. The composition of the material shall conform to the following:
1.
2.
Pigment: to be no less than 35% and titanium dioxide to be no less than 18% of pigment by
weight.
Vehicle: to be no less than 63% and vinyl resin to be no less than 20% of vehicle by weight.
Gloss level to be no less than 5% or more than 9% using Garder Gloss Meter after air dry for
seven (7) days.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
099123- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Interior
Painting
3.
4.
B.
Note: total pigment and vehicle to equal 100% of direct composition method.
Thickness: 1.5 dry mils.
Interior Acrylic Enamel, Semi-Gloss. The composition of the material shall conform to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pigment: to be no less than 20% and titanium dioxide to be no less than 20% of pigment by
weight.
Vehicle: to be no less than 78% and vinyl resin to be no less than 24% of vehicle by weight.
Gloss level to be no less than 49% or more than 61% using Garder Gloss Meter after air dry
for seven (7) days.
Note: total pigment and vehicle to equal 100% of direct composition method.
Thickness: 1.5 dry mils.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as
follows:
1.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C.
Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes
and primers.
E.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
3.2
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
C.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
099123- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Interior
Painting
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or
factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. Job Coordinator
for PCC shall approve each coat before Contractor can paint over with next paint coating layer.
Failure to obtain approval will result in Contractor having to repaint surface.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. Minimum of 2 coats of top coat is required
with 24 hour dry time between coats.
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting
agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1.
2.
3.5
Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work
of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
099123- 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Interior
Painting
D.
3.6
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A.
Gypsum Board Substrates:
1.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144.
END OF SECTION 099123
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
099123- 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Interior
Painting
SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
application instructions.
Include preparation requirements and
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for
the paint category indicated.
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.3
Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated.
Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
INTERIOR PRIMERS/SEALERS
A.
Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
099600 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
High-Performance
Coatings
2.4
EPOXY COATINGS
A.
Epoxy, High-Build, Low Gloss:
1.
Basis of Design: Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 (2 coats).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes
and primers.
C.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
3.2
Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
3.3
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.
APPLICATION
A.
Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
099600 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
High-Performance
Coatings
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by
cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
B.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced coated surfaces.
END OF SECTION 099600
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
099600 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
High-Performance
Coatings
SECTION 099646 - INTUMESCENT PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes surface preparation and application of fire-retardant intumescent paint at
underside of concrete roof deck, where edges of existing polyurethane foam insulation have
been exposed in the past and where exposed by this project.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
B.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
MPI Standards: Comply with indicated requirements for the following:
1.
2.
Products: MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."
Preparation and Workmanship: "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for
products and paint systems indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INTERIOR, PIGMENTED, INTUMESCENT PAINT SYSTEM
A.
Fire-Retardant Intumescent Paint: Solvent-based, modified-alkyd-type, fire-retardant paint for
interior wood and other combustible surfaces; MPI #63.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 10-10A; flat finish.
Albi Manufacturing; a division of StanChem, Inc.; Albi-Cote 107A; flat finish.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
099646 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Intumescent
Painting
B.
Fire-Retardant Intumescent Paint: Water-based, latex-type, fire-retardant paint for interior wood
and other combustible surfaces; MPI #64.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Benjamin Moore & Co.; M59 220.
Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 20-20; flat finish.
Magna Coatings Technology Inc.; SafeCoat 451.
Muralo Company (The); 1500; flat finish.
NoFire Technologies, Inc.; A-18; flat finish.
PPG Industries, Inc.; Speed Hide 42-7; flat finish.
Albi Manufacturing, a division of StanChem, Inc.; Albi-Cote FRL; flat finish.
Fire Research Laboratories/Ocean Fire Retardants Inc.; FireCoat 320; flat finish.
Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 320A.
International Fire Resistant Systems, Inc.; Firefree88; flat finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in the "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating systems
indicated.
B.
Apply intumescent paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with
requirements for fire-retardant coating classification.
C.
At completion of construction activities, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated
surfaces.
END OF SECTION 099646
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
099646 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Intumescent
Painting
SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Corner guards.
Section 064023 "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for custom-fabricated bumper rails.
Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for metal armor, kick, mop, and push plates.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below.
1.
1.4
Corner Guards: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include examples of joinery, corners, end caps,
and field splices.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.5
Corner-Guards: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of units
installed, but no fewer than two, 4-foot- (1.2-m-) long units.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Single Source Responsibility: Furnish all wall protection system components from a single source.
B.
Manufacturer: A firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of wall protection system
components similar to those specified.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
102600 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Wall and Door
Protection
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Deliver materials in manufacturers packages properly labeled for identification and for location in
the Project. Comply with manufacturers instructions for storage and handling. Damaged and
otherwise unsuitable material, when so determined, shall be immediately removed from the
Project site.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall surface protection systems until the installation area
is enclosed and weatherproof, and until the ambient temperature within the building is
maintained at not less than 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) for not less than 72 hours prior to
installation.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
2.
Structural failures.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M.
B.
Adhesive: As recommended corner guard manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2
CORNER GUARDS
A.
Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated from one-piece, formed or extruded metal
with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Babcock-Davis
Model CG-SS304, or comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Construction Specialties, Inc. Acrovyn CO Series.
Hiawatha; CGSS.
InPro Corporation.
JL Industries; CGSS.
Meek Mirrors LLC; M9010.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
102600 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Wall and Door
Protection
2.
Material: Stainless steel, Type 304.
a.
b.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Thickness: Minimum 16 gauge (0.0598 inch) (1.52 mm).
Finish: Directional satin, No. 4.
Wing Size: Nominal 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm).
Corner Radius: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Mounting: Adhesive.
METAL FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing corner guards.
B.
Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install corner guards level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use
materials with scratches, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
102600 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Wall and Door
Protection
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 102600
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
102600 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Wall and Door
Protection
SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Fire-protection cabinets for the following:
a.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.2
Portable fire extinguishers.
Section 104416 "Fire Extinguishers."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and
panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed-, or
surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET, DENTAL CLINIC
A.
Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Guardian Fire
Model 1840 or comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
Larsens Manufacturing Company.
Strike First Corporation of America.
B.
Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
C.
Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.
1.
D.
Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
1.
E.
Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.
Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth.
Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
104413 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Fire Protection
Cabinets
F.
Door Material: Steel sheet.
G.
Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.
H.
Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).
I.
Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1.
2.
J.
Provide recessed door pull and friction latch.
Provide continuous steel hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.
Materials:
1.
Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
a.
b.
2.
2.2
Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
Color: Red.
Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick,
Class 1 (clear).
FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET, DENTAL LAB
A.
Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsens
Manufacturing Company; Occult Series Model O-2409 with solid #4 stainless steel door with
black Type A die-cut lettering, or comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
Nystrom, Inc.
Potter Roemer LLC.
B.
Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
C.
Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
1.
D.
Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.
Recessed Cabinet:
1.
Trimless with Hidden Flange: Flange of same metal and finish as box overlaps surrounding
wall finish and is concealed from view by an overlapping door.
E.
Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.
F.
Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
G.
Door Style: Flush opaque panel, frameless, with no exposed hinges.
H.
Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
104413 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Fire Protection
Cabinets
I.
Accessories:
1.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect.
a.
Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."
1)
2)
3)
4)
J.
Materials:
1.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
a.
2.3
Location: Applied to cabinet door.
Application Process: Manufacturer’s standard.
Lettering Color: Black.
Orientation: Vertical (not “marquee”).
Finish: No. 4 non-directional satin finish.
FABRICATION
A.
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1.
2.
B.
2.4
Weld joints and grind smooth.
Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated
and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.
D.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range
of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed
cabinets will be installed.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
104413 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Fire Protection
Cabinets
B.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and
size of cabinet and trim style.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated below:
1.
B.
3.4
Fire-Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet.
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking
devices operate properly.
C.
On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fireprotection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E.
Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 104413
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
104413 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Fire Protection
Cabinets
SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.2
Section 104413 "Fire Protection Cabinets."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.
COORDINATION
A.
1.6
Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and
function.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
104416 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Fire Extinguishers
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire
Extinguishers."
B.
Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.2
Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global.
PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet indicated.
1.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Guardian Fire
Equipment Model 400 or comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Larsens Manufacturing Company.
Strike First Corporation of America.
Valves: Manufacturer's standard.
Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.
Instruction Labels:
Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections,
maintenance, and recharging.
Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 1-A:10-B:C, 2.5-lb nominal
capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1.
B.
3.2
Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fire extinguishers in semi recessed extinguisher cabinets as shown on the drawings
and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 104416
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
104416 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Fire Extinguishers
SECTION 115300 - LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
Laboratory freezers (Dental Clinic).
Workstation Dust Collectors (Dental Lab).
Section 123553.13 “Metal Laboratory Casework (Dental Lab)” for laboratory workstations in
which to install the dust collectors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, dimensions, furnished accessories, and finishes for each appliance.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For each piece of equipment to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
B.
Warranties: Provided by manufacturer.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
WARRANTY
A.
Freezer Compressor Warranty
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
115300 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Laboratory
Equipment
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FREEZERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Summit Appliance; 3Drawer Under-Counter Freezer #SPF5DAATB5 or a comparable product that meets the
specifications below.
1.
Dimensions:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Storage Capacity: 3.2 cubic feet.
General Features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
2.2
Width: 23.75 inches.
Depth: 23.5 inches.
Height: 33.25 inches.
Three equally-sized drawers.
115V, 60Hz, single phase.
Adjustable thermostat.
100% CFC Free.
UL listed.
Built-in capability.
Appliance Color/Finish: Stainless steel.
WORKSTATION DUST COLLECTORS
A.
Workstation Dust Collectors, General:
1.
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dental Art; Dustinet,
or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
C.
Handler Manufacturing, Inc.
NevinLabs, a division of DentalEZ.
Performance Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Individual Workstation Dust Collectors and all components and accessories must be by
same manufacturer as, compatible with, and sized for the individual workstations in which
they will reside. Refer to Section 123553.13 “Metal Laboratory Casework (Dental Lab).”
Maximum suction: 85 CFM (40 Lt/sec.), minimum.
Waste compartment size: 235 in3 (3.85 liters), minimum.
Filter efficiency: 99.99% at normal suction.
Accessories:
1.
Electronic Board. Features:
a.
Three-level adjustable suction volume.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
115300 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Laboratory
Equipment
b.
c.
2.
Frontal suction peg with safety glass screen.
a.
3.
Brush replacement alarm.
Filter clogging alarm with power break of the suction system.
Basis of Design: Dental Arte Model GRAFC.
Rear suction with lathe grinding hood and splatter shield.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and
performance of residential appliances.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed
fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that rough openings
are completely concealed.
C.
Utilities: Comply with plumbing and electrical requirements.
END OF SECTION 115300
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
115300 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Laboratory
Equipment
SECTION 115333 – EMERGENCY SAFETY APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Flammable Storage Cabinets.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, dimensions, furnished accessories, and finishes for each appliance.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For flammable storage cabinet to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
B.
Warranties: Provided by manufacturer.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Manufacturer shall specialize in manufacture of products specified
herein with minimum ten years’ experience, unless otherwise noted.
B.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Emergency safety appliances must comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
Underwriters Laboratory.
OSHA.
NFPA 30.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
115333 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Emergency
Safety Appliances
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FLAMMABLE STORAGE CABINETS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Eagle
Flammable Safety Cabinet, 4 gallon, Model 1903, or comparable product by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Global.
Justrite.
PIG.
Features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Type: One-door, self-closing.
Construction: Galvanized steel.
Mounting: Under-counter (In base cabinet).
Maximum Dimensions:
a.
b.
c.
5.
6.
7.
Width: 18 inches.
Depth: 18 inches.
Height: 26 inches.
Minimum Capacity: 4 gallons.
Color/Finish: Gray powder coat.
Accessories: Include flammable warning label.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Prior to installation of emergency safety appliances, carefully inspect the installed work
specified in other Sections and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this
installation may properly commence.
B.
Discrepancies: In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
115333 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Emergency
Safety Appliances
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in
each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.
END OF SECTION 115333
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
115333 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Emergency
Safety Appliances
SECTION 123553.13 - METAL LABORATORY CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
Metal laboratory workstations.
Workstation accessories.
Compressed air and electrical service fittings.
Section 115300 “Laboratory Equipment” for individual workstation dust collectors.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
1.3
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: For laboratory casework. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment
details.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of cabinet finish and each type of countertop material.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Test Reports for Casework: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory casework with requirements of
specified product standard.
B.
Product Test Reports for Countertop Surface Material: Based on evaluation of comprehensive
tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory countertop
surface materials with requirements specified for chemical and physical resistance.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that produces casework of types
indicated for this Project that has been tested for compliance with SEFA 8 M.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123553.13 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal Laboratory
Casework
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dental Arte; lab or
comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
Handler Manufacturing, Inc.
NevinLabs, a division of DentalEZ.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain metal laboratory casework and all accessories from single source from
single manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes and configurations of laboratory casework by
referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' laboratory
casework of similar sizes and similar door and drawer configurations and complying with
Specifications may be considered.
2.2
METAL CASEWORK, GENERAL
A.
Casework Product Standard: Comply with SEFA 8 M, "Laboratory Grade Metal Casework."
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.3
METAL CABINET MATERIALS
A.
2.4
Metal: Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M; matte
finish; suitable for exposed applications.
COUNTERTOP AND SHELF MATERIALS
A.
Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.
1.
B.
Architect from plastic-laminate
Core Materials for Plastic Laminate:
1.
C.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes:
As selected by
manufacturer's full range of solid colors.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, Exterior glue; made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic
formaldehyde-free adhesive.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
Laminate:
Manufacturer's
123553.13 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
standard
waterproof,
urea-
Metal Laboratory
Casework
2.5
METAL WORKSTATIONS
A.
Fabrication: Assemble and finish units at point of manufacture. Use precision dies for
interchangeability of like-size drawers, doors, and similar parts. Perform assembly on precision jigs
to provide units that are square. Reinforce units with angles, gussets, and channels. Except
where otherwise specified, integrally frame and weld cabinet bodies to form dirt- and verminresistant enclosures. Where applicable, reinforce base cabinets for sink support. Maintain
uniform clearance around door and drawer fronts of 1/16 to 3/32 inch (1.5 to 2.4 mm).
B.
Drawers: Fronts made from outer and inner pans that nest into box formation, with no raw metal
edges at top. Sides, back, and bottom fabricated in one piece with rolled or formed top of sides
for stiffening and comfortable grasp for drawer removal.
C.
Workstations: Welded tubing legs, with channel stretchers as needed to comply with product
standard. Weld or bolt stretchers to legs and cross-stretchers, and bolt legs to aprons. Provide
leveling device welded to bottom of each leg.
D.
Filler and Closure Panels: Provide where indicated and as needed. Fabricate from same
material and with same finish as cabinets and with hemmed or flanged edges unless otherwise
indicated.
2.6
METAL WORKSTATION FINISH
A.
Chemical-Resistant Finish: Laboratory casework manufacturer's standard two-coat, chemicalresistant, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with
coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry
film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
1.
2.
2.7
Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with acceptance levels
of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8 M. Acceptance level for chemical spot test shall be
no more than four Level 3 conditions.
Colors for Metal Laboratory Casework Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range.
HARDWARE
A.
General: Provide laboratory casework manufacturer's standard, commercial-quality, heavy-duty
hardware complying with requirements indicated for each type.
B.
Drawer Slides: Manufacturer’s standard.
C.
Drawer Pulls: Solid-aluminum, stainless-steel, or chrome-plated-brass, back-mounted pulls.
2.8
WORKSTATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Polyurethane Armrests. Manufacturer’s standard, one pair per workstation.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123553.13 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal Laboratory
Casework
B.
Stainless Steel Work Plate: Manufacturer’s standard, centered between armrests.
C.
Workstation Dust Collector: Refer to Section 115300 “Laboratory Equipment.”
D.
Compressed Air Fittings: Manufacturer’s standard.
E.
Workstation Lamps: Reuse existing.
F.
Electrical Fittings: Manufacturer’s standard. Provide power for:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Dust Collector.
Workstation Lamp.
Lathe.
Hand Piece or other small electrical device.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF CABINETS
A.
Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required,
using concealed shims. Where laboratory casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips
and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.
B.
Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises.
C.
Adjust laboratory casework and hardware so drawers align and operate smoothly without warp
or bind and contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended
by manufacturer.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF LABORATORY ACCESSORIES
A.
3.3
Install accessories according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3, and
manufacturer's written instructions.
INSTALLATION OF SERVICE FITTINGS
A.
Comply with requirements in other Sections for installing compressed air fittings and electrical
devices.
B.
Install fittings according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3, and
manufacturer's written instructions. Securely anchor fittings to laboratory casework unless
otherwise indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123553.13 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal Laboratory
Casework
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to
match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.
B.
Protect countertop surfaces during construction with 6-mil (0.15-mm) plastic or other suitable
water-resistant covering.
END OF SECTION 123553.13
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123553.13 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal Laboratory
Casework
SECTION 123553.16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD LABORATORY CASEWORK (DENTAL LAB)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
C.
1.2
Plastic-laminate laboratory casework.
Filler and closure panels.
Exposed shelves.
Section 123616 “Metal Countertops (Dental Lab)" for stainless steel countertops on plasticlaminate-clad laboratory casework.
Section 123661 “Simulated Stone Countertops" for solid surface countertops on plasticlaminate-clad laboratory casework.
NOTE: Metal laboratory casework submittals will be considered if bid is accompanied by
drawings indicating cabinet elements of proposed substitution (either custom-manufactured to
comply with dimensions and components indicated, and/or stock elements combined with stock
adaptations such as filler pieces to comply with overall dimensions indicated).
DEFINITIONS
A.
MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.
B.
Hardwood Plywood: A panel product composed of layers, or plies, of veneer, or of veneers in
combination with lumber core, hardboard core, MDF core, or particleboard core, joined with
adhesive and faced both front and back with hardwood veneers.
1.3
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
1.4
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: For laboratory casework. Include plans, elevations, and attachment details.
C.
Samples: For plastic laminate and other materials requiring color selection.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123553.16 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plastic-Laminate-Clad Laboratory
Casework (Dental Lab)
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of casework that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Delamination of components or other failures of glue bond.
Warping of components.
Failure of operating hardware.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Case
Systems Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
ALC-Collegedale.
CiF Laboratory Solutions.
LSI Corporation of America; a Sagus International company.
Sheldon Laboratory Systems.
South Texas Woodmill, Inc.
Stevens Industries, Inc.
Terrill Manufacturing Co. Inc.
Thermo Fisher Scientific.
TMI Systems Design Corporation.
Dental Arte (Metal Laboratory Casework).
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain plastic-laminate-clad laboratory casework from single source from
single manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes and configurations of laboratory casework by
referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' laboratory
casework of similar sizes and similar door and drawer configurations and complying with
Specifications may be considered.
2.2
CASEWORK, GENERAL
A.
Casework Product Standard:
Casework."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
Comply with SEFA 8 PL, "Laboratory Grade Plastic Laminate
123553.16 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plastic-Laminate-Clad Laboratory
Casework (Dental Lab)
2.3
PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS
A.
Design:
1.
B.
Flush overlay.
Exposed Materials:
1.
Plastic-Laminate Grade: HGS.
a.
C.
Semiexposed Materials:
1.
Plastic Laminate: Grade CLS unless otherwise indicated.
semiexposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
a.
2.4
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Provide plastic laminate for
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINET MATERIALS
A.
Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3 mm thick
at doors and drawer fronts, 1 mm thick elsewhere.
1.
C.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Core Materials for Plastic Laminate:
1.
D.
ABET Inc.
Arborite; a division of ITW Canada.
Formica Corporation.
Lamin-Art, Inc.
Panolam Industries International.
Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
Moisture-Resistant (MR) Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MR 50.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic
formaldehyde-free adhesive.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
Laminate:
Manufacturer's
123553.16 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
standard
waterproof,
urea-
Plastic-Laminate-Clad Laboratory
Casework (Dental Lab)
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
2.6
Filler and Closure Panels: Provide where indicated and as needed to close spaces between
cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with
same finish as adjacent exposed cabinet surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
HARDWARE
A.
General: Provide laboratory casework manufacturer's standard, commercial-quality, heavy-duty
hardware complying with requirements indicated for each type.
B.
Butt Hinges: Stainless-steel, five-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with
antifriction bearings and rounded tips.
C.
Hinged Door and Drawer Pulls: Solid-aluminum or stainless-steel back-mounted pulls.
D.
Door Catches: Dual, self-aligning, permanent magnet catches. Provide two catches on doors
more than 48 inches (1200 mm) high.
E.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07122.
1.
2.
F.
Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07042.
1.
2.
G.
2.7
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Olympus Lock,
Inc.; 100DR Deadbolt Cabinet Door Lock or comparable product.
Key all cabinet doors alike – 915, with catch, and spacer for pair of doors.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Olympus Lock,
Inc.; 200DW Deadbolt Cabinet Drawer Lock or comparable product.
Key all cabinet drawers alike – 915.
Adjustable Shelf Supports:
Type B04013.
Powder-coated steel shelf rests complying with BHMA A156.9,
EXPOSED SHELVES
A.
Stainless-Steel Shelves: Made from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.050-inch (1.27-mm)
nominal thickness, with No. 4 satin finish. Weld shop-made joints. Fold down front edge 3/4 inch
(19 mm). Provide manufacturer’s standard support brackets, spacing as indicated. After
fabricating, grind welds smooth and polish as needed to produce uniform, directionally textured
finish with no cross scratches or evidence of welds. Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces clean.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123553.16 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plastic-Laminate-Clad Laboratory
Casework (Dental Lab)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF CABINETS
A.
Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required,
using concealed shims. Where laboratory casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips
and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.
B.
Base Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to reinforcements in partitions, with fasteners spaced not more
than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.
1.
Where base cabinets are installed away from walls, fasten to floor at toe space at not
more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and at sides of cabinets with not less than two fasteners
per side.
C.
Wall Cabinets: Fasten to hanging strips, partition framing, blocking, or reinforcements in
partitions. Fasten each cabinet through back, near top, at not less than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
D.
Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises.
E.
Adjust laboratory casework and hardware so doors and drawers align and operate smoothly
without warp or bind and contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating hardware as
recommended by manufacturer.
3.2
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to
match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.
B.
Protect countertop surfaces during construction with 6-mil (0.15-mm) plastic or other suitable
water-resistant covering. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm)
o.c.
END OF SECTION 123553.16
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123553.16 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plastic-Laminate-Clad Laboratory
Casework (Dental Lab)
SECTION 123616 - METAL COUNTERTOPS (DENTAL LAB)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes stainless-steel countertops and backsplashes.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
B.
Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below that
complies with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral
curing, silicone.
Color: Clear.
Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
STAINLESS-STEEL COUNTERTOPS AND BACKSPLASHES
A.
Countertops: Fabricate from 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet. Provide smooth,
clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane, free of defects. Provide front and end
overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over the base cabinets.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Joints: Fabricate countertops without field-made joints to the extent possible.
Weld shop-made joints.
Sound-deaden the undersurface with heavy-build mastic coating.
Extend the top down to provide a 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick edge with a 1/2-inch (12.7-mm)
return flange.
Form the backsplash integral with top surface, with a hemmed top edge.
Where stainless-steel sinks occur in stainless-steel tops, factory weld into one integral unit.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123616 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal Countertops
(Dental Lab)
2.3
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISH
A.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional satin finish matching No. 4 finish, with no
evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install metal countertops level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
B.
Field Jointing: Where possible, make field jointing in the same manner as shop jointing; use
fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site
processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop
Drawings.
C.
Secure tops to cabinets with Z- or L-type fasteners or equivalent; use two or more fasteners at
each front, end, and back.
D.
Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent
deflection.
E.
Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant.
3.2
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protection: Provide 6-mil (0.15-mm) plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering over the
countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches (1220 mm) o.c.
END OF SECTION 123616
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123616 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal Countertops
(Dental Lab)
SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS (DENTAL CLINIC)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes plastic-laminate-clad countertops.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product high-pressure decorative laminate.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
C.
Samples:
1.
1.3
Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates:
AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates or WI Certified Compliance Program certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program or Licensee
of WI's Certified Compliance Program.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
1.5
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work
is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123623.13 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plastic-Laminate-Clad
Countertops (Dental Clinic)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements.
1.
Provide labels from AWI or WI certification program indicating that countertops, including
installation, comply with requirements of grades specified.
B.
Grade: Custom.
C.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGL.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
Formica Corporation.
Pionite.
Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
Nevamar.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of
exposed laminate surfaces that match existing and comply with the following requirements:
1.
As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
a.
Basis of Design: Formica 3517-58 Sand Crystal Matte finish.
E.
Edge Treatment: Square edge.
F.
Core Material at Sinks: Water resistant MDF (ANSI MR-50).
G.
Core Thickness: 3/4 inch.
1.
H.
2.2
Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional
layers of core material laminated to top.
Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside of
countertop substrate.
WOOD MATERIALS
A.
Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard
unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Wood Moisture Content: 4 to 9 percent.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123623.13 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plastic-Laminate-Clad
Countertops (Dental Clinic)
2.3
ACCESSORIES
A.
Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 3-inch OD, brown, molded-plastic grommets
and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
1.
2.4
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “OG series" by Doug Mockett
& Company, Inc.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
B.
Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions
from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C.
VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Sealants: Use products that comply with the following
limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L.
Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end
overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:
1.
Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to
Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where
necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
C.
Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures,
electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in
diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove
splinters and burrs.
1.
Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123623.13 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plastic-Laminate-Clad
Countertops (Dental Clinic)
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B.
Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop.
1.
2.
C.
Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items.
Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish.
Field Jointing: Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge
surfaces is not required.
1.
Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices
located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches.
Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavyclamping pressure at joints.
D.
Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
E.
Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
F.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1.
2.
3.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive.
Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another
permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 123623.13
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123623.13 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plastic-Laminate-Clad
Countertops (Dental Clinic)
SECTION 123653 - LABORATORY COUNTERTOPS (DENTAL CLINIC)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes epoxy resin countertops.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each manufactured product.
B.
Shop Drawings: For countertops and laboratory specialties.
1.
C.
Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.
1.
1.3
Indicate backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures, built-in
sinks and mounting methods.
Epoxy resin countertop material, 6 inches square.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Qualification Data: For installer and fabricator.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar
to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service
performance. Fabricator shall have 5 years documented experience in performing Work similar in
size and scope to that required for this Project.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products or entity approved in writing by the fabricator.
Installer shall have 5 years documented experience in performing Work similar in size and
scope to that required for this Project.
1.5
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
1.
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support countertops
by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123653- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Laboratory Countertops
(Dental Clinic)
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
Durcon Inc.
EPOXYN Products.
Laboratory Tops, Inc.
B.
Configuration: Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane free of defects.
Make exposed edges and corners uniformly rounded.
C.
Top Thickness: 1-inch thickness, unless noted otherwise, with tolerance not exceeding plus or
minus 1/32 inch. Provide front and end overhang of 1 -inch over base cabinets, formed with
continuous drip groove on under surface 1/2 -inch from edge.
D.
Cast Modified Epoxy Resin: Factory-molded tops of modified epoxy resin formulation, uniform
mixture throughout full thickness. Provide in smooth, nonspecular finish of color indicated.
1.
2.
Color: Black.
Physical Properties: Comply with the following minimum requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
Chemical Resistance: Spot test with the following reagents in standard laboratory
concentrations, in contact with finished top for 24 hours; top shall be entirely unaffected or
show only slight dulling of finish:
a.
4.
5.
Flexural strength: 15,000 psi.
Compressive strength: 35,000 psi.
Hardness (Rockwell M): 100.
Water absorption (24 hours): 0.02 percent (maximum).
Heat distortion point: 350 deg F.
Thermal shock resistance: Highly resistant.
Glacial acetic acid, nitric acid, sulfuric acid, ammonium hydroxide, sodium
hydroxide, amyl acetate, benzene, ethyl acetate, ethyl ether, hydrogen peroxide,
methyl ethyl ketone, phenol, trichloroethylene, zinc chloride, hydrochloric acid,
phosphoric acid, chromic acid, calcium hypochlorite, acetone, aqua regia,
butyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol, formaldehyde, methyl alcohol, kerosene, silver nitrate,
xylene.
Workmanship: Cast surfaces very smooth, with factory cutouts for sinks and drip
grooves. Fabricate plain butt-type joints assembled with epoxy adhesive and prefitted,
concealed metal spline.
Curbs and backsplashes shall be 1-inch -thick or greater and epoxy bonded to the
surface of the top to form a square edge.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123653- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Laboratory Countertops
(Dental Clinic)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS
A.
Install laboratory countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
B.
Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop.
Pre- drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using
adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace countertops. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
B.
Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION 123653
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123653- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Laboratory Countertops
(Dental Clinic)
SECTION 123661 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Solid-surface-material countertops and backsplashes.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For countertop materials.
B.
Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles,
methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
C.
Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A.
Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
1.
2.
3.
Front: Straight, slightly eased at top.
Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.
Endsplash: Matching backsplash.
B.
Countertops: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same
material.
C.
Backsplashes: Solid surface material to match countertop, thickness indicated.
2.2
COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A.
Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide products that comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
B.
Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, moisture resistant (MR-50).
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123661 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Simulated Stone
Countertops
C.
Adhesives: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions
from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
D.
Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
3.
Avonite Surfaces.
E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.
Formica Corporation.
LG Chemical, Ltd.
Meganite Inc.
Samsung Chemical USA, Inc.
Swan Corporation (The).
Transolid, Inc.
Wilsonart International.
Type: Provide Standard Type.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
a.
b.
Dental Clinic Basis of Design: WilsonArt 9038EA Flagstone, to match Dental
equipment solid surface for seamless installation.
Dental Clinic Sterilization Area, Biohazard Waste Basis of Design: Formica Traditions:
Copper Matrix #334.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop.
Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply
with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches,
and clean entire surface.
END OF SECTION 123661
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
123661 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Simulated Stone
Countertops
SECTION 124813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Aluminum floor mats.
Custom surface-mounted frames.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
C.
1.3
Items penetrating floor mats and frames, including door control devices.
Perimeter floor moldings.
Samples: For each floor mat.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Regulatory Requirements:
Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities.
ROLL-UP RAIL MATS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide K.N. Crowder Mfg.,
Inc.; Ken-a-Mat Model FM-5 or a comparable product that meets the specifications below.
B.
Roll-up, Aluminum-Rail Hinged Mats: Extruded-aluminum tread rails 2 inches (50 mm) on-center
wide by 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) total thickness, sitting on continuous vinyl cushions.
1.
2.
Tread Inserts: Plain serrated aluminum treads.
Rail Color: Mill finish.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
124813 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Entrance Floor
Mats and Frames
3.
4.
2.3
Hinges: Aluminum.
Mat Size: As indicated.
FRAMES
A.
Custom Surface-Mounted Frames: Aluminum angle frame members, as indicated in Drawings,
with welded mitered corners.
1.
2.4
Aluminum Color: Mill finish.
FABRICATION
A.
Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames that contact cementitious material with coldapplied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no
asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations indicated;
coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns.
ADJACENT FLOORING
A.
Build-up flooring substrate around entrance floor mat frame with trowelable leveling and
patching compound such that finished flooring material is flush with top of frame; feather-out to
elevation of existing floor slab.
1.
Refer to Section 096516 Resilient Sheet Flooring for further details
END OF SECTION 124813
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
124813 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Entrance Floor
Mats and Frames
SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Sleeves.
Sleeve-seal systems.
Grout.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SLEEVES
A.
Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron
pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel
collar; zinc coated.
C.
Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves:
with plain ends.
D.
PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
E.
Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
2.2
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Thunderline Linkseal.
Mason Industries
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220517 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Plumbing Piping
B.
Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space
between piping and sleeve.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
GROUT
A.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydrauliccement grout.
B.
Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B.
For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to
provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1.
C.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls
are constructed.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
2.
D.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.
Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1.
2.
3.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants
specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220517 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Plumbing Piping
E.
3.2
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for
firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service
piping entries into building.
B.
Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for
sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble
sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.
3.3
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A.
Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1.
Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system
1)
b.
Piping NPS 6 (and Larger:
1)
2.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 :
1)
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and
sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
2)
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear
space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a.
b.
4.
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and
sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a.
3.
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and
sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 : Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
Interior Partitions:
a.
b.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 : Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sleeve.
END OF SECTION 220517
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220517 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Plumbing Piping
SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Escutcheons.
Floor plates.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
2.2
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish and setscrew
fastener.
FLOOR PLATES
A.
One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
B.
Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD
that completely covers opening.
1.
Escutcheons for New Piping:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated
finish.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220518 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Escutcheons for
Plumbing Piping
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stampedsteel type.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type
with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel
type.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with roughbrass finish.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass finish.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.
C.
Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.
D.
Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD
that completely covers opening.
1.
3.2
New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.
END OF SECTION 220518
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220518 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Escutcheons for
Plumbing Piping
SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Brass ball valves.
Bronze swing check valves.
Bronze gate valves.
Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and
schedules.
Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for valves applicable only to this piping.
Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for valves applicable only to this piping.
Section 226113 "Compressed-Air Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities" for valves
applicable only to this piping.
Section 226213 "Vacuum Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities" for valves
applicable only to this piping.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ASME Compliance:
criteria.
ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design
B.
NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A.
Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
B.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
C.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220523 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
General-Duty for
Plumbing Piping
D.
Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:
1.
2.
E.
Valve-End Connections:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Gate Valves: With rising stem.
Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and
protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or
disturbing insulation.
Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.
Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
BRASS BALL VALVES
A.
Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following
a.
b.
c.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.3
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Apollo Valve.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
Standard: MSS SP-110.
SWP Rating: 150 psig CWP Rating: 600 psig Body Design: Two piece.
Body Material: Bronze.
Ends: Threaded.
Seats: PTFE or TFE.
Stem: Bronze.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
Port: Full.
BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following
a.
b.
c.
2.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
Keckley
Description:
a.
b.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4.
CWP Rating: 200 psig Body Design: Horizontal flow.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220523 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
General-Duty for
Plumbing Piping
c.
d.
e.
2.4
Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
Ends: Threaded.
Disc: PTFE or TFE.
BRONZE GATE VALVES
A.
Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
Keckley
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.
CWP Rating: 200 psig
Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
Ends: Threaded.
Stem: Bronze.
Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.
Packing: Asbestos free.
Handwheel: Malleable iron.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E.
Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow and in horizontal position with hinge pin
level.
3.2
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220523 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
General-Duty for
Plumbing Piping
3.3
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1.
2.
Shutoff Service: Ball, or gate valves.
Throttling Service: Ball valves.
B.
If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C.
Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1.
2.
3.
3.4
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valveend option is indicated in valve schedules below.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end
option is indicated in valve schedules below.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
LOW-PRESSURE, COMPRESSED-AIR VALVE SCHEDULE (150 PSIG OR LESS)
A.
Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.
Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc.
Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS
Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.
Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc.
Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS
HIGH-PRESSURE, COMPRESSED-AIR VALVE SCHEDULE 150 PSIG
A.
Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.
Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc.
Bronze Gate Valves: Class 150, NRS
Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.
Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc.
Bronze Gate Valves: Class 150, NRS
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220523 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
General-Duty for
Plumbing Piping
3.6
DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.
Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc.
Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS
Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.
Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc.
Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS.
END OF SECTION 220523
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220523 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
General-Duty for
Plumbing Piping
SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.2
Metal pipe hangers and supports.
Trapeze pipe hangers.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
Fastener systems.
Pipe positioning systems.
Equipment supports.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design:
Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to ASCE/SEI 7
1.
2.
1.3
Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems, system contents, and test water.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following; include Product Data for components:
1.
2.
C.
1.4
Trapeze pipe hangers.
Equipment supports.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Welding certificates.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220529 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Steel Welding Qualifications:
Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support
bearing surface of piping.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.
Copper Pipe Hangers:
1.
2.
2.2
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support
bearing surface of piping.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated
components.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A.
2.3
Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop-or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and Ubolts.
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A.
Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig with
ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and
vapor barrier.
B.
Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate with 100-psig [ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI,
Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220529 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment
C.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
D.
For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
E.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air
temperature.
2.4
FASTENER SYSTEMS
A.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
B.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
2.5
PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS
A.
2.6
Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning
piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
2.7
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbonsteel shapes.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
2.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports,
clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220529 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment
B.
Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1.
2.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
D.
Fastener System Installation:
1.
2.
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping
connections to each plumbing fixture.
F.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
G.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
H.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems,
to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion
joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
J.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger
and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
K.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
M.
Insulated Piping:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220529 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment
b.
c.
2.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated.
Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a.
3.
6.
3.2
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution
plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution
plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall
span an arc of 180 degrees.
a.
4.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert
with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of
length at least as long as protective shield.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.3
METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:
1.
2.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220529 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment
3.
4.
3.4
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches
3.5
PAINTING
A.
3.6
Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 Galvanized Surfaces:
Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to
comply with ASTM A 780.
HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E.
Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports andmetal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments
for general service applications.
F.
Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel attachments for hostile environment
applications.
G.
Use copper-plated pipe hangers and stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing.
H.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
I.
Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
J.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or insulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220529 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
K.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
L.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to
NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
M.
Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to
NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes
NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary
pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe
base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe
base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to
retain pipe.
Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30 , from two rods if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal
movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is
not necessary.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe
hangers from concrete ceiling.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19):
For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are
considerable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by
using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
b.
c.
8.
9.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220529 - 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment
N.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
O.
Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation
that matches adjoining insulation.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to
prevent crushing insulation.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4
inches.
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs.
Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base
support.
P.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
Q.
Use powder-actuated fasteners]or[mechanical-expansion
attachments where required in concrete construction.
R.
Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste
piping for plumbing fixtures.
anchors
instead
of
building
END OF SECTION 220529
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220529 - 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment
SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Equipment labels.
Warning signs and labels.
Pipe labels.
ACTION SUBMITTAL
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT LABELS
A.
Metal Labels for Equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled
or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 21/2 by 3/4 inch.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,
1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for
greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size
of principal lettering.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8
inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
Letter Color: Black.
Background Color: White.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 21/2 by 3/4 inch.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of
principal lettering.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220553 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Identification for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment
C.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing
numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification
Section number and title where equipment is specified.
D.
Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond
paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where
equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number
and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and
maintenance data.
2.2
WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch
thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B.
Letter Color: White.
C.
Background Color: Red.
D.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by
3/4 inch.
F.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch
for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel.
H.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I.
Label Content:
instructions.
2.3
Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
PIPE LABELS
A.
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels:
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B.
Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe
and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1.
2.
Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220553 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Identification for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B.
Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09.
B.
Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Near each valve and control device.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1.
Vacuum Piping:
a.
b.
2.
Compressed-Air Piping:
a.
b.
3.
Background Color: Black and White checkered.
Letter Color: Black.
Background Color: Yellow and White checkered
Letter Color: Black.
Domestic Water Piping:
a.
b.
Background Color: Blue
Letter Color: Black.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220553 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Identification for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment
4.
Sanitary Waste Piping:
a.
b.
Background Color: Green.
Letter Color: Black.
END OF SECTION 220553
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220553 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Identification for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment
SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.2
Domestic hot-water piping.
Domestic re-circulating hot-water piping.
Sanitary waste piping exposed to freezing conditions.
Storm-water piping exposed to freezing conditions.
Roof drains and rainwater leaders.
Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.
Section 220716 "Plumbing Equipment Insulation."
Division 22 Section “Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each
type of insulation.
Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access
panels.
Detail application of field-applied jackets.
Detail application at linkages of control devices.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Field quality-control reports.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220719 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plumbing Piping
Insulation
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and
cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
B.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index
of 50 or less.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 150 or less.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1.
Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation
Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground
Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according
to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F.
Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied
Jackets" Article.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas.
Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.
Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,
Class 2.
Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220719 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plumbing Piping
Insulation
G.
Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
H.
2.2
Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.
Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
Johns Manville: Micro-Lok.
b.
Knauf Insulation: 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.
c.
Owens Corning: Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2.
Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied
jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
INSULATING CEMENTS
A.
Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
2.3
Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal.
Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive.
K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220719 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plumbing Piping
Insulation
C.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
D.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding
insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
E.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-127.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
85-60/85-70.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-82.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
85-20.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone.
Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220719 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plumbing Piping
Insulation
2.4
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MILPRF-19565C, Type II.
1.
B.
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F .
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
Color: White.
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
30-80/30-90.
Vimasco Corporation; 749.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-10.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 550.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
46-50.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F .
Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.
Color: White.
SEALANTS
A.
Joint Sealants:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
Color: White or gray.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220719 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plumbing Piping
Insulation
B.
Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: Aluminum.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.6
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-76.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
95-44.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-76.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: White.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
When
ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220719 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plumbing Piping
Insulation
2.7
FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A.
Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10
strands/sq. in. , in a Leno weave, for pipe.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
2.8
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
Mast-A-Fab.
Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C;
thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is
indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
Color: Clear.
Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a.
2.9
Johns Manville; Zeston.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
Proto Corporation; LoSmoke.
Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and
supply covers for lavatories.
TAPES
A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.
Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 11.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch width.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220719 - 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plumbing Piping
Insulation
B.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 6.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;
suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Width: 2 inches.
Thickness: 6 mils.
Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 500 percent.
Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape.
Compac Corporation; 130.
Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1.
2.10
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.
Compac Corporation; 110 and 111.
Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.
Compac Corporation; 120.
Width: 2 inches.
Thickness: 3.7 mils.
Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 5 percent.
Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
SECUREMENTS
Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209 , Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4
inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220719 - 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plumbing Piping
Insulation
b.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping and Seals.
B.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
C.
Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
2.11
A.
C & F Wire.
PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a.
Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation.
2.
Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot-water and
cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA) requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements
for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.2
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free
of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220719 - 9
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plumbing Piping
Insulation
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure.
Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material
manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip,
spaced 4 inches o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal
seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps
with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a.
4.
5.
For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due
to thermal movement.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220719 - 10
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plumbing Piping
Insulation
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.
P.
For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Vibration-control devices.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Cleanouts.
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations:
penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation continuously through roof
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with
joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof
flashing.
Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with
sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through wall penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and
seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with
joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2
inches.
Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install
insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1.
Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and
fire-resistive joint sealers.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220719 - 11
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plumbing Piping
Insulation
F.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
2.
3.4
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
Comply
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
with
requirements
in
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific
requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter,
whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffingbox studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter,
whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced
without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation
cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation,
or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for
above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220719 - 12
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plumbing Piping
Insulation
C.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape
insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating
cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D.
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated.
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.5
Installation shall conform to the
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel
or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered
blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to
flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on
each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with
insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats.
After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces
with a metal jacket.
INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
2.
D.
Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as
pipe insulation.
Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220719 - 13
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plumbing Piping
Insulation
2.
3.
4.
3.6
When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION
A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least
1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
2.
D.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of
pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220719 - 14
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plumbing Piping
Insulation
3.7
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A.
Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1.
C.
3.8
Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end
joints.
Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-barrier mastic.
Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof
sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12
inches o.c. and at end joints.
FINISHES
A.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
B.
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.9
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
C.
Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing
field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of
inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded
fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations
of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged
valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220719 - 15
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plumbing Piping
Insulation
3.10
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.11
A.
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be one of the following:
1.
B.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for
People with Disabilities: Insulation shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.12
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
Underground piping.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch thick.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
Polyolefin: 3/4 inch thick.
INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A.
Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the fieldapplied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B.
If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C.
Piping, Concealed:
1.
D.
None.
Piping, Exposed:
1.
PVC: 20 mils thick.
END OF SECTION 220719
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
220719 - 16
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plumbing Piping
Insulation
SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings
inside buildings.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.2
Section 221113 "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water-service piping outside the
building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.
B.
LEED Submittals:
1.
2.
1.3
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1:
For solvent cements and adhesive primers,
documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For solvent cements and adhesive primers,
documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
System purging and disinfecting activities report.
B.
Field quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
B.
Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61.
components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221116 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Plastic piping
Domestic Water
Piping
2.2
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.
B.
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.
C.
Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
D.
Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
E.
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
F.
Copper Unions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
MSS SP-123.
Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.
Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.
Solder-joint or threaded ends.
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:
1.
2.
AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and
asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.
Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.
D.
Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.
E.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing unless otherwise indicated.
2.4
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B.
Dielectric Unions:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.
Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Wilkins; a Zurn company.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221116 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Domestic Water
Piping
2.
3.
4.
C.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
Dielectric Flanges:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint
copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.
Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Wilkins; a Zurn company.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
Calpico, Inc.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
Dielectric Nipples:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Grinnell Mechanical Products; Tyco Fire Products LP.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
Victaulic Company.
Standard: IAPMO PS 66.
Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.
Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig.
End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221116 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Domestic Water
Piping
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B.
Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C.
Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and
AWWA M41.
D.
Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside
the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure
gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for drain
valves and strainers in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
E.
Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
F.
Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements
for pressure-reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
G.
Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.
H.
Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
I.
Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in
Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
J.
Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
K.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
L.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
M.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
N.
Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than
the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
O.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
P.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Q.
Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and
specialty.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221116 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Domestic Water
Piping
R.
Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged
booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and
Gages for Plumbing Piping."
S.
Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in
Section 221123 "Domestic Water Pumps."
T.
Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater.
Comply with
requirements for thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."
U.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for
sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
V.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements
for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
W.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.2
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
C.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads
full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID.
Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
D.
Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints"
chapter.
E.
Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join
copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
F.
Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools
recommended by fitting manufacturer.
G.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and
thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
H.
Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both
piping systems.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221116 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Domestic Water
Piping
3.3
TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B.
Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal
transition fittings or unions.
3.4
DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric +unions.
C.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flange kits.
D.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
3.5
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic
Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B.
Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529
"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1.
2.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.
Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
Longer than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer:
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
C.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
E.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221116 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Domestic Water
Piping
3.6
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and
maintenance.
C.
Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping.
dissimilar piping materials.
D.
Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect
to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.7
Use transition fitting to join
Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping.
Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than that required by plumbing code.
Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components.
Comply with requirements for identification materials and
installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B.
Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
Piping Inspections:
a.
b.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
having jurisdiction:
1)
2)
c.
d.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing
or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.
Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests
specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance
with requirements.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or
inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221116 - 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Domestic Water
Piping
2.
Piping Tests:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air
bound and that piping is full of water.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a
separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was
covered or concealed before it was tested.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test
source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects that must be repaired.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
B.
Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9
ADJUSTING
A.
Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
Open throttling valves to proper setting.
Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.10
A.
Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to
provide hot-water flow in each branch.
Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during
installation.
Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
CLEANING
Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1.
Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221116 - 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Domestic Water
Piping
2.
Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if
methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a.
b.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1)
2)
c.
d.
e.
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of
chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of
chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample
approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.11
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in
applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
copper tubing.
D.
Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:
1.
E.
Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be the following:
1.
F.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast or wrought copper, solder-joint fittings; and
soldered joints.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and
soldered joints.
Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 5 to NPS 8, shall be one of the following:
1.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L ; cast-or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and
soldered joints.
END OF SECTION 221116
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221116 - 9
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Domestic Water
Piping
SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Section:
1.
1.2
Pipe, tube, and fittings.
Specialty pipe fittings.
Section 221313 "Facility Sanitary Sewers" for sanitary sewerage piping and structures outside
the building.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.3
Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand
the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
1.
1.5
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221316 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sanitary Waste and
Vent Piping
B.
Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solderjoint fittings.
C.
Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end.
1.
2.
D.
2.3
Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch
maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.
ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40.
B.
Cellular-Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40.
C.
ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.
D.
Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235.
1.
2.
2.4
ABS solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 325 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A.
Transition Couplings:
1.
2.
3.
General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or
of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to
be joined.
Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system
fitting.
Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
b.
c.
d.
Fernco Inc.
Standard: ASTM C 1173.
Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear
ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each
end.
Sleeve Materials:
1)
For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221316 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sanitary Waste and
Vent Piping
2)
3)
4.
For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe
materials being joined.
Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
b.
c.
Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
Standard: ASTM C 1460.
Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer
shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on
each end.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
C.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
F.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
G.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H.
Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used
on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double
Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with
common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of
flow is prohibited.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221316 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sanitary Waste and
Vent Piping
I.
Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise
indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
J.
Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
K.
Install aboveground ABS piping according to ASTM D 2661.
L.
Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.
M.
Plumbing Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
Install backwater valves in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements
for backwater valves specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for
cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains
specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
N.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
O.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for
sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
P.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements
for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
Q.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.2
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828.
water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.
B.
Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in
cross pattern.
C.
Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe
and fittings according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
Use ASTM B 813,
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221316 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sanitary Waste and
Vent Piping
3.3
SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Transition Couplings:
1.
2.
3.4
Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.
In Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless otherwise
indicated.
Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves unless drain has integral backwater valve.
Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
Comply with requirements for backwater valve specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste
Piping Specialties."
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B.
Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in
Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.
Install stainless-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments.
Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.
Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:
a.
b.
c.
7.
8.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
Longer than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer:
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
C.
Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling.
D.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
F.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
2.
NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221316 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sanitary Waste and
Vent Piping
3.
4.
5.
6.
NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 3 and NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.
NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.
G.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
H.
Install hangers for ABS and PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inchrod.
NPS 6 and NPS 8: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.
I.
Install supports for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48 inches.
J.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.6
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
C.
Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but
not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code.
Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover
flush with floor.
Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor.
Comply with requirements for backwater valves clean out sand drains specified in
Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and
union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.
D.
Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of
equipment.
E.
Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221316 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sanitary Waste and
Vent Piping
3.7
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.8
Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification
specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be
made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe
tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction
or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.9
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and
vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside
leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water
to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before
inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for
leaks.
Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled
with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack
openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping
system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water
closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing
additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for
gas and water leaks.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221316 - 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sanitary Waste and
Vent Piping
D.
3.10
Exposed ABS and PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of
water-based latex paint.
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following:
1.
2.
D.
Solid-wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.
Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
Solid-wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.
Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
Solid-wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
[Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded], nonpressure transition couplings.
Aboveground, vent piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following:
1.
2.
Solid-wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.
END OF SECTION 221316
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221316 - 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sanitary Waste and
Vent Piping
SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Backwater valves.
Cleanouts.
Floor drains.
Roof flashing assemblies.
Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors.
Include rated capacities, operating
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CLEANOUTS
A.
Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Josam Company.
Watts Drainage Products.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping
Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
Closure: Raised-head, cast-iron plug.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221319 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sanitary Waste
Piping Insulation
B.
Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts :
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
C.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for threaded, adjustable housing cleanout.
Size: Same as connected branch.
Type: Threaded, adjustable housing.
Body or Ferrule: Cast iron .
Clamping Device: Required.
Outlet Connection: Hubless.
Closure: Brass plug with tapered threads.
Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.
Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Polished bronze.
Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
Top Loading Classification: See plans for intended use.
Riser: ASTM A 74, Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.
Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts :
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.2
Josam Company; Josam Div.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
Watts Drainage Products Inc.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
Closure: Raised-headcast-iron plug.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.
Wall Access: Roundnickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation frame
and cover.
MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Sleeve Flashing Device :
1.
2.
Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms sleeve for
pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top
of fitting that will extend 2 inches above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension
in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.
Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221319 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sanitary Waste
Piping Insulation
B.
Stack Flashing Fittings:
1.
2.
C.
Vent Caps :
1.
2.
2.3
Description: Counter flashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof
membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include
vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.
Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and
thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.
Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.
Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.
B.
Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
C.
Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
D.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
E.
Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck
plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove
valve cover for servicing.
B.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger
piping.
Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221319 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sanitary Waste
Piping Insulation
C.
For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished
floor.
D.
For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set
with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch
total depression.
Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1inch total depression.
Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise
indicated.
F.
Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
G.
Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
H.
Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub2 inches above floor.
I.
Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.
J.
Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer
connection.
1.
2.
Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.
Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
K.
Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping
discharge into sanitary drainage system.
L.
Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
M.
Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.
N.
Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets.
indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
221319 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sanitary Waste
Piping Insulation
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping
installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
3.3
FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1.
B.
Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker. Solder
joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.
Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and
roofs with waterproof membrane.
1.
2.
3.
Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt
or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.
Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
around specialty.
C.
Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D.
Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E.
Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counter flashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
F.
Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing
into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
3.4
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or
sign on or near each grease interceptor.
B.
Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to
identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221319 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sanitary Waste
Piping Insulation
3.5
PROTECTION
A.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221319
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
221319 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sanitary Waste
Piping Insulation
SECTION 226113 - COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Medical compressed-air piping, designated "medical air."
Gas-powered-tool compressed-air piping, designated "instrument air."
Section 221513 "General-Service Compressed-Air Piping" for general-service compressedair piping and specialties.
Section 226119 "Compressed-Air Equipment for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities" for air
compressors and specialties.
Section 226400 "Medical Gas Alarms" for combined medical air, vacuum, and gas alarms.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Material Certificates: Signed by Installer certifying that medical compressed-air piping materials
comply with requirements in NFPA 99 for positive-pressure medical gas systems.
C.
Brazing certificates.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
2.
Medical Air Piping Systems for Healthcare Facilities: According to ASSE Standard #6010 for
medical-gas-system installers.
Shape-Memory-Metal Coupling Joints: An authorized representative who is trained and
approved by manufacturer.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226113 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Compressed-Air Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the vacuum piping testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical Gas
Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.
C.
Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE Standard #6020 for medical-gas-system
inspectors and ASSE Standard #6030 for medical-gas-system verifiers.
Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications"; or AWS B2.2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Medical air operating at 50 to 55 psig.
B.
Instrument air operating at 175 psig.
2.2
PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A.
Comply with NFPA 99 for medical air piping materials.
B.
Copper Medical Gas Tube: ASTM B 819, Type K, seamless, drawn temper that has been
manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service or according to CGA G-4.1
for oxygen service. Include standard color marking "OXY," "MED," "OXY/MED," "OXY/ACR," or
"ACR/MED" in green for Type K tube and in blue for Type L tube.
C.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type that has been manufacturer
cleaned, purged, and bagged for oxygen service according to CGA G-4.1.
D.
Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123, wrought-copper or cast-copper alloy.
E.
Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150.
1.
2.
F.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch
maximum thickness, full-face type.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.
Shape-Memory-Metal Couplings:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
2.
Aerofit, Inc.
Smart Tap, Inc.
Description: Cryogenic compression fitting made of nickel-titanium, shape-memory alloy,
and that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for oxygen service
according to CGA G-4.1.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226113 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Compressed-Air Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
G.
Flexible Pipe Connectors:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Description: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed
to inner tubing.
a.
b.
2.3
Flex-Hose Co., Inc.
Flexicraft Industries.
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
Mercer Gasket & Shim, Inc.
Metraflex Company (The).
Proco Products, Inc.
Unaflex.
Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan Co.
Working-Pressure Rating: 200 psig minimum.
End Connections: Plain-end copper tube.
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys.
B.
Threaded-Joint Tape: PTFE.
2.4
VALVES
A.
General Requirements for Valves: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged according to
CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service.
B.
Ball Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Allied Healthcare Products Inc.; Chemetron Division.
Amico Corporation.
BeaconMedaes.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Marwin Valve; a division of Richards Industries.
NIBCO INC.
Ohio Medical Corporation.
Tri-Tech Medical Inc.
Standard: MSS SP-110.
Description: Three-piece body, brass or bronze.
Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum.
Ball: Full-port, chrome-plated brass.
Seats: PTFE or TFE.
Handle: LeverStem: Blowout proof with PTFE or TFE seal.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226113 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Compressed-Air Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
C.
Check Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Bronze body.
ASME-construction, poppet, pressure-relief type.
Settings to match system requirements.
Pressure Regulators:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Description: In-line pattern, bronze.
Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum.
Operation: Spring loaded.
Ends: Manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions.
Safety Valves:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Allied Healthcare Products Inc.; Chemetron Division.
Amico Corporation.
BeaconMedaes.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Ohio Medical Corporation.
Tri-Tech Medical Inc.
Bronze body and trim.
Spring-loaded, diaphragm-operated, relieving type.
Manual pressure-setting adjustment.
Rated for 80-psig minimum inlet pressure.
Capable of controlling delivered air pressure within 0.5 psig for each 10-psig inlet pressure.
MEDICAL COMPRESSED-AIR SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Allied Healthcare Products Inc.; Chemetron Division.
Amico Corporation.
BeaconMedaes.
Ohio Medical Corporation.
Oxequip Health Industries; a division of Allied Healthcare Products Inc.
Tri-Tech Medical Inc.
General Requirements for Medical Compressed-Air Service Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Suitable for specific medical air pressure and service listed.
Include roughing-in assemblies, finishing assemblies, and cover plates.
Individual cover plates are not required if service connection is in multiple unit or assembly
with cover plate.
Recessed-type units made for concealed piping unless otherwise indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226113 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Compressed-Air Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
C.
Finishing Assembly:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Quick-Coupler Pressure Service Connections:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Outlets for instrument air with non-interchangeable keyed indexing to prevent interchange
between services.
Constructed to permit one-handed connection and removal of equipment.
With positive-locking ring that retains equipment stem in valve during use.
D.I.S.S. Pressure Service Connections: Outlets, complying with CGA V-5, with threaded indexing
to prevent interchange between services, constructed to permit one-handed connection and
removal of equipment.
1.
2.
F.
Brass housing with primary check valve.
Double seals that will prevent air leakage.
Cover plate with gas-service label.
Medical Air: D.I.S.S. No. 1160.
Instrument Air: D.I.S.S. No. 1160.
Cover Plates:
1.
2.
3.
One piece.
Stainless steel.
Permanent, color-coded, identifying label matching corresponding service.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Cleaning of Medical Gas Tubing: If manufacturer-cleaned and -capped fittings or tubing are not
available or if precleaned fittings or tubing must be recleaned because of exposure, have
supplier or separate agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction perform the following
procedures:
1.
2.
Clean medical gas tube and fittings, valves, gages, and other components of oil, grease,
and other readily oxidizable materials as required for oxygen service according to CGA G4.1.
Wash medical gas tubing and components in hot, alkaline-cleaner-water solution of
sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate in proportion of 1 lb of chemical to 3 gal. of
water.
a.
b.
Scrub to ensure complete cleaning.
Rinse with clean, hot water to remove cleaning solution.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226113 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Compressed-Air Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
3.2
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
compressed-air piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, air-compressor sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B.
Comply with NFPA 99 for installation of compressed-air piping.
C.
Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
F.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
G.
Install compressed-air piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.
H.
Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than
system pressure rating used in applications specified in "Piping Schedule" Article unless otherwise
indicated.
I.
Install eccentric reducers, if available, where compressed-air piping is reduced in direction of
flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.
J.
Install branch connections to compressed-air mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and
drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.
K.
Install thermometer and pressure gage on discharge piping from each air compressor and on
each receiver. Comply with requirements in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing
Piping."
L.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
M.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
N.
Install fittings for changes in direction and for branch connections.
O.
Install medical air piping to medical air service connections specified in this Section, to medical
air service connections in equipment specified in Section 226313 "Gas Piping for Laboratory and
Healthcare Facilities," and to equipment specified in other Sections requiring medical air service.
P.
Piping Restraint Installation: Install seismic restraints on compressed-air piping. Seismic-restraint
devices are specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226113 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Compressed-Air Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
Q.
Install compressed-air service connections recessed in walls.
substrate; attach finishing assembly to roughing-in assembly.
R.
Connect compressed-air piping to air compressors and to compressed-air outlets and equipment
requiring compressed-air service.
S.
Install unions in copper compressed-air tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to
each machine, specialty, and piece of equipment.
T.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for
sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
U.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.3
Attach roughing-in assembly to
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install shutoff valve at each connection to and from compressed-air equipment and specialties.
B.
Install check valves to maintain correct direction of compressed-air flow from compressed-air
equipment.
C.
Install valve boxes recessed in wall and anchored to substrate. Single boxes may be used for
multiple valves that serve same area or function.
D.
Install zone valves and gages in valve boxes. Rotate valves to angle that prevents closure of
cover when valve is in closed position.
E.
Install pressure regulators on compressed-air piping where reduced pressure is required.
F.
Install flexible pipe connectors in discharge piping and in inlet air piping from remote air-inlet filter
of each air compressor.
3.4
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned tubing and fittings before assembly.
B.
Threaded Joints: Apply appropriate tape to external pipe threads.
C.
Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
"Brazed Joints" chapter. Continuously purge joint with oil-free dry nitrogen during brazing.
D.
Flanged Joints: Install flange on copper tubes. Use pipe-flange gasket between flanges. Join
flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure.
E.
Shape-Memory-Metal Coupling Joints: Join new copper tube to existing tube according to
procedures developed by fitting manufacturer for installation of shape-memory-metal coupling
joints.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226113 - 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Compressed-Air Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
3.5
COMPRESSED-AIR SERVICE COMPONENT INSTALLATION
A.
3.6
Install compressed-air pressure control panel in walls. Attach to substrate.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.
B.
Comply with requirements in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices.
C.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
D.
Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
1.
2.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers.
Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable, roller hangers.
E.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe
rolls on trapeze. Comply with requirements in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment" for trapeze hangers.
F.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
G.
Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.
H.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch- minimum rods.
I.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
J.
3.7
NPS 1/4: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 3/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1-1/4: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1-1/2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 2: 11 feet with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 2-1/2: 13 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 3: 14 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 3-1/2: 15 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 4: 16 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install identifying labels and devices for valves and specialties. Comply with requirements in
Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226113 - 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Compressed-Air Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
B.
Install identifying labels and devices for medical compressed-air piping systems according to
NFPA 99. Use the following or similar captions and color-coding for piping products where
required by NFPA 99:
1.
2.
3.8
Medical Air: Black letters on yellow background.
Instrument Air: White letters on red background.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR MEDICAL COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING IN HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections of medical
compressed-air piping in healthcare facilities and to prepare test and inspection reports.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
Medical Compressed-Air Testing Coordination: Perform tests, inspections, verifications, and
certification of medical compressed-air piping systems concurrently with tests, inspections,
and certification of medical gas piping and medical vacuum piping systems.
Preparation: Perform the following Installer tests according to requirements in NFPA 99 and
ASSE Standard #6010:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
System Verification: Perform the following tests and inspections according to NFPA 99,
ASSE Standard #6020, and ASSE Standard #6030:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
4.
Standing pressure test.
Individual-pressurization or pressure-differential cross-connection test.
Valve test.
Master and area alarm tests.
Piping purge test.
Piping particulate test.
Piping purity test.
Final tie-in test.
Operational pressure test.
Medical air purity test.
Verify correct labeling of equipment and components.
Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been
performed and certify report results. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Initial blowdown.
Initial pressure test.
Cross-connection test.
Piping purge test.
Standing pressure test for positive-pressure medical compressed-air piping.
Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
Inspections performed.
Procedures, materials, and gases used.
Test methods used.
Results of tests.
Remove and replace components that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified
above.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226113 - 9
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Compressed-Air Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
3.9
PROTECTION
A.
Protect tubing from damage.
B.
Retain sealing plugs in tubing, fittings, and specialties until installation.
C.
Clean tubing not properly sealed, and where sealing is damaged, according to "Preparation"
Article.
3.10
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Connect new tubing to existing tubing with memory-metal couplings.
B.
Flanges may be used where connection to flanged equipment is required.
C.
Instrument Air Piping Larger Than 1/4” and Operating at More Than 60 psig: Type K, copper tube;
wrought-copper fittings; and brazed joints.
3.11
VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Shutoff Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions.
B.
Zone Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions with
pressure gage on one copper-tube extension.
END OF SECTION 226113
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226113 - 10
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Compressed-Air Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
SECTION 226213 - VACUUM PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.2
Medical-surgical vacuum piping, designated "medical vacuum."
Section 226219 "Vacuum Equipment for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities" for vacuum
producers and accessories.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Material Certificates: Signed by Installer certifying that medical vacuum piping materials comply
with requirements in NFPA 99.
C.
Brazing certificates.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
2.
Medical Vacuum Piping Systems for Healthcare Facilities:
According to
ASSE Standard #6010 for medical-gas-system installers.
Shape-Memory-Metal Coupling Joints: An authorized representative who is trained and
approved by manufacturer.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226213 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Vacuum Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the vacuum piping testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical Gas
Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.
C.
Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE Standard #6020 for medical-gas-system
inspectors and ASSE Standard #6030 for medical-gas-system verifiers.
Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications"; or AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing Procedure
and Performance Qualification."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.2
Medical vacuum operating at 15 in. Hg PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A.
Comply with NFPA 99 for medical vacuum piping materials.
B.
Copper Medical Gas Tube: ASTM B 819, Type L, seamless, drawn temper that has been
manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service or according to CGA G-4.1
for oxygen service. Include standard color marking "OXY," "MED," "OXY/MED," "OXY/ACR," or
"ACR/MED" in blue.
C.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type that has been manufacturer
cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service or according to CGA G-4.1 for oxygen
service.
D.
Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123, wrought-copper or cast-copper alloy.
E.
Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150.
1.
2.
F.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch
maximum thickness, full-face type.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.
Shape-Memory-Metal Couplings:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
2.
Aerofit, Inc.
Smart Tap, Inc.
Description: Cryogenic compression fitting made of nickel-titanium, shape-memory alloy,
and that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for oxygen service
according to CGA G-4.1.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226213 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Vacuum Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
G.
Flexible Pipe Connectors:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [[provide products by one of
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Description: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed
to inner tubing.
a.
b.
2.3
Flex-Hose Co., Inc.
Flexicraft Industries.
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
Mercer Gasket & Shim, Inc.
Metraflex Company (The).
Proco Products, Inc.
Unaflex.
Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan Co.
Working-Pressure Rating: 80 minimum.
End Connections: Plain-end copper tube.
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys.
B.
Threaded-Joint Tape: PTFE.
2.4
VALVES
A.
General Requirements for Valves: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged according to
CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service.
1.
B.
Exception: Factory cleaning and bagging are not required for valves for WAGD service.
Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
Allied Healthcare Products Inc.; Chemetron Division.
Amico Corporation.
BeaconMedaes.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Marwin Valve; a division of Richards Industries.
NIBCO INC.
Ohio Medical Corporation.
Tri-Tech Medical Inc.
Standard: MSS SP-110.
Description: Three-piece body, brass or bronze.
Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226213 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Vacuum Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Ball: Full-port, chrome-plated brass.
Seats: PTFE or TFE.
Handle: Lever].
Stem: Blowout proof with PTFE or TFE seal.
Check Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Allied Healthcare Products Inc.; Chemetron Division.
Amico Corporation.
BeaconMedaes.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Ohio Medical Corporation.
Tri-Tech Medical Inc.
Description: In-line pattern, bronze.
Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum.
Operation: Spring loaded.
Ends: Manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions.
MEDICAL VACUUM SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
4.
Suitable for specific medical vacuum service listed.
Include roughing-in assemblies, finishing assemblies, and cover plates.
Individual cover plates are not required if service connection is in multiple unit or assembly
with cover plate.
Recessed-type units made for concealed piping unless otherwise indicated.
Finishing Assembly:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Allied Healthcare Products Inc.; Chemetron Division.
Amico Corporation.
BeaconMedaes.
Ohio Medical Corporation.
Oxequip Health Industries; a division of Allied Healthcare Products Inc.
Tri-Tech Medical Inc.
General Requirements for Medical Vacuum Service Connections:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Brass housing with primary check valve.
Seals that will prevent vacuum leakage.
Cover plate with gas-service label.
Quick-Coupler Suction Service Connections:
1.
Inlets for medical vacuum with noninterchangeable keyed indexing to prevent
interchange between services.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226213 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Vacuum Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
2.
3.
E.
Constructed to permit one-handed connection and removal of equipment.
With positive-locking ring that retains equipment stem in valve during use.
D.I.S.S. Suction Service Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inlets complying with CGA V-5.
Threaded indexing to prevent interchange between services.
Constructed to permit one-handed connection and removal of equipment.
Medical Vacuum: CGA V-5, D.I.S.S. No. 1220.
WAGD: CGA V-5, D.I.S.S. No. 2220.
F.
Vacuum Bottle Brackets: One piece, with pattern and finish matching corresponding service
cover plate.
G.
Cover Plates:
1.
2.
3.
One piece.
Stainless steel.
Permanent, color-coded, identifying label matching corresponding service.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Cleaning of Medical Gas Tubing: If manufacturer-cleaned and -capped fittings or tubing is not
available or if precleaned fittings or tubing must be recleaned because of exposure, have
supplier or separate agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction perform the following
procedures:
1.
2.
Clean medical gas tube and fittings, valves, gages, and other components of oil, grease,
and other readily oxidizable materials as required for oxygen service according to CGA G4.1.
Wash medical gas tubing and components in hot, alkaline-cleaner-water solution of
sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate in proportion of 1 lb of chemical to 3 gal. of
water.
a.
b.
3.2
Scrub to ensure complete cleaning.
Rinse with clean, hot water to remove cleaning solution.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
vacuum piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate
friction loss, expansion, vacuum producer sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as
indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B.
Comply with NFPA 99 for installation of vacuum piping.
C.
Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226213 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Vacuum Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
F.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
G.
Install vacuum piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.
H.
Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than
piping pressure rating used in applications specified in "Piping Schedule" Article unless otherwise
indicated.
I.
Install eccentric reducers, if available, where vacuum piping is reduced in direction of flow, with
bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.
J.
Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.
K.
Install thermometer and vacuum gage on inlet piping to each vacuum producer and on each
receiver and separator. Comply with requirements in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for
Plumbing Piping."
L.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
M.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
N.
Install fittings for changes in direction and for branch connections.
O.
Install medical vacuum piping from medical vacuum service connections specified in this
Section, to equipment specified in Section 226219 "Vacuum Equipment for Laboratory and
Healthcare Facilities," and to equipment specified in other Sections requiring medical vacuum
service.
P.
Install medical vacuum service connections recessed in walls. Attach roughing-in assembly to
substrate; attach finishing assembly to roughing-in assembly.
Q.
Install medical vacuum bottle bracket adjacent to each wall-mounted medical vacuum service
connection suction inlet.
R.
Connect vacuum piping to vacuum producers and to equipment requiring vacuum service.
S.
Install unions in copper vacuum tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each
machine, specialty, and piece of equipment.
T.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for
sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
U.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226213 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Vacuum Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
3.3
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install shutoff valve at each connection to and from vacuum equipment and specialties.
B.
Install check valves to maintain correct direction of vacuum flow to vacuum-producing
equipment.
C.
Install valve boxes recessed in wall and anchored to substrate. Single boxes may be used for
multiple valves that serve same area or function.
D.
Install zone valves and gages in valve boxes. Rotate valves to angle that prevents closure of
cover when valve is in closed position.
E.
Install flexible pipe connectors in suction inlet piping to each vacuum producer.
3.4
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned tubing and fittings before assembly.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D.
Threaded Joints: Apply appropriate tape to external pipe threads.
E.
Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
"Brazed Joints" chapter. Do not use flux. Continuously purge joint with oil-free dry nitrogen during
brazing.
F.
Flanged Joints:
1.
G.
3.5
Copper Tubing: Install flange on copper tubes. Use pipe-flange gasket between flanges.
Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure.
Shape-Memory-Metal Coupling Joints: Join new copper tube to existing tube according to
procedures developed by fitting manufacturer for installation of shape-memory-metal coupling
joints.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.
B.
Comply with requirements in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices.
C.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
D.
Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
1.
2.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers.
Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable, roller hangers.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226213 - 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Vacuum Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
E.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe
rolls on trapeze. Comply with requirements in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment" for trapeze hangers.
F.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
G.
Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.
H.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch- minimum rods.
I.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
J.
3.6
NPS 1/4: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 3/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1-1/4: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1-1/2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 2: 11 feet with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 2-1/2: 13 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 3: 14 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 3-1/2: 15 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 4: 16 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 5: 18 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install identifying labels and devices for valves and specialties. Comply with requirements in
Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B.
Install identifying labels and devices for medical vacuum piping systems according to NFPA 99.
Use the following or similar captions and color-coding for piping products where required by
NFPA 99:
1.
3.7
Medical Vacuum: Black letters on white background.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR HEALTHCARE FACILITY MEDICAL VACUUM PIPING
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections of medical
vacuum piping systems in healthcare facilities and to prepare test and inspection reports.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Medical Vacuum Testing Coordination: Perform tests, inspections, verifications, and
certification of medical vacuum piping systems concurrently with tests, inspections, and
certification of medical compressed-air piping systems.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226213 - 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Vacuum Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
2.
Preparation: Perform the following Installer tests according to requirements in NFPA 99 and
ASSE Standard #6010:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
System Verification: Perform the following tests and inspections according to NFPA 99,
ASSE Standard #6020, and ASSE Standard #6030:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
4.
3.8
Standing pressure test.
Individual-pressurization or pressure-differential cross-connection test.
Valve test.
Master and area alarm tests.
Piping purge test.
Final tie-in test.
Operational vacuum test.
Verify correct labeling of equipment and components.
Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been
performed and certify report results. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Initial blowdown.
Initial pressure test.
Cross-connection test.
Piping purge test.
Standing pressure test for vacuum systems.
Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
Inspections performed.
Procedures, materials, and gases used.
Test methods used.
Results of tests.
Remove and replace components that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified
above.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect tubing from damage.
B.
Retain sealing plugs in tubing, fittings, and specialties until installation.
C.
Clean tubing not properly sealed, and where sealing is damaged, according to "Preparation"
Article.
3.9
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Connect new copper tubing to existing copper tubing with memory-metal couplings.
B.
Flanges may be used where connection to flanged equipment is required.
C.
Medical Vacuum Piping: Use copper tube, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226213 - 9
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Vacuum Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
3.10
A.
VALVE SCHEDULE
Shutoff Valves:
1.
B.
Copper Tubing: Copper-alloy ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, coppertube extensions.
Zone Valves: Copper-alloy ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube
extensions with pressure gage on one copper-tube extension.
END OF SECTION 226213
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
226213 - 10
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Vacuum Piping for
Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities
SECTION 230130.51 - HVAC AIR-DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes cleaning HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and system
components.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
UL Compliance: Comply with UL 181 and UL 181A for fibrous-glass ducts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Use the existing service openings, as required for proper cleaning, at various points of the HVAC
system for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.
B.
Comply with NADCA ACR 2006, "Guidelines for Constructing Service Openings in HVAC Systems"
Section.
3.2
CLEANING
A.
Comply with NADCA ACR 2006.
B.
Remove visible surface contaminants and deposits from within the HVAC system.
C.
Systems and Components to Be Cleaned:
1.
2.
3.
Air devices for supply and return air.
Air-terminal units.
Ductwork:
a.
b.
c.
Supply-air ducts, including turning vanes, to the air-handling unit.
Return-air ducts to the air-handling unit.
Exhaust-air ducts.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230130.51 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
HVAC Air
Duct Cleaning
4.
Air-Handling Units:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Interior surfaces of the unit casing.
Coil surfaces compartment.
Condensate drain pans.
Fans, fan blades, and fan housings.
Filters and filter housings.
D.
Collect debris removed during cleaning. Ensure that debris is not dispersed outside the HVAC
system during the cleaning process.
E.
Particulate Collection:
1.
2.
For particulate collection equipment, include adequate filtration to contain debris
removed. Locate equipment downwind and away from all air intakes and other points of
entry into the building.
HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for particles sized 0.3 micrometer or
larger shall be used where the particulate collection equipment is exhausting inside the
building,
F.
Control odors and mist vapors during the cleaning and restoration process.
G.
Mark the position of manual volume dampers and air-directional mechanical devices inside the
system prior to cleaning. Restore them to their marked position on completion of cleaning.
H.
System components shall be cleaned so that all HVAC system components are visibly clean. On
completion, all components must be returned to those settings recorded just prior to cleaning
operations.
I.
Clean all air-distribution devices, registers, grilles, and diffusers.
J.
Clean visible surface contamination deposits according to NADCA ACR 2006 and the following:
1.
2.
3.
K.
Duct Systems:
1.
2.
L.
Clean air-handling units, airstream surfaces, components, condensate collectors, and
drains.
Ensure that a suitable operative drainage system is in place prior to beginning wash-down
procedures.
Clean evaporator coils, reheat coils, and other airstream components.
Create service openings in the HVAC system as necessary to accommodate cleaning.
Mechanically clean duct systems specified to remove all visible contaminants so that the
systems are capable of passing the HVAC System Cleanliness Tests (see
NADCA ACR 2006).
Debris removed from the HVAC system shall be disposed of according to applicable Federal,
state, and local requirements.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230130.51 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
HVAC Air
Duct Cleaning
M.
Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1.
Source-Removal Cleaning Methods: The HVAC system shall be cleaned using sourceremoval mechanical cleaning methods designed to extract contaminants from within the
HVAC system and to safely remove these contaminants from the facility. No cleaning
method, or combination of methods, shall be used that could potentially damage
components of the HVAC system or negatively alter the integrity of the system.
a.
b.
2.
Cleaning Mineral-Fiber Insulation Components:
a.
b.
c.
N.
Fibrous-glass thermal or acoustical insulation elements present in equipment or
ductwork shall be thoroughly cleaned with HEPA vacuuming equipment while the
HVAC system is under constant negative pressure and shall not be permitted to get
wet according to NADCA ACR 2006.
Cleaning methods used shall not cause damage to fibrous-glass components and
will render the system capable of passing the HVAC System Cleanliness Tests (see
NADCA ACR 2006).
Fibrous materials that become wet shall be discarded and replaced.
Coil Cleaning:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.3
Use continuously operating vacuum-collection devices to keep each section being
cleaned under negative pressure.
Cleaning methods that require mechanical agitation devices to dislodge debris
that is adhered to interior surfaces of HVAC system components shall be equipped
to safely remove these devices. Cleaning methods shall not damage the integrity
of HVAC system components or damage porous surface materials such as duct and
plenum liners.
Measure static-pressure differential across each coil.
See NADCA ACR 2006, "Coil Surface Cleaning" Section. Type 1, or Type 1 and Type 2,
cleaning methods shall be used to render the coil visibly clean and capable of passing
Coil Cleaning Verification (see applicable NADCA ACR 2006).
Coil drain pans shall be subject to NADCA ACR 2006, "Non-Porous Surfaces Cleaning
Verification." Ensure that condensate drain pans are operational.
Electric-resistance coils shall be de-energized, locked out, and tagged before cleaning.
Cleaning methods shall not cause any appreciable damage to, cause displacement of,
inhibit heat transfer, or cause erosion of the coil surface or fins, and shall comply with coil
manufacturer's written recommendations when available.
Rinse thoroughly with clean water to remove any latent residues.
RESTORATION
A.
Restore and repair HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and components according
to NADCA ACR 2006, "Restoration and Repair of Mechanical Systems" Section.
B.
Comply with Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" and Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for duct
materials, accessories, and hardware required for Work of this Section.
C.
Ensure that closures do not hinder or alter airflow.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230130.51 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
HVAC Air
Duct Cleaning
D.
New closure materials, including insulation, shall match opened materials and shall have
removable closure panels fitted with gaskets and fasteners.
E.
Reseal fibrous-glass ducts. Comply with requirements in Section 233116 "Nonmetal Ducts."
END OF SECTION 230130.51
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230130.51 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
HVAC Air
Duct Cleaning
SECTION 230516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Slip-joint packed expansion joints.
Expansion-compensator packless expansion joints.
Metal-bellows packless expansion joints.
Pipe loops and swing connections.
Alignment guides and anchors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and
for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing connections.
Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and
methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.
Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure.
Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end
connections, and location for each expansion joint.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Welding certificates.
B.
Product certificates.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230516 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Expansion Sittings and
Loops for HVAC Piping
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Metal, Expansion-Compensator Packless Expansion Joints:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
2.
3.
Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig unless otherwise indicated.
Configuration for Copper Tubing: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows with copper pipe
ends.
a.
b.
2.2
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint.
End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Threaded.
ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS
A.
Alignment Guides:
1.
B.
Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer
cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding spider for bolting to
pipe.
Anchor Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head.
Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in
hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for
application.
a.
b.
c.
5.
Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.
Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened
portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.
a.
b.
c.
Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy
resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be
installed.
Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud unless
otherwise indicated.
Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230516 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Expansion Sittings and
Loops for HVAC Piping
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION
A.
Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed.
B.
Install packed-type expansion joints with packing suitable for fluid service.
C.
Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint
Manufacturers Association, Inc."
3.2
ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A.
Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.
B.
Install two guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to
expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.
C.
Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure.
D.
Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9
and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
E.
Anchor Attachments:
1.
2.
F.
Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars.
ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1.
2.
G.
Anchor Attachment to Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, Type 24,
U-bolts bolted to anchor.
Comply with
Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding.
Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener
manufacturer's written instructions.
Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.
END OF SECTION 230516
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230516 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Expansion Sittings and
Loops for HVAC Piping
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Balancing Air Systems:
a.
2.
Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:
a.
b.
1.2
Constant-volume air systems.
Constant-flow hydronic systems.
Variable-flow hydronic systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B.
NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C.
TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D.
TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E.
TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB
strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
B.
Certified TAB reports.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC NEBB
1.
2.
TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC NEBB.
TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC/NEBB as a
TAB technician.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230593 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC
B.
Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1.
2.
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
C.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect.
D.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration:
Section 5, "Instrumentation."
E.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
F.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance:
"System Balancing."
As described in ASHRAE 111,
Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 -
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B.
Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C.
Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D.
Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for
environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions
about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E.
Examine ceiling plenums and under floor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify
that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Section 233113 "Metal
Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls
are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
F.
Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1.
Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all
or part of a system.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230593 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC
2.
Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment
performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in
AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare
results with the design data and installed conditions.
G.
Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning,
and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H.
Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I.
Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and
tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J.
Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
K.
Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated
perforations.
L.
Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing
fluid flows.
M.
Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
N.
Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
O.
Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
P.
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and
record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B.
Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.
Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230593 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC
3.3
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" or NEBB's "Procedural
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems and in this Section.
1.
B.
Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1.
2.
After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness
as used to construct ducts.
Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,
coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation,"
Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."
C.
Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position
indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable,
permanent identification material to show final settings.
D.
Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.4
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C.
For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
E.
Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I.
Check for airflow blockages.
J.
Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230593 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC
L.
3.5
Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1.
Measure total airflow.
a.
2.
Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct
restrictions.
Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that
houses the fan.
Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a.
4.
Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements,
measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.
Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heatrecovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual
static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to
accommodate actual conditions.
Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed.
Comply with requirements in Sections for air-handling units for
adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit
performance.
Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fanmotor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling,
full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum
required brake horsepower.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1.
Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
a.
Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230593 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC
2.
3.
C.
Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1.
D.
Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of
indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and
the dampers at air terminals.
1.
2.
3.6
Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract
Documents.
Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end
of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct
variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C.
Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.7
Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
Check liquid level in expansion tank.
Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.
Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal
valves are kept open.
Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as
designed.
B.
Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open
position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230593 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC
C.
Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
D.
Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1.
System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop
relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
E.
Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
percent greater than indicated flow.
F.
Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated
flow.
Record settings and mark balancing devices.
G.
Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.
H.
Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
3.8
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
3.9
Balance systems with automatic two and three-way control valves by setting systems at
maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic
systems.
PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A.
Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
3.10
A.
Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
Motor horsepower rating.
Motor rpm.
Efficiency rating.
Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation.
Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number,
and nameplate data.
PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:
1.
Entering- and leaving-water temperature.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230593 - 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
A.
Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
Airflow.
Air pressure drop.
Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS
Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
Airflow.
Air pressure drop.
Inlet steam pressure.
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.11
Nameplate data.
Airflow.
Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.
Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.
Calculated kilowatt at full load.
Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each steam coil:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Water flow rate.
Water pressure drop.
Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
Airflow.
Air pressure drop.
Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.
Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate
information.
Check the refrigerant charge.
Check the condition of filters.
Check the condition of coils.
Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.
Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.
Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements
taken. Report deficiencies.
Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to
remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished.
Verify the following:
1.
2.
3.
New filters are installed.
Coils are clean and fins combed.
Drain pans are clean.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230593 - 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC
4.
5.
6.
C.
Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected
by the renovation work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.12
A.
Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and
determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.
Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face
velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment
manufacturer.
If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5
percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or
decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.
Balance each air outlet.
TOLERANCES
Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.13
Fans are clean.
Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.
Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent >.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
REPORTING
A.
Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified
in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing
devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper
performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems
and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.
B.
Status Reports: Prepare weekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures
in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in
systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each
building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.14
A.
FINAL REPORT
General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.
1.
2.
B.
Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1.
Fan curves.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230593 - 9
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC
2.
3.
4.
C.
Manufacturers' test data.
Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
product data.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Title page.
Name and address of the TAB contractor.
Project name.
Project location.
Architect's name and address.
Engineer's name and address.
Contractor's name and address.
Report date.
Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
Summary of contents including the following:
a.
b.
c.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
D.
Indicated versus final performance.
Notable characteristics of systems.
Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
Conditions of filters.
Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
Water and steam flow rates.
Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
Terminal units.
Balancing stations.
Position of balancing devices.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230593 - 10
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC
3.15
ADDITIONAL TESTS
A.
Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are
being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B.
Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 230593
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230593 - 11
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC
SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes insulating the following duct services:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.
Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.
Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation."
Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."
Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each
type of insulation.
Detail application of field-applied jackets.
Detail application at linkages of control devices.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and
cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index
of 50 or less.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 150 or less.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230713 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Duct Insulation
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum
Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles
for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according
to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket.
Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.
Johns Manville; Microlite.
Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-127.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
85-60/85-70.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230713 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Duct Insulation
C.
FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket
lap seams and joints.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
2.3
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-82.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
85-50.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MILPRF-19565C, Type II.
1.
B.
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
30-80/30-90.
Vimasco Corporation; 749.
Design Polymetrics; 3045
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
Color: White.
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 550.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company;
46-50.
Design Polymetrics; 3045
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230713 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Duct Insulation
4.
5.
2.4
Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.
Color: White.
SEALANTS
A.
FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.5
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 95-44.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
Design Polymetrics; 3045
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: Aluminum.
For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
C.
Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; Metal Jacketing Systems.
ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.
Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing or Factory cut and rolled to size.
Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft
paper.
Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing
membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a
rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with [white] [stuccoembossed] aluminum-foil facing.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Polyguard Products, Inc.; Alumaguard 60.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230713 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Duct Insulation
2.6
TAPES
A.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 6.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.7
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.
Compac Corporation; 110 and 111.
Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.
Compac Corporation; 120.
Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
Width: 2 inches.
Thickness: 3.7 mils.
Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 5 percent.
Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
SECUREMENTS
A.
Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2
inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
B.
ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.
Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1.
Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in
position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230713 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Duct Insulation
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
d.
2.
Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches
square.
Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter
shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without
damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened
to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely
in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1)
2)
b.
c.
d.
3.
GEMCO; Nylon Hangers.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.
Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation
indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.
Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without
damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is
capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when
self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
d.
4.
AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base Insul-Hangers.
GEMCO; Perforated Base.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.
AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Self-Adhering Insul-Hangers.
GEMCO; Peel & Press.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick.
Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
Spindle: Copper or zinc coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
Insulation-Retaining Washers:
Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch thick,
galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230713 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Duct Insulation
2)
3)
4)
b.
5.
GEMCO; R-150.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.
Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick
nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but
not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
GEMCO.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.
C.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
D.
Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.
1.
Manufacturers:
following:
a.
2.8
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
C & F Wire.
CORNER ANGLES
A.
PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
B.
Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to
ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free
of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
B.
Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each
item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230713 - 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Duct Insulation
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
H.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
I.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
2.
3.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure.
Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material
manufacturer.
J.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
K.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip,
spaced 4 inches o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive
self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a.
4.
5.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
L.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
M.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due
to thermal movement.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230713 - 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Duct Insulation
N.
3.3
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations:
penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Install insulation continuously through roof
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with
joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof
flashing.
Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through wall penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and
seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with
joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2
inches.
Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install
insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
D.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves
to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
1.
E.
Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and
fire-resistive joint sealers.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
2.
Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper
sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct
insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
Comply with requirements in
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230713 - 9
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Duct Insulation
3.4
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A.
Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1.
2.
3.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit
area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,
capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of
vertical ducts as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch
o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vaporbarrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal.
Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the
insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At
end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for
each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230713 - 10
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Duct Insulation
3.5
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A.
Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.6
Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end
joints.
Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-barrier mastic.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
C.
Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and
insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited
to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General"
Article.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 230713
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230713 - 11
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Duct Insulation
SECTION 230800 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes commissioning process requirements for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, and
equipment.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for general commissioning process
requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of
resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.
B.
CxA: Commissioning Authority.
C.
HVAC&R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration.
D.
Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or
separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Certificates of readiness.
B.
Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities.
1.4
ALLOWANCES
A.
1.5
Labor, instrumentation, tools, and equipment costs for technicians for the performance of
commissioning testing are covered by the "Schedule of Allowances" Article in Section 012100
"Allowances."
UNIT PRICES
A.
Commissioning testing allowance may be adjusted up or down by the "List of Unit Prices" Article in
Section 012200 "Unit Prices" when actual man-hours are computed at the end of commissioning
testing.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230800 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Commissioning of
HVAC
1.6
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA.
B.
Attend construction phase controls coordination meeting.
C.
Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meeting.
D.
Participate in HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance
orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.
E.
Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation.
F.
Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data
acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test
period.
1.7
CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for
actual HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be furnished and installed
as part of the construction contract.
B.
Direct commissioning testing.
C.
Verify testing, adjusting, and balancing of Work are complete.
D.
Provide test data, inspection reports, and certificates in Systems Manual.
1.8
COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION
A.
Provide the following information to the CxA for inclusion in the commissioning plan:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Plan for delivery and review of submittals, systems manuals, and other documents and
reports.
Identification of installed systems, assemblies, equipment, and components including
design changes that occurred during the construction phase.
Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's prestart
and startup checklists for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be
verified and tested.
Certificate of readiness, signed by the Contractor, certifying that HVAC&R systems,
assemblies, equipment, components, and associated controls are ready for testing.
Certificate of completion certifying that installation, prestart checks, and startup
procedures have been completed.
Certificate of readiness certifying that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, equipment, and
associated controls are ready for testing.
Test and inspection reports and certificates.
Corrective action documents.
Verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230800 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Commissioning of
HVAC
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TESTING PREPARATION
A.
Certify that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and
started and are operating according to the Contract Documents.
B.
Certify that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated,
that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have
been recorded.
C.
Certify that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been completed and that testing,
adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective
work approved.
D.
Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal
shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power,
and alarm conditions).
E.
Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists.
F.
Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during
each mode of operation.
G.
Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as
directed by the CxA.
3.2
Testing AND BALANCING VERIFICATION
A.
Prior to performance of testing and balancing Work, provide copies of reports, sample forms,
checklists, and certificates to the CxA.
B.
Notify the CxA at least 10 days in advance of testing and balancing Work, and provide access
for the CxA to witness testing and balancing Work.
C.
Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of HVAC&R
systems at the direction of the CxA.
1.
2.
3.
4.
The CxA will notify testing and balancing Subcontractor 5 days in advance of the date of
field verification. Notice will not include data points to be verified.
The testing and balancing Subcontractor shall use the same instruments (by model and
serial number) that were used when original data were collected.
Failure of an item includes, other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent. Failure
of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final testing, adjusting,
and balancing report. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 dB shall result in
rejection of final testing. Variations in background noise must be considered.
Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed portions can be
performed.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230800 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Commissioning of
HVAC
3.3
GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of
the CxA.
B.
Scope of HVAC&R testing shall include entire HVAC&R installation, from central equipment for
heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each conditioned space.
Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions.
C.
Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency
conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors.
D.
The CxA along with the HVAC&R Subcontractor, testing and balancing Subcontractor, and
HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control Subcontractor shall prepare detailed testing plans,
procedures, and checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment.
E.
Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.
F.
Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to
test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide
equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document
simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating
conditions.
G.
The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical.
H.
The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or
simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.
I.
If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC&R system,
document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule
tests.
J.
If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance
tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.
3.4
HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment Testing Procedures
A.
Boiler Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in HVAC boiler
Sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record, and boiler certification to the CxA.
B.
HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Field testing plans and testing requirements
are specified in Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and Section 230993
"Sequence and Operations for HVAC Controls." Assist the CxA with preparation of testing plans.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230800 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Commissioning of
HVAC
C.
Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment requirements are
specified in HVAC piping Sections. HVAC&R Subcontractor shall prepare a pipe system cleaning,
flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Provide cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating plan and
final reports to the CxA. Plan shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested,
identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to Drawings
for each pipe sector, showing the physical location of each designated pipe test section.
Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each section of piping
to be physically located and identified when referred to in pipe system cleaning, flushing,
hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment plan.
Description of equipment for flushing operations.
Minimum flushing water velocity.
Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been cleaned,
flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated.
HVAC&R Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment
to test performance of air, steam, and hydronic distribution systems; special exhaust; and other
distribution systems, including HVAC&R terminal equipment and unitary equipment.
END OF SECTION 230800
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230800 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Commissioning of
HVAC
SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control
components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Section 232113, “Hydronic Piping.”
Section 260519, “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”
Section 260533, “Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.”
DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide (a) direct-digital control system(s) as indicated on the project documents, point list,
interoperability tables, and drawings as described in these specifications. Include a complete
and working direct-digital control system. Include all engineering, programming, controls and
installation materials, installation labor, commissioning and start-up, training, final project
documentation and warranty.
1.
2.
3.
The direct-digital control system(s) shall consist of high-speed, peer-to-peer network of
DDC controllers, a local operator’s terminal, and a Network Server.
The system shall be provided with a Web-Server which shall allow remote user using a
standard web browser to access the control system graphics and change adjustable
setpoints with the proper password.
All new workstations, controller, devices and components shall communicate exclusively
using the ASHRAE Standard 135 BACnet communications protocol. Contractor shall
provide necessary BACnet gateway to communicate between Pima College workstation
and site proprietary equipment.
a.
b.
4.
If used, Gateways shall support the ASHRAE Standard 135 BACnet communications
protocol.
If used, gateways shall provide all object properties and read/write services shown
on Pima College-approved interoperability schedules.
The work administered by this Section of the technical specifications shall include all labor,
materials, special tools, equipment, enclosures, power supplies, software, software licenses,
Project specific software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring, tubing,
installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, submittals, testing,
verification, training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping, handling,
administration, supervision, management, insurance, Warranty, specified services and
items required for complete and fully functional Controls Systems.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
5.
1.3
The control systems shall be designed such that each mechanical system shall operate
under stand-alone mode. The contractor administered by this Section of the technical
specifications shall provide controllers for each mechanical system. In the event of a
network communication failure, or the loss of any other controller, the control system shall
continue to operate independently. Failure of the Network Server or Operator Terminal
shall have no effect on the field controllers, including those involved with global strategies.
PRODUCTS NOT FURNISHED OR INSTALLED BUT INTEGRATED WITH THE WORK OF THIS SECTION
A.
General:
1.
B.
Section 262923 “Variable-Frequency Motor controllers”:
1.
C.
Variable Frequency D\drives: The variable frequency drive (VFD) vendor shall furnish VFDs
with an interface to the all control and monitoring points. These specified points shall be
the minimum acceptable interface to the VFD. The connection to these points shall be by
one of the following methods: (a) Hardwired connection such as relay, 0-10VDC, or 420mA. (b) BACnet/IP network connection. (c) BACnet over ARCNET network connection.
(d) BACnet MS/TP network connection. (e).
Communications with Third Party Equipment:
1.
1.4
Equipment Coordination: The contractor furnishing the DDC network shall coordinate with
the vendors furnishing each of the following products to coordinate details of the interface
between these products and the DDC network. Each vendor shall provide details of the
proposed interface including PICS for BACnet equipment, hardware and software
identifiers for the interface points, network identifiers, wiring requirements, communication
speeds, and required network accessories. The purpose of this coordination shall be to
insure there are no unresolved issues regarding the integration of these products into the
DDC network. Submittals for these products shall not be approved prior to the completion
of this coordination.
Any additional integral control systems included with the products integrated with the
work of this section shall be furnished with a BACnet interface for integration into the Direct
Digital Control System described in this section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Submittal Requirements: Meet requirements of Section 013300 on Shop Drawings,
Product Data, and Samples. Provide six copies of shop drawings and other submittals on
hardware, software, and equipment to be installed or furnished. Begin no work until submittals
have been approved for conformity with design intent. Provide drawings as AutoCAD. When
manufacturer's cutsheets apply to a product series rather than a specific product, clearly
indicate applicable data by highlighting or by other means. Clearly reference covered
specification and drawing on each submittal. General catalogs shall not be accepted as
cutsheets to fulfill submittal requirements. Select and show submittal quantities appropriate to
scope of work. Submittal approval does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to supply sufficient
quantities to complete work.
1.
Direct Digital Control System Hardware:
a.
Complete bill of materials indicating quantity, manufacturer, model number, and
relevant technical data of equipment to be used.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
b.
Manufacturer's description and technical data such as performance curves,
product specifications, and installation and maintenance instructions for items listed
below and for relevant items not listed below:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
2.
Central System Hardware and Software:
a.
Recommendations for minimum requirements for the following items:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
3.
Direct digital controllers (controller panels).
Transducers and transmitters.
Sensors (include accuracy data).
Actuators.
Valves.
Relays and switches.
Control panels.
Power supplies.
Batteries.
Operator interface equipment.
Updated wiring diagrams and layouts for each control panel with revisions
required to the initial design drawings.
Floor plan indicating field sensor and controller locations.
Updated riser diagrams showing control network layout, communication
protocol, and wire types.
Central Processing Unit (CPU) or web server.
Interface equipment between CPU or server and control panels.
Operating System software.
Operator interface software.
Color graphic software.
Third-party software.
Schematic diagrams of control, communication, and power wiring for central
system installation. Show interface wiring to control system.
Updated network riser diagrams of wiring between central control unit and
control panels.
Provide detailed wiring diagrams for all field devices and equipment (i.e.: VFD,
Chiller, Boiler), show all required interface relays, terminals, and power
supplies.
Controlled Systems:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Updated riser diagrams showing control network layout, communication protocol,
and wire types.
Updated schematic diagram of each controlled system updated from the initial
design documents. Label control points with point names per specifications in
accordance with initial design drawings graphically show locations of control
elements.
Updated point to point wiring diagram of each controlled system. Label control
elements and terminals, and wire and cable cross-referencing per the specifications
and initial design documents. When a control element is also shown on control
system schematic, use the same name.
Instrumentation list (Bill of Materials) for each controlled system. List each control
system element in a table. Show element description and tag number from the initial
design points list, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data
sheet number.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
e.
f.
4.
Software:
a.
b.
B.
Complete description of control system operation including sequences of operation.
Include and reference schematic diagram of controlled system. Provide complete
points list in the same format with the information provided on the initial design
points list. At a minimum list I/O points and software points specified in contract
documents. Indicate alarmed and trended points.
Description of process, report formats, and checklists to be used in Section 230800
Article “Commissioning of HVAC.”
System Graphics: Workstation graphics shall be submitted for review and comment
prior to installation on site workstations. System Graphics shall include (Chilled, Hot,
Condenser Water, Air Handlers), individual equipment graphics (VAV, Fan coil) and
floor plans. Graphics shall be submitted within 30 days of approved Control
Submittals.
Programming Logic: Provide programming logic for each system and type of
equipment prior to installation in project controllers. Submittal shall include logic
diagrams and/or text files. Each logic file shall include an English language
description of each sequence. Deviations from the contract document sequence
of operation shall be noted. Logic sequences shall be submitted within 30 days of
approved Control Submittals.
Project Record Documents: Submit three copies of record (as-built) documents upon completion
of installation for approval prior to final completion. Submittal shall consist of:
1.
2.
3.
Project Record Drawings: As-built versions of submittal shop drawings provided in AutoCAD
2006.
Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists: Completed versions of reports,
checklists, and trend logs used to meet requirements of 230800 Article “Commissioning of
HVAC.”
Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual: Printed, electronic, or online help
documentation of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
As-built versions of submittal product data.
Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of installing contractors and service
representatives for equipment and control systems.
Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems: logging on and
off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer
control, and changing setpoints and variables.
Programming manual or set of manuals with description of programming language
and syntax, of statements for algorithms and calculations used, of point database
creation and modification, of program creation and modification, and of editor use.
Engineering, installation, and maintenance manual or set of manuals that explains
how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; how to perform
preventive maintenance and calibration; how to debug hardware problems; and
how to repair or replace hardware.
Documentation of programs created using custom programming language
including setpoints, tuning parameters, and object database. Electronic copies of
programs shall meet this requirement if control logic, setpoints, tuning parameters,
and objects can be viewed using furnished programming tools.
Graphic files, programs, and database on magnetic or optical media.
List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers.
Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information
for furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment and sensors.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
j.
k.
l.
4.
1.5
Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating systems,
custom programming language, operator workstation or web server software, and
graphics software.
Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents for equipment and systems.
Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components,
including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time
between tasks; and task descriptions.
Training Materials: Provide course outline and materials for each class at least six weeks
before first class. Training shall be furnished via instructor-led sessions onsite or location
designated by Pima College. Pima College will modify course outlines and materials if
necessary to meet the County's needs. Pima College will review and approve course
outlines and materials at least three weeks before first class.
WARRANTY
A.
Warrant work as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
Warrant labor and materials for specified control system free from defects for a period of
24 months after final acceptance. Control system failures during warranty period shall be
adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to Pima
College. Respond within 24 hours of the warranty service request.
Work shall have a warranty date after final acceptance, even if Pima College receives
beneficial use due to early system start-up.
If the County determines that equipment and systems operate satisfactorily at the end of
final start-up, testing, and commissioning phase, Pima College will certify in writing that
control system operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms of
this specification. Date of acceptance shall begin warranty period.
Provide updates to operator workstation or web server software, project-specific software,
graphic software, database software, and firmware that resolve Contractor-identified
software deficiencies at no charge during warranty period. If available, Pima College can
purchase in-warranty service agreement to receive upgrades for functional
enhancements associated with above-mentioned items. Do not install updates or
upgrades without Pima College’s written authorization.
Exception: Contractor shall not be required to warrant reused devices except those that
have been rebuilt or repaired. Installation labor and materials shall be warranted.
Demonstrate operable condition of reused devices at time of Engineer's acceptance.
OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL
A.
Project-specific software and documentation shall become Pima College's property. This
includes, but is not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Graphics.
Record drawings.
Database.
Application programming code.
Documentation.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Criteria:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The Controls and Instrumentation System Contractor shall be a primary equipment
manufacturer’s representative that is regularly engaged in the engineering, programming,
installation and service of total integrated Facility Management Systems of similar size,
scope and complexity to the system specified in this Contract. Distributors and wholesalers
will not be acceptable.
Single Source Responsibility of Subcontractor: The controls subcontractor shall be
responsible for the complete design, installation, and commissioning of the system. The
controls subcontractor shall be in the business of design, installation and service of such
building automation control systems similar in size and complexity.
Equipment and Materials: Equipment and materials shall be cataloged products of
manufacturers regularly engaged in production and installation of HVAC control systems.
Products shall be manufacturer’s latest standard design and have been tested and
proven in actual use.
The controls subcontractor shall have (minimum of three years) experience in design and
installation of building automation systems similar in performance to those specified in this
Section. Provide evidence of experience by submitting resumes of the project manager,
the local branch manager, project engineer, the application engineering staff, and the
electronic technicians who would be involved with the supervision, the engineering, and
the installation of the control systems. Training and experience of these personnel shall not
be less than three years. Failure to disclose this information will be a ground for
disqualification of the supplier.
Provide a competent and experienced Project Manager employed by the Controls
Contractor. The Project Manager shall be supported as necessary by other Contractor
employees in order to provide professional engineering, technical and management
service for the work. The Project Manager shall attend scheduled Project Meetings as
required and shall be empowered to make technical, scheduling and related decisions on
behalf of the Controls Contractor.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Codes and Standards:
1.
1.8
All work shall conform to the applicable Codes and Standards.
PERFORMANCE
A.
The system shall conform to the following:
1.
2.
Graphic Display: The system shall display up to four (4) graphics on a single screen with a
minimum of twenty (20) dynamic points per graphic. All current data shall be displayed
within ten (10) seconds of the request.
Graphic Refresh: The system shall update all dynamic points with current data within eight
(8) seconds. Data refresh shall be automatic, without operator intervention.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Object Command: The maximum time between the command of a binary object by the
operator and the reaction by the device shall be two (2) seconds. Analog objects shall
start to adjust within two (2) seconds.
Object Scan: All changes of state and change of analog values shall be transmitted over
the high-speed network such that any data used or displayed at a controller or workstation will be current, within the prior six (6) seconds.
Alarm Response Time: The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it
is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed (10) seconds.
Program Execution Frequency: Custom and standard applications shall be capable of
running as often as once every (5) seconds. The Contractor shall be responsible for
selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.
Multiple Alarm Annunciations: All workstations on the network shall receive alarms within
five (5) seconds of each other.
Performance: Programmable Controllers shall be able to execute DDC PID control loops at
a selectable frequency from at least once every one (1) second. The controller shall scan
and update the process value and output generated by this calculation at this same
frequency.
Reporting Accuracy: System shall report values with minimum end-to-end accuracy listed
in Table 1.
Control Stability and Accuracy: Control loops shall maintain measured variable at setpoint
within tolerances listed in Table 2.
Table 1
Reporting Accuracy
Measured Variable
Space Temperature
Ducted Air
Outside Air
Dew Point
Water Temperature
Delta-T
Relative Humidity
Water Flow
Air Pressure (ducts)
Air Pressure (space)
Water Pressure
Electrical (A, V, W, Power Factor)
Reported Accuracy
±0.5ºC (±1ºF)
±0.5ºC (±1ºF)
±1.0ºC (±2ºF)
±1.5ºC (±3ºF)
±0.5ºC (±1ºF)
±0.15ºC (±0.25ºF)
±5% RH
±2% of full scale
±25 Pa (±0.1 in. w.g.)
±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)
±2% of full scale (see Note 2)
±1% of reading (see Note 3)
Note 1: Accuracy applies to 10%-100% of scale.
Note 2: For both absolute and differential pressure.
Note 3: Not including utility supplied meters.
Table 2
Control Stability and Accuracy
Controlled Variable
Control Accuracy
Airflow
±10% of full scale
Space Temperature
±1.0ºC (±2.0ºF)
Duct Temperature
±1.5ºC (±3ºF)
Humidity
±5% RH
±10 kPa (±1.5 psi)
Fluid Pressure
±250 Pa (±1.0 in. w.g.)
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Range of Medium
MPa (1-150 psi)
0-12.5 kPa (0-50 in. w.g.) differential
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Alerton Inc.
a.
2.2
Use new products that the manufacturer is currently manufacturing and that have
been installed in a minimum of 25 installations. Spare parts shall be available for at
least five years after completion of this contract.
CONTROLS SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
A.
General: Controls Systems shall consist of multiple Nodes and associated equipment connected
by industry standard digital and communication network arrangements.
1.
The networks shall, at minimum, comprise, as necessary, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Network Server, Local Operator Terminals.
Network
computer
processing,
data
storage
and
BACnet-compliant
communication equipment including Servers and digital data processors.
BACnet-compliant routers, bridges, switches, hubs, modems, gateways, interfaces
and similar communication equipment.
Active processing building controllers connected to other controllers together with
their power supplies and associated equipment.
Addressable elements, sensors, transducers and end devices.
B.
Third-party equipment interfaces and gateways as described and required by the Contract
Documents.
C.
Other components required for a complete and working Control Systems as specified.
D.
The Specifications for the individual elements and component subsystems shall be minimum
requirements and shall be augmented as necessary by the Contractor to achieve both
compliance with all applicable codes, standards and to meet all requirements of the Contract
Documents.
E.
Network Architecture:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The Controls communication network shall utilize Ethernet/IP operating over a standard
Ethernet LAN and operate at a minimum speed of 100 Mb/sec.
The networks shall utilize only copper and optical fiber communication media as
appropriate and shall comply with applicable codes, ordinances and regulations.
All necessary telephone lines, ISDN lines and internet Service Provider services and
connections will be provided by the Pima College.
The Controls Contractor shall provide all IT interfacing equipment and cabling and
coordinate on configuration and interfacing arrangements Pima College.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
F.
Third Party Interfaces:
1.
The contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications shall include
necessary hardware, equipment, software and programming to allow data
communications between the controls systems and equipment (i.e.: chillers,vfds) supplied
by other trades.
G.
Other manufacturers and contractors supplying other associated systems and equipment shall
provide their necessary hardware, software and start-up at their cost and shall cooperate fully
with the contractor administered by this Section of the technical specifications in a timely
manner and at their cost to ensure complete functional integration.
H.
Servers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Data storage server(s) to archive historical data including trends, alarm and event histories
and transaction logs.
The controls contractor shall provide these server(s) with the same software tool set that is
located in the BACnet building controllers for system configuration and custom logic
definition and color graphic configuration.
Access to all information on the data storage server(s) shall be through the same browser
functionality used to access individual nodes. When logged onto a server the operator will
be able to also interact with any other controller on the control system as required for the
functional operation of the controls systems.
These server(s) shall be utilized for controls systems application configuration, for archiving,
reporting and trending of data, for operator transaction archiving and reporting, for
network information management, for alarm annunciation, for operator interface tasks, for
controls application management and similar. These server(s) shall utilize IT industry
standard data base platforms such as Microsoft SQL Server and Microsoft Data Engine
(MSDE) or approved equal.
COMMUNICATION
A.
Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers shall
comprise an Ethernet internetwork. Data link / physical layers (for communication) acceptable
to the Pima College include high-speed networks such as Ethernet (ISO 8802-3).
B.
RS-485 data link / physical layers are acceptable to the Pima College in any new network.
C.
Each controller shall have a communication port for connection to an operator interface.
D.
Internetwork operator interface and value passing shall be transparent to internetwork
architecture.
1.
2.
An operator interface connected to a controller shall allow the operator to interface with
each internetwork controller as if directly connected. Controller information such as data,
status, reports, system software, and custom programs shall be viewable and editable from
each internetwork controller.
Inputs, outputs, and control variables used to integrate control strategies across multiple
controllers shall be readable by each controller on the internetwork. Program and test all
cross-controller links required to execute specified control system operation. An authorized
operator shall be able to edit cross-controller links by typing a standard object address.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 9
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
E.
System shall be expandable to at least twice the required input and output objects with
additional controllers, associated devices, and wiring. Expansion shall not require operator
interface hardware additions or software revisions.
F.
Operator Workstations and Controllers with real-time clocks shall use the BACnet Time
Synchronization service. The system shall automatically synchronize system clocks daily from an
operator-designated device via the internetwork. The system shall automatically adjust for
daylight savings and standard time as applicable.
2.4
LOCAL OPERATOR WORKSTATION
A.
The operator workstation (OWS) shall reside on a high-speed network with controllers as shown
on system drawings. The OWS and each standard browser connected to server shall be able to
access all system information.
B.
OWS and controllers shall communicate using BACnet protocol. OWS and control network
backbone shall communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and
BACnet/IP addressing as specified in ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2001, BACnet Annex J.
C.
Hardware: OWS shall conform to the BACnet Advanced Workstation (B-AWS) Profile and shall be
BTL-Listed as a B-AWS device.
D.
OWS Software:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Provide for automatic system database save and restore on the OWS’s hard disk a copy of
the current database of each controller. This database shall be updated whenever a
change is made in any system panel. In the event of a database loss in a building
management panel, the OWS shall automatically restore the database for that panel. This
capability may be disabled by the operator.
Provide for manual database save and restore. An operator with proper clearance shall
be able to save the database from any system panel. The operator also shall be able to
clear a panel database and manually initiate a download of a specified database to any
panel in the system.
Provide a method of configuring the system. This shall allow for future system changes or
additions by users with proper clearance.
Operating System: Furnish a concurrent multi-tasking operating system. The operating
system also shall support the use of other common software applications. Acceptable
operating systems are windows XP, windows system 7.
System Graphics: The operator workstation software shall be graphically oriented. The
system shall allow display of up to 10 graphic screens at once for comparison and
monitoring of system status. Provide a method for the operator to easily move between
graphic displays and change the size and location of graphic displays on the screen. The
system graphics shall be able to be modified while on-line. An operator with the proper
password level shall be able to add, delete, or change dynamic objects on a graphic.
Dynamic objects shall include analog and binary values, dynamic text, static text, and
animation files. Graphics shall have the ability to show animation by shifting image files
based on the status of the object.
Custom Graphics: Custom graphic files shall be created with the use of a graphics
generation package furnished with the system. The graphics generation package shall be
a graphically based system that uses the mouse to create and modify graphics that are
saved in industry standard formats such as PCX, tiff, and gem. The graphics generation
package also shall provide the capability of capturing or converting graphics from other
programs such as designer or AutoCAD.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 10
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Graphics Library: Furnish a complete library of standard HVAC equipment graphics such as
chillers, boilers, air handlers, terminals, fan coils, and unit ventilators. This library also shall
include standard symbols for other equipment including fans, pumps, coils, valves, piping,
dampers, and ductwork. The library shall be furnished in a file format compatible with the
graphics generation package program.
The controls systems operator interfaces shall be user friendly, readily understood and shall
make maximum use of colors, graphics, icons, embedded images, animation, text based
information and data visualization techniques to enhance and simplify the use and
understanding of the displays by authorized users at the OWS. The operating system shall
be windows xp or better, and shall support the third party software.
Provide graphical user software, which shall minimize the use of keyboard through the use
of the mouse and "point and click" approach to menu selection.
The software shall provide a multi-tasking type environment that will allow the user to run
several applications simultaneously. The mouse or alt-tab keys shall be used to quickly
select and switch between multiple applications. The operator shall be able automatically
export data to and work in microsoft word, excel, and other windows based software
programs, while concurrently on-line system alarms and monitoring information.
On-Line Help: Provide a context-sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in
operating and editing the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and
shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall
be available through the use of hypertext.
User access shall be protected by a flexible and owner re-definable software-based
password access protection. Password protection shall be multi-level and partition able to
accommodate the varied access requirements of the different user groups to which
individual users may be assigned. Provide the means to define unique access privileges for
each individual authorized user. Provide the means to on-line manage password access
control under the control of a project specific master password. Provide an audit trail of all
user activity on the controls systems including all actions and changes.
The system shall be completely field-programmable from the common operator’s
keyboard thus allowing hard disk storage of all data automatically. All programs shall be
able to be downloaded from the hard disk. The software shall provide the following
functionality as a minimum:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
14.
Point database editing, storage and downloading of controller databases.
Scheduling and override of building environmental control systems.
Collection and analysis of historical data.
Alarm reporting, routing, messaging, and acknowledgement.
Definition and construction of dynamic color graphic displays.
Real-time graphical viewing and control of environment.
Scheduling trend reports.
Program editing.
Operating activity log and system security.
Transfer data to third party software.
Provide functionality such that using the least amount of steps to initiate the desired event
may perform any of the following simultaneously:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Dynamic color graphics and graphic control.
Alarm management.
Event scheduling.
Dynamic trend definition and presentation.
Program and database editing.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 11
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
f.
15.
Graphic Displays:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
16.
Each operator shall be required to log on to the system with a user name and
password to view, edit or delete the data. System security shall be selectable for
each operator, and the password shall be able to restrict the operator’s access for
viewing and changing the system programs. Each operator shall automatically be
logged off the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected for a selected
time.
The workstation shall allow the operator to access all system schematics and floor
plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, or text based
commands. Graphic software shall permit the importing of AutoCAD or scanned
pictures in the industry standard format (such as PCX, BMP, GIF, and JPEG) for use in
the system.
Graphic displays shall utilize 3D style graphic generation software package. System
graphics shall be schematically accurate and match controlled system equipment
and locations.
Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow rates, and status indication shall
be shown in their locations and shall automatically update to represent current
conditions without operator intervention and without pre-defined screen refresh
values. Reference project Point List for minimum point mapping requirements.
Color shall be used to indicate status and change in status of the equipment. The
state colors shall be user definable.
A clipart library of HVAC equipment, such as chillers, boilers, air handling units, fans,
terminal units, pumps, coils, standard ductwork, piping, valves and laboratory
symbols shall be provided in the system. The operator shall have the ability to add
custom symbols to the clipart library.
A dynamic display of the site-specific architecture showing status of the controllers,
PC workstations and network shall be provided.
The windowing environment of the workstation shall allow the user to simultaneously
view several applications at a time to analyze total building operation or to allow
the display of graphic associated with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting
work in progress. The graphic system software shall also have the capability to split
screen, half portion of the screen with graphical representation and the other half
with sequence of operation of the same HVAC system.
Trend reports shall be generated on demand or pre-defined schedule and directed to
monitor display, printers or disk. As a minimum, the system shall allow the operator to easily
obtain the following types of reports:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
A general list of all selected points in the network.
List of all points in the alarm.
List of all points in the override status.
List of all disabled points.
List of all points currently locked out.
List of user accounts and password access levels.
List of weekly schedules.
List of holiday programming.
List of limits and dead bands.
Custom reports.
System diagnostic reports, including, list of digital controllers on the network.
List of programs.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 12
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
17.
Electrical, Gas, and Weather Reports:
a.
b.
c.
d.
18.
Electrical Meter Report: Provide a monthly report showing the daily electrical
consumption and peak electrical demand with time and date stamp for each
building meter.
Provide an annual (12-month) summary report showing the monthly electrical
consumption and peak demand with time and date stamp for each meter.
Gas Meter Report: Provide a monthly report showing the daily natural gas
consumption for each meter. Provide an annual (12-month) report that shows the
monthly consumption for each meter.
Weather Data Report: Provide a monthly report showing the daily minimum,
maximum, and average outdoor air temperature, as well as the number of heating
and cooling degree-days for each day. Provide an annual (12-month) report
showing the minimum, maximum, and average outdoor air temperature for the
month, as well as the number of heating and cooling degree-days for the month.
Scheduling and Override:
a.
Provide a calendar type format for time-of-day scheduling and overrides of building
control systems. Schedules reside in the PC workstation, digital controllers shall ensure
equipment time scheduling when PC is off-line. PC shall not be required to execute
time scheduling. Provide override access through menu selection or function key.
Provide the following spreadsheet graphics as a minimum:
1)
2)
3)
4)
19.
Weekly schedules.
Zone schedules, minimum of 100 zones.
Scheduling up to 365 days in advance.
Scheduled reports to print at workstation.
Collection and Analysis of Historical Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Provide trending capabilities that will allow the operator to monitor and store
records of system activity over an extended period of time. Points may be trended
automatically on time based intervals or change of value, both of which shall be
user definable. The trend interval could be five (5) minutes to 120 hours. Trend data
may be stored on hard disk for future diagnostic and reporting. Additionally trend
data may be archived to network drives or removable disk media for off-site
retrieval.
Reports may be customized to include individual points or predefined groups of at
least six points. Provide additional functionality to allow pre-defined groups of up to
250 trended points to be easily accessible by other industry standard word
processing and spreadsheet packages. The reports shall be time and date stamped
and shall contain a report title and the name of the facility.
System shall have the set up to generate spreadsheet reports to track energy usage
and cost based on weekly or monthly interval, equipment run times, equipment
efficiency, and/or building environmental conditions.
Provide additional functionality that will allow the operator to view real time trend
data on trend graph displays. A minimum of 20 points may be graphed regardless of
whether they have been predefined for trending. In addition, the user may pause
the graph and take snapshots of the screens to be stored on the workstation disk for
future reference and trend analysis. Exact point values may be viewed and the
graph may be printed. Operator shall be able to command points directly on the
trend plot by double clicking on the point.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 13
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
20.
Alarm Processing: System input and status objects shall be configurable to alarm on
departing from and on returning to normal state. Operator shall be able to enable or
disable each alarm and to configure alarm limits, alarm limit differentials, alarm states, and
alarm reactions for each system object. Configure and enable alarm points as specified in
Sequence of Operations.
a.
b.
c.
Alarm Messages: Alarm messages shall use an English language descriptor without
acronyms or mnemonics to describe alarm source, location, and nature.
Alarm Reactions: Operator shall be able to configure (by object) actions workstation
or web server shall initiate on receipt of each alarm. As a minimum, workstation or
web server shall be able to log, print, start programs, display messages, send e-mail,
send page, and audibly annunciate.
Alarm Maintenance: Operators shall be able to view system alarms and changes of
state chronologically, to acknowledge and delete alarms, and to archive closed
alarms to the workstation or web server hard disk from each workstation or web
browser interface.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
21.
22.
Remote Communications: The system shall have the ability to dial out in the event of an
alarm. Receivers shall include operator workstations, e-mail addresses, and alpha-numeric
pagers. The alarm message shall include the name of the calling location, the device that
generated the alarm, and the alarm message itself.
System Configuration:
a.
b.
2.5
Alarm routing shall allow the operator to send alarm notification to selected
printers or operator workstation based on time of day, alarm severity, or point
type.
Alarm display shall list the alarms with highest priority at the top of the display.
The alarm display shall provide selector buttons for display of the associated
point graphic.
Alarm messages shall use an English language descriptor without acronyms or
mnemonics to describe alarm source, location, and nature. The operator
shall be able to sort out the alarms.
Alarm messages shall be customized for each point to display detailed
instructions to the operator regarding actions to take in the event of an alarm.
An operator with proper security level access may acknowledge and clear
the alarm. All that have not been cleared shall be archived at workstation
disk.
Network control strategies shall not be restricted to a single digital controller, but
shall be able to include data from all other network devices to allow the
development of global control strategies.
Provide automatic backup and restore of all digital controller databases on the
workstation hard disk. In addition to all backup data, all databases shall be
performed while the workstation is on-line without disturbing other system operations.
NETWORK AND DEVICE NAMING CONVENTION
A.
Network Numbers shall be as indicated below or as otherwise approved by the Pima College.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 14
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
B.
Network numbers shall be based on a "facility code, network" concept. The "facility code" is the
Pima College’s assigned numeric value assigned to a specific facility or building. The "network"
typically corresponds to a "floor" or other logical configuration within the building.
C.
The network numbers are thus formed as follows: "Net #" = "FFFNN" where:
1.
2.
D.
FFF= Facility code (see below).
NN= 00-99 This allows up to 100 networks per facility or building.
Device Instances:
1.
Using unique device instances are formed as follows: "Dev #" = "FFFNNDD" where:
a.
b.
2.
E.
Note: Special cases, where the network architecture of limiting device numbering to DD
causes excessive subnet works. The device number can be expanded to DDD and the
network number N can become a single digit. In NO case shall the network number N and
the device number D exceed 4 digits.
Device Names:
1.
2.6
FFF and N are as above and
DD
= 00-99, this allows up to 100 devices per network.
Provide device description and tag number as indicated on the contract drawings.
Coordinate all naming conventions with Pima College prior to software generation.
CONTROLLERS
A.
General: Provide an adequate number of building controllers and an adequate number of
advanced application controllers to achieve the performance specified in the part 1 article on
“system performance.” Each of these controllers shall meet the following requirements.
1.
The controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and
programming requirements.
a.
b.
Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or
upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.
Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions
include the following:
1)
2)
3)
c.
d.
Global communications.
Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.
Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator
workstation.
Each Local control Unit shall be provided with local MMI (Man-Machine Interface.
System Operator shall have the ability to adjust, override and view all system points
associated with each system.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 15
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
2.
I/O Interface: hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers.
Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Power Supplies: transformers with class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection;
limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. Dc power supply shall match
output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:
a.
b.
c.
4.
6.
7.
8.
Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V.
Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds.
Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB.
Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 db at 40 to 100 Hz. The building
controller shall share data with the OWS and the other networked building controllers. The
advanced application controller shall share data with its building controller and the other
networked advanced application controllers.
The operating system of the controller shall manage the input and output communication
signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow
for central monitoring and alarms.
Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real-time clock.
The controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an
abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall:
a.
b.
9.
Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.
Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50
percent load changes.
Built-in overvoltage and over current protection and be able to withstand 150
percent overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.
Power Line Filtering: internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for
workstations or controllers with the following:
a.
b.
c.
5.
Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power.
Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second.
Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA),
or resistance signals.
Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally
open or normally closed operation with three-position (on-off-auto) override
switches and status lights.
Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or
current (4 to 20 mA) with status lights, two-position (auto-manual) switch, and
manually adjustable potentiometer.
Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point,
floating-type electronic actuators.
Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.
Assume a predetermined failure mode, and
Generate an alarm notification.
The controller shall communicate with other devices on the internetwork using the read
(execute and initiate) and write (execute and initiate) property services.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 16
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
10.
Communication:
a.
b.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Each controller shall reside on a network using the ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data
Link/Physical layer protocol. Each building controller also shall perform routing if
connected to a network of custom application and application specific controllers.
RS-485 data link / physical layers are acceptable to the Pima College in any new
network.
The controller shall provide a service communication port for connection to a portable
operator’s terminal.
Keypad. A local keypad and display shall be provided for each controller. The keypad
shall be provided for interrogating and editing data. Provide a system security password
shall be available to prevent unauthorized use of the keypad and display.
Serviceability: Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring
connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination
card connected by a ribbon cable.
Memory: The controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event
of a power loss for at least 72 hours.
B.
The controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall
perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage. Controller operation shall be
protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).
C.
Provide advanced application controllers for each piece of equipment for which they are
constructed. Advanced Application specific controllers shall communicate with other devices
on the internetwork using the Read (Execute) Property service.
1.
2.
Each ASC shall be capable of stand-alone operation and shall continue to provide control
functions without being connected to the network.
Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control the target system.
a.
Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or
upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.
1)
Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status.
Functions include the following:
a)
b)
c)
b.
c.
3.
Global communications.
Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.
Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator
workstation.
Each Local control Unit shall be provided with local MMI (Man-Machine Interface.
System Operator shall have the ability to adjust, override and view all system points
associated with each system.
I/O Interface: hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers.
Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.
a.
b.
c.
Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power.
Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second.
Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA),
or resistance signals.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 17
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
d.
e.
f.
g.
4.
Power Supplies: transformers with class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection;
limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. Dc power supply shall match
output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:
a.
b.
c.
5.
Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.
Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50
percent load changes.
Built-in overvoltage and over current protection and be able to withstand 150
percent overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.
Power Line Filtering: internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for
workstations or controllers with the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally
open or normally closed operation with three-position (on-off-auto) override
switches and status lights.
Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or
current (4 to 20 mA) with status lights, two-position (auto-manual) switch, and
manually adjustable potentiometer.
Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point,
floating-type electronic actuators.
Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.
Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V.
Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds.
Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB.
Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.
Communication:
1.
2.
Each controller shall reside on and communicate via a RS-485 data link/physical layer
protocol.
Each controller shall have a connection for a laptop computer or a portable operator’s
tool. This connection shall be extended to a space temperature sensor port where shown.
E.
Keypad: A local keypad and display shall be provided for each controller. The keypad shall be
provided for interrogating and editing data. Provide a system security password shall be
available to prevent unauthorized use of the keypad and display.
F.
Serviceability: Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor. All wiring
connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card
connected by a ribbon cable.
G.
Memory: The application specific controller shall use nonvolatile memory and maintain all BIOS
and programming information in the event of a power loss.
H.
Immunity to Power and Noise: Controllers shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal
voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80%. Operation shall be protected
against electrical noise of 5-120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).
I.
Transformer: Power supply for the ASC must be rated at a minimum of 125% of ASC power
consumption and shall be of the fused or current limiting type.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 18
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
J.
Direct Digital Controller Software:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The software programs specified in this section shall be commercially available,
concurrent, multi-tasking operating system and support the use of software application
that operates under DOS or Microsoft Windows.
All points shall be identified by up to 30-character point name and 16-character point
descriptor. The same names shall be used at the OWS.
All control functions shall execute within the stand-alone control units via ddc algorithms.
Pima College shall be able to customize control strategies and sequences of operations
defining the appropriate control loop algorithms and choosing the optimum loop
parameters.
All controllers shall be capable of being programmed to utilize stored default values for
assured fail-safe operation of critical processes. Default values shall be invoked upon
sensor failure or, if the primary value is normally provided by the central or another cu, or
by loss of bus communication. Individual application software packages shall be
structured to assume a fail-safe condition upon loss of input sensors. Loss of an input sensor
shall result in output of a sensor-failed message at the OWS. Each ACU and RCU shall have
capability for local readouts of all functions. The UCUS shall be read remotely.
All DDC control loops shall be able to utilize any of the following control modes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
7.
Two position (on-off, slow-fast) control.
Proportional control.
Proportional plus integral (PI) control.
Proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID) control. All PID programs shall
automatically invoke integral wind up prevention routines whenever the controlled
unit is off, under manual control of an automation system or time initiated program.
Automatic tuning of control loops.
System Security: Operator access shall be secured using individual password and
operator’s name. Passwords shall restrict the operator to the level of object, applications,
and system functions assigned to him. A minimum of six (6) levels of security for operator
access shall be provided.
Application Software: The controllers shall provide the following programs as a minimum for
the purpose of optimizing energy consumption while maintaining comfortable
environment for occupants. All application software shall reside and run in the system
digital controllers. Editing of the application shall occur at the OWS or via a portable
operator’s terminal, when it is necessary, to access directly the programmable unit.
a.
b.
Power Demand Limiting (PDL): Power demand limiting program shall monitor the
building power consumption and limit the consumption of electricity to prevent
peak demand charges. PDL shall continuously track the electricity consumption
from a pulse input generated at the kilowatt-hour/demand electric meter. PDL shall
sample the meter data to continuously forecast the electric demand likely to be
used during successive time intervals. If the forecast demand indicates that
electricity usage will likely to exceed a user preset maximum allowable level, then
PDL shall automatically shed electrical loads. Once the demand load has met, loads
that have been shed shall be restored and returned to normal mode. Control system
shall be capable of demand limiting by resetting the HVAC system set points to
reduce load while maintaining indoor air quality.
Economizer: an economizer program shall be provided for VAV systems. This
program shall control the position of air handler relief, return, and outdoors dampers.
If the outdoor air dry bulb temperature and humidity fall below changeover set
point the energy control center will modulate the dampers to provide 100 percent
outdoor air. The operator shall be able to override the economizer cycle and return
to minimum outdoor air operation at any time.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 19
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
c.
d.
e.
Night Setback/Morning Warm up Control: The system shall provide the ability to
automatically adjust set points for this mode of operation.
Optimum Start/Stop (OSS): optimum start/stop program shall automatically be
coordinated with event scheduling. The OSS program shall start HVAC equipment
at the latest possible time that will allow the equipment to achieve the desired zone
condition by the time of occupancy, and it shall also shut down HVAC equipment at
the earliest possible time before the end of the occupancy period and still maintain
desired comfort conditions. The OSS program shall consider both outside weather
conditions and inside zone conditions. The program shall automatically assign
longer lead times for weekend and holiday shutdowns. The program shall poll all
zones served by the associated AHU and shall select the warmest and coolest zones.
These shall be used in the start time calculation. It shall be possible to assign
occupancy start times on a per air handler unit basis. The program shall meet the
local code requirements for minimum outdoor air while the building is occupied.
Modification of assigned occupancy start/stop times shall be possible via the OWS.
Event Scheduling: Provide a comprehensive menu driven program to automatically
start and stop designated points or a group of points according to a stored time. This
program shall provide the capability to individually command a point or group of
points. When points are assigned to one common load group it shall be possible to
assign variable time advances/delays between each successive start or stop within
that group. Scheduling shall be calendar based and advance schedules may be
defined up to one year in advance. Advance schedule shall override the day-today schedule. The operator shall be able to define the following information:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
f.
g.
h.
2.7
Time, day.
Commands such as on, off, auto.
Time delays between successive commands.
Manual overriding of each schedule.
Allow operator intervention.
Alarm Reporting: The operator shall be able to determine the action to be taken in
the event of an alarm. Alarms shall be routed to the OWS based on time and events.
An alarm shall be able to start programs, login the event, print and display the
messages. The system shall allow the operator to prioritize the alarms to minimize
nuisance reporting and to speed operator’s response to critical alarms. A minimum
of six (6) priority levels of alarms shall be provided for each point.
Remote Communications: The system shall have the ability to dial out in the event of
an alarm to the OWS and alpha-numeric pagers. The alarm message shall include
the name of the calling location, the device that generated the alarm, and the
alarm message itself. The operator shall be able to remotely access and operate the
system using dial up communications. Remote access shall allow the operator to
function the same as local access.
Maintenance Management (PM): The program shall monitor equipment status and
generate maintenance messages based upon the operators defined equipment run
time, starts, and/or calendar date limits. A preventative maintenance alarm shall be
printed indicating maintenance requirements based on pre-defined run time. Each
preventive message shall include point description, limit criteria and preventative
maintenance instruction assigned to that limit. A minimum of 480-character PM shall
be provided for each component of units such as air handling units.
ELECTRONIC SENSORS
A.
Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 20
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
B.
Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F (at calibration point.
Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by
temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.
Averaging Elements in Ducts: 24 ft long, flexible; use where prone to temperature
stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft. Ensure complete coverage of duct
area.
Insertion Elements for Liquids: Stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2
inches.
Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
8.
C.
BEC Controls Corporation.
Ebtron, Inc.
MAMAC Systems, Inc.
Approved Equal.
Set-Point Adjustment: None.
Set-Point Indication: None.
Thermometer: None.
Color: White.
Orientation: Vertical.
Outside-Air Sensors:
sunlight.
Watertight inlet fitting, install shield to protect sensor from direct
Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
Accuracy: 2 percent full range with linear output.
Room Sensor Range: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity.
Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
General Eastern Instruments.
MAMAC Systems, Inc.
Vaisala.
Approved Equal.
Set-Point Adjustment: None.
Set-Point Indication: None.
Thermometer: None.
Color: White.
Orientation: Vertical.
Duct Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with element guard and mounting
plate.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 21
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
6.
7.
D.
Outside-Air Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with mounting enclosure,
suitable for operation at outdoor temperatures of 32 to 120 deg F. Install shield to protect
sensor from direct sunlight.
Duct and Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 to 100 percent
relative humidity.
Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Static-Pressure Transmitter: Non-directional sensor with suitable range for expected input,
and temperature compensated.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.
Output: 4 to 20 mA.
Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25 inch wg.
Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 5 inch wg.
Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service;
minimum 150 psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA.
Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for
service; minimum 150 psig operating pressure and tested to 300 psig; linear output 4 to 20
mA. Provide 3-valve manifold for service and calibration.
Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas or liquid service; range suitable for system; linear
output 4 to 20 mA.
Status Sensors:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Veris.
Setra Systems, Inc.
Approved Equal.
Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or splitcore transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of
rated motor current.
Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match
current and system output requirements.
Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2
to 10-V dc, feedback signal.
Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating,
stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in
NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
Johnson Controls.
McDonnell & Miller.
Approved Equal.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 22
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
G.
Relays: Relays shall be provided with 24 or 120 VAC coils, DPDT or 3PDT as required. Relays shall
be provided with indicator LED and surge suppression diode, blade style with associated din rail
mounting base. Contact material shall be silver cadmium oxide and rated for minimum of 10
amps.
1.
Manufacturer:
a.
H.
Selector Switch: Provide non- illuminated, 3 positions, Return Type Manual, Size 30mm, NEMA
type 4 selector switches. Provide 2 contact blocks for each switch:
1.
2.
I.
Contact Block Type 1NC/1NO.
Contact Block Rating 10 amps, 600VAC.
Electric, Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, Double-pole, Double-throw, manual- reset
switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or below set
point.
1.
2.
J.
Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet.
Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface. Provide additional sensors if
coil exceeds 20 sq. ft.
Differential Pressure Switch (Air Systems): Adjustable setpoint, differential pressure type. Select
switches for accuracy, ranges (20 to 80% of operating range) and deadband to match process
conditions, electrical requirements and to implement intended functions.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
K.
Dwyer.
Cleveland Controls.
Johnson Controls.
Pressure Switch (Water System): Adjustable setpoint, Double-pole Double-throw, manual reset,
pressure type. Select switches for accuracy, ranges (20 to 80% of operating range) and
deadband to match process conditions, electrical requirements and to implement intended
functions.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
L.
Idec.
Johnson Controls.
Honeywell.
Approved Equal.
Ultrasonic Water Flow Meter: Clamp-on type that uses externally mounted transducers with no
pipe penetrations, NEMA 4X, C1D2 rated, capable of transit time and Doppler operation
ultrasonic type flow meter to provide linear output signal proportional to flow rate. Single or dual
channel/single or dual path capable. Transducers shall be NEMA 4X, C1D1, matched to pipe
size and material. Microprocessor based with graphic display and advanced diagnostics
including signal graph display.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Siemens.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 23
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
M.
Gas Detection Equipment:
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
N.
Carbon Monoxide Detectors: Single or multichannel, dual-level detectors using solid-state
plug-in sensors with a 3-year minimum life; suitable over a temperature range of 32 to 104
deg F; with 2 factory-calibrated alarm levels at 50 and 100 ppm.
Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state infrared sensors;
suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 deg F and calibrated for 0 to 2 percent,
with continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output;, for wall mounting.
Oxygen Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state zircon cell sensing;
suitable over a temperature range of minus 32 to plus 1100 deg F and calibrated for 0 to 5
percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output; for wall mounting.
Airflow Measurement Device: Duct mounted Airflow measuring station shall consist of one or
more airflow/temperature measuring devices based on size of duct and all required electronics.
The complete system shall be factory tested prior to shipment. The airflow measuring station shall
not require calibration over the life of the equipment. Sensor range shall be minimum and
maximum system airflow rates with an accuracy of ±2%. Sensors and electronics shall operate
over a temperature range of -20° F and a relative F to 160°humidity range of 0% to 99% (noncondensing). Provide air flow measuring station transmitter including any 24 VAC transformer to
interface with the BAS. Air flow measuring station will provide discrete temperature output and is
acceptable for temperature measurement and control as required by specification. Provide
airflow straitening devices as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
2.8
Sensidyne, Inc.
Vaisala.
Ebtron.
ACTUATORS
A.
Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating
action or two-position action.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and
sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings
designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or
feedback potentiometer.
Nonspring-Return Motors for Butterfly Valves 3“ and Larger.
Spring-Return Motors for Valves smaller that Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and
breakaway torque of 150 in. x lb/ft.
Spring-Return Motors for all Dampers.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 24
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
B.
Electronic Actuators:
rated torque.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
2.
3.
f.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.9
Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc., No substitutes or equals allowed.
Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure.
Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
5.
6.
Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at
Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 4 inch lb/sq. ft. of damper.
Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 4 inch lb/sq. ft. of damper.
Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch lb/sq. ft of damper.
Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch lb/sq. ft. of damper.
Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500
fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5.
Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000
fpm: grease running torque by 2.0.
Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
Overload Protection: Electronic overload.
Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear
release on non-spring-return actuators.
Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24 or 120 VAC as shown.
Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24 VAC or 8 W at 24-VDC.
Proportional Signal: 2 to 10 V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2 to 10 VAC DC position feedback
signal.
Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.
Run Time: 120 seconds.
CONTROL VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc., No substitutes or equals allowed.
B.
Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on
maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:
1.
2.
NPS 2 and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc, flanged
ends, and renewable seat and disc.
Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel or brass seats.
a.
3.
Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding
surfaces for plugs on top and bottom.
Sizing: 3 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following:
a.
Three-Way Modulating:
specified above.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value
230900 - 25
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
4.
5.
D.
Ball Valve 1.5” and Smaller:
1.
E.
Flow Characteristics: Three-way valves shall have linear characteristics.
Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide
minimum close-off pressure rating of 100 percent of pressure differential across valve.
Forged brass-nickel plated body, stainless steel ball and stem, EPDM O-ring packing and
Teflon seat.
Butterfly Valves: 200 psig maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron or ASTM A 536
ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or
Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
1.
2.
3.
Body Style: Lug.
Disc Type: Stainless Steel.
Sizing: 1-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify location of thermostats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details
before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor.
1.
Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
B.
Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor
temperatures.
C.
Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section
"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
D.
Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 Section
"Hydronic Piping."
E.
Local Control Panel: Local Control Panels shall be fabricated of 14ga. Steel with subpanels for
component mounting and have removable, hinged. Enclosures shall be sized to house the
controllers, power supplies, transformers, relays, wireduct and miscellaneous equipment required
to support the application.
1.
3.2
Construction for exterior panels shall comply with NEMA 4.
ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A.
Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for
Electrical Systems."
B.
Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 26
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
C.
Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is
in hand position.
D.
Install equipment, piping, and wiring or raceway horizontally, vertically, and parallel to walls
wherever possible.
E.
Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for piping and equipment vibration
isolation.
F.
Install equipment in readily accessible locations as defined by National Electrical Code (NEC)
Chapter 1 Article 100 Part A.
G.
Verify wiring integrity to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and ground faults.
H.
Equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with industry specifications and standards and
local codes for performance, reliability, and compatibility.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,
and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and
to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Contractor shall
provide completed Point to Point test documentation. Each individual control point shall be
listed. Installation verification and operation testing shall be documented and provided to the
Commissioning Agent.
The following testing and verification shall be performed and
documented prior to testing by the Commissioning Agent:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.4
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with
compatible signal generator.
Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control
set points are as required.
Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence
of operation. Adjust PID actions.
Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.
Test software and hardware interlocks.
CONTROL SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING
A.
Startup Testing. Complete startup testing to verify operational control system before notifying
Pima College of system demonstration. Provide Pima College with schedule for startup testing.
Pima College may have a representative present during any or all startup testing.
1.
Calibrate and prepare for service each instrument, control, and accessory equipment
furnished under Section 230900.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 27
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Verify that control wiring is properly connected and free of shorts and ground faults. Verify
that terminations are tight.
Enable control systems and verify each input device's calibration. Calibrate each device
according to manufacturer's recommendations.
Verify that binary output devices such as relays, solenoid valves, two-position actuators
and control valves, and magnetic starters, operate properly and that normal positions are
correct.
Verify that analog output devices such as I/Ps and actuators are functional, that start and
span are correct, and that direction and normal positions are correct. Check control
valves and automatic dampers to ensure proper action and closure. Make necessary
adjustments to valve stem and damper blade travel.
Prepare a log documenting startup testing of each input and output device, with
technician's initials certifying each device has been tested and calibrated.
Verify that system operates according to sequences of operation. Simulate and observe
each operational mode by overriding and varying inputs and schedules. Tune PID loops
and each control routine that requires tuning.
Alarms and Interlocks:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Check each alarm with an appropriate signal at a value that will trip the alarm.
Trip interlocks using field contacts to check logic and to ensure that actuators fail in
the proper direction.
Test interlocks actions by simulating alarm conditions to check initiating value of
variable and interlock action.
DDC Verification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks.
Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.
Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth,
and other applicable considerations.
Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support.
Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-contained
pressure regulators.
Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.
Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.
Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper
blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.
Check DDC system as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
10.
11.
12.
Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if
applicable.
Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and
approved tagging system.
Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.
Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.
Demonstrate compliance with sequences of operation through each operational mode.
Demonstrate complete operation of operator interface.
Trend logs for each system. Trend data shall indicate setpoints, operating points, valve
positions, and other data as specified in the points list provided with contract
documentation. Each log shall cover a 30 day period and shall have a sample frequency
not more than 5 minutes or as specified on its points list. Logs shall be accessible through
system's operator interface and shall be retrievable for use in other software programs.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 28
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
13.
14.
3.5
Pima College or designee will be present to observe and review system demonstration.
Notify Pima College at least 10 days before system demonstration begins.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing
procedures.
TRAINING
A.
Provide training for a designated staff of Pima College's representatives. Training shall be
provided via self-paced training, web-based or computer-based training, classroom training, or
a combination of training methods.
B.
Training shall enable students to accomplish the following objectives.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
C.
Divide presentation of objectives into three sessions (1-13, 14-23, and 24-26). Participants will
attend one or more of sessions, depending on knowledge level required.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Proficiently operate system.
Understand control system architecture and configuration.
Understand DDC system components.
Understand system operation, including DDC system control and optimizing routines
(algorithms).
Operate workstation and peripherals.
Log on and off system.
Access graphics, point reports, and logs.
Adjust and change system setpoints, time schedules, and holiday schedules.
Recognize common HVAC system malfunctions by observing system graphics, trend
graphs, and other system tools.
Understand system drawings and Operation and Maintenance manual.
Understand job layout and location of control components.
Access data from DDC controllers.
Operate portable operator's terminals.
Create and change system graphics.
Create, delete, and modify alarms, including configuring alarm reactions.
Create, delete, and modify point trend logs (graphs) and multi-point trend graphs.
Configure and run reports.
Add, remove, and modify system's physical points.
Create, modify, and delete application programming.
Add operator interface stations.
Add a new controller to system.
Download firmware and advanced applications programming to a controller.
Configure and calibrate I/O points.
Maintain software and prepare backups.
Interface with job-specific, third-party operator software.
Add new users and understand password security procedures.
Day-to-day Operators (objectives 1-13).
Advanced Operators (objectives 1-13 and 14-23).
System Managers and Administrators (objectives 1-13 and 24-26)
Provide course outline and materials according to Section 230900 Article 1.4 (Submittals). Provide
one copy of training material per student.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 29
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
E.
Instructors shall be factory-trained and experienced in presenting this material.
F.
Perform classroom training using a network of working controllers representative of installed
hardware.
END OF SECTION 230900
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
230900 - 30
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.2
Rectangular ducts and fittings.
Round ducts and fittings.
Sheet metal materials.
Sealants and gaskets.
Hangers and supports.
Seismic-restraint devices.
Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing requirements for metal ducts.
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting
access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint
construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design
criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
B.
Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall
comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,
and attachments to other work.
Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static-pressure classes.
Elevation of top of ducts.
Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
Fittings.
Reinforcement and spacing.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233113 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal
Ducts
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.4
Seam and joint construction.
Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and
panels.
Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration
isolation.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and
coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction,
building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct
layout.
Suspended ceiling components.
Structural members to which duct will be attached.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.
Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a.
b.
c.
B.
1.5
Lighting fixtures.
Air outlets and inlets.
Access panels.
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding Certificates Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the
following:
1.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance:
Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
C.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233113 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal
Ducts
B.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for
static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,
and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
C.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams,"
for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
D.
Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and
fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing
requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.2
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction
methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
2.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G90
Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C.
Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed
ducts.
D.
Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the
"Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B,
No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.
E.
Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed
ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.
F.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
1.
G.
2.3
Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum
ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
Tie Rods: Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible”
SEALANT AND GASKETS
A.
General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and
gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index
of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233113 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal
Ducts
B.
Two-Part Tape Sealing System:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
C.
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
7.
2.4
Application Method: Brush on.
Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
Water resistant.
Mold and mildew resistant.
VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg positive and negative.
Service: Indoor or outdoor.
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum sheets.
Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone
activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.
Tape Width: 4 inches.
Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.
Water resistant.
Mold and mildew resistant.
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.
Service: Indoor and outdoor.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum.
For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.
Type: S.
Grade: NS.
Class: 25.
Use: O.
For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B.
Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods
with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233113 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal
Ducts
C.
Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger
Sizes for Round Duct."
D.
Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
E.
Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
F.
Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts
designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
G.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
H.
Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1.
2.
3.
Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct
system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and
calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install
duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and
Coordination Drawings.
B.
Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"
unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E.
Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch
connections.
F.
Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
G.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
H.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I.
Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and
enclosures.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233113 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal
Ducts
J.
Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to
view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2
inches.
K.
Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.
Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.
L.
Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign
materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction,"
Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
3.2
INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A.
Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B.
Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use
two-part tape sealing system.
C.
Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When
welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and
treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D.
Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,
hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E.
Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.
3.3
DUCT SEALING
A.
Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule"
Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
B.
Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible":
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.
Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.
Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal
Class B.
Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal
Class A.
Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.
Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.
Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal
Class C.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233113 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal
Ducts
10.
11.
12.
3.4
Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg:
Class B.
Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.
Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
Seal
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5,
"Hangers and Supports."
B.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely
cured.
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or
for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C.
Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger
Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches
of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
D.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E.
Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,
bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16
feet.
F.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,
and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.5
CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air
Duct Accessories."
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch,
outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6
DUCT CLEANING
A.
Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233113 - 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal
Ducts
B.
Use service openings for entry and inspection.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Particulate Collection and Odor Control:
1.
2.
D.
When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent
collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.
When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from
HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points
of entry into building.
Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if
required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch
insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer.
Comply with
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.
Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.
Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply
and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive
assemblies.
Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air
wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers,
filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
Coils and related components.
Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and
mechanical equipment rooms.
Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants
from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect
vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under
negative pressure.
Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without
damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to
get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated
or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.
Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.
Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and
straighten fins.
Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.
Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is
present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after
removal of surface deposits and debris.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233113 - 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal
Ducts
3.7
START UP
A.
3.8
Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for
HVAC."
DUCT SCHEDULE
A.
Supply Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units :
a.
b.
c.
2.
Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:
a.
b.
c.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
Exhaust Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units :
a.
b.
c.
D.
Pressure Class: Positive 4-inch wg.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.
Return Ducts:
1.
C.
Pressure Class: Positive 4-inch wg.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
Intermediate Reinforcement:
1.
Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.
2.
Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233113 - 9
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal
Ducts
E.
Elbow Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:
1)
2)
b.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm :
1)
2)
3)
c.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
b.
c.
3.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:
1)
2)
3)
2.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 44, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."
a.
Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered
Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately
fewer segments.
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
c.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments
for 90-degree elbow.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for
90-degree elbow.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments
for 90-degree elbow.
Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.
Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Welded and sealed, or Gore
Lock
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233113 - 10
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal
Ducts
4.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."
a.
b.
5.
Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.
Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are
permitted in existing duct.
a.
b.
c.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
END OF SECTION 233113
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233113 - 11
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Metal
Ducts
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.
Manual volume dampers.
Control dampers.
Fire dampers.
Smoke dampers.
Flange connectors.
Turning vanes.
Duct-mounted access doors.
Flexible connectors.
Flexible ducts.
Duct accessory hardware.
Section 233723 "HVAC Gravity Ventilators" for roof-mounted ventilator caps.
Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for duct-mounted fire and smoke
detectors.
Section 283112 "Zoned (DC-Loop) Fire-Alarm System" for duct-mounted fire and smoke
detectors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings:
For duct accessories.
attachments to other work.
1.
Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.
Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field
assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.3
Include plans, elevations, sections, details and
Special fittings.
Manual volume damper installations.
Control-damper installations.
Fire-damper and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted
access doors.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and maintenance data.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233300 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Air Duct
Accessories
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable
materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet
metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other
imperfections.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
2.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.
Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
B.
Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed
ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
C.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized
sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
D.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Construction Standards-Meata and
Flexible”
2.3
BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
2.
3.
TAMCO
Ruskin Company.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
B.
Description: Gravity balanced.
C.
Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm .
D.
Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg .
E.
Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.080-inch- thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners or mechanically
attached and mounting flange.
F.
Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.060-inch- thick
aluminum sheet with sealed edges.
G.
Blade Action: Opposed.
H.
Blade Seals: Extruded silicone secured within an integral slot within the aluminum extrusions.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233300 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Air Duct
Accessories
I.
Blade Axles:
1.
Bearings composed of Celcon inner bearing fixed to a 7/16 inch aluminum hexagon blade
pin, floating within a polycarbonate outer bearing inserted in the frame.
J.
Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
K.
Bearings: Synthetic pivot bushings.
L.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
Electric actuators.
Chain pulls.
Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.
a.
b.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.4
Sleeve Thickness: 20 gage minimum.
Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum.
Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.
Screen Material: Aluminum.
Screen Type: Bird.
90-degree stops.
MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A.
Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
Frames:
a.
b.
c.
5.
Frame: 5 inch x 1 inch x 16 gauge galvanized steel channel with corner braces..
Mitered and welded corners.
Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
Blades:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
Cain Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Ruskin Company.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
Multiple blade.
Opposed-blade design.
Stiffen damper blades for stability.
Galvanized -steel, 2 gauges heavier than surrounding duct.
Blade Axles: Stainless steel.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233300 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Air Duct
Accessories
7.
Bearings:
a.
b.
8.
B.
3.
Size: 1-inch diameter.
Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on
supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple-damper assembly.
Damper Hardware:
1.
2.
3.
2.5
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
Jackshaft:
1.
2.
C.
Molded synthetic.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length
of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel,
and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.
Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
CONTROL DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Hat shaped.
0.094-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel Mitered and welded corners.
Blades:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
Ruskin Company.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
Frames:
1.
2.
C.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches.
Opposed-blade design.
Galvanized-steel.
0.0747-inch- thick dual skin.
Blade Edging: PVC.
Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.
Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- diameter; stainless steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and
brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.
1.
Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233300 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Air Duct
Accessories
E.
Bearings:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Molded synthetic.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of
damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc.
Ruskin Company.
B.
Type: Static and dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.
C.
Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity.
D.
Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.
E.
Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick
galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
F.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.
1.
2.
Minimum Thickness: 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application.
Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must
comply with sleeve requirements.
G.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
H.
Blades:
Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of
interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
I.
Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
J.
Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 212 deg F rated, fusible links.
K.
Heat-Responsive Device:
deg F rated.
2.7
Electricreplaceable link and switch package, factory installed, 212
SMOKE DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
Ruskin Company.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233300 - 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Air Duct
Accessories
B.
General Requirements: Label according to UL 555S by an NRTL.
C.
Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.
D.
Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting
flange.
E.
Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking0.063-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.
F.
Leakage: Class I.
G.
Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
H.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.05-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or
floor application with factory-furnished silicone calking.
I.
Damper Motors: Two-position action.
J.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
K.
Accessories:
1.
2.
2.8
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will
not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices
and connections specified in Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear
trains.
Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.
Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of
150 in. x lbf.
Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to
make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation
at minus 40 deg F.
Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running torque
rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.
Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
Auxiliary switches for sign a ling or position indication.
Test and reset switches, remote mounted.
FLANGE CONNECTORS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Spinfinity, Inc
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233300 - 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Air Duct
Accessories
B.
Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors,
gaskets, and components.
C.
Material: Galvanized steel.
D.
Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
2.9
TURNING VANES
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Elgen Manufacturing.
Cain Manufacturing Company, Inc
Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support
with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1.
Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated
faces and fibrous-glass fill.
C.
Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded
fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into
vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
D.
General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
E.
Vane Construction: Double wall.
2.10
A.
DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Elgen Manufacturing.
Cain Manufacturing Company, Inc Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2,
"Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."
1.
Door:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Double wall, rectangular.
Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct
pressure class.
Vision panel.
Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233300 - 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Air Duct
Accessories
2.
3.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
Number of Hinges and Locks:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.11
A.
Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.
Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
Access Doors up to 24 by 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with
outside and inside handles.
Access Doors Larger than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression
latches with outside and inside handles.
DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Flame Gard, Inc.
3M.
B.
Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.
C.
Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.
D.
Fasteners: Stainless steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
E.
Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum
2000 deg F.
F.
Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.
2.12
A.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Duro Dyne Inc.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
B.
Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C.
Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
D.
Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches (wide attached to
two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick
aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E.
Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. .
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233300 - 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Air Duct
Accessories
2.
3.
2.13
A.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.
Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.
Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.
Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F.
Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
Flexible Duct Connectors:
1.
2.14
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex
adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized
vapor-barrier film.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the
Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, springsteel wire.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F .
Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a
worm-gear action, to suit duct size.
DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and
gasket. Size to allow insertion of pilot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit
duct-insulation thickness.
B.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233300 - 9
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Air Duct
Accessories
B.
Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in
galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and
aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C.
Install dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless
otherwise indicated.
D.
Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend
from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with
hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1.
2.
Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
E.
Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F.
Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G.
Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.
H.
Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
On both sides of duct coils.
Upstream from duct filters.
At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.
At drain pans and seals.
Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and
equipment.
Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.
Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief
access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from
dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.
At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.
Upstream from turning vanes.
Upstream or downstream from duct silencers.
Control devices requiring inspection.
Elsewhere as indicated.
I.
Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
J.
Access Door Sizes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.
K.
Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment"
to indicate the purpose of access door.
L.
Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233300 - 10
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Air Duct
Accessories
M.
Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct.
Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
N.
Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible
duct clamped or strapped in place.
O.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
P.
Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper
heat-response device is installed.
Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
END OF SECTION 233300
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233300 - 11
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Air Duct
Accessories
SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Utility set fans.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.4
Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.5
Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
Certified fan sound-power ratings.
Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
Roof curbs.
Fan speed controllers.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233423 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
HVAC Power
Ventilators
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the
AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C.
UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant
kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
C.
Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
actual equipment provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
UTILITY SET FANS
A.
Housing: Fabricated of galvanized steel with side sheets fastened with a deep lock seam or
welded to scroll sheets.
1.
B.
Housing Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to eight standard positions.
Fan Wheels: Single-width, single inlet; welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun-steel inlet
cone, with hub keyed to shaft.
1.
2.
Blade Materials: Steel.
Blade Type: Backward inclined.
C.
Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
D.
Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings with
ABMA 9, L50 of 200,000 hours.
1.
E.
Extend grease fitting to accessible location outside of unit.
Belt Drives:
1.
2.
3.
Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation
Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: [1.5] [1.4] [1.3] [1.2].
Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through [5] <Insert value> hp; fixed pitch
for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment
range at fan design conditions.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233423 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
HVAC Power
Ventilators
4.
5.
F.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
Inlet and Outlet: Flanged.
Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing.
Backdraft Dampers: Gravity actuated with counterweight and interlocking aluminum
blades with felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge.
Weather Hoods: Weather resistant with stamped vents over motor and drive
compartment.
MOTORS
A.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
1.
B.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will
not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B.
Equipment Mounting:
1.
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices
C.
Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. See Section 077200
"Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.
D.
Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
E.
Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping
and Equipment."
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct
Accessories."
B.
Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233423 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
HVAC Power
Ventilators
D.
3.3
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and
adjust belts, and install belt guards.
Adjust belt tension.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to
indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
B.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B.
Adjust belt tension.
C.
Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for
testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
D.
Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
E.
Lubricate bearings.
END OF SECTION 233423
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233423 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
HVAC Power
Ventilators
SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
B.
Diffusers, registers/grilles, and louvers. Related Sections:
1.
1.2
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control
dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:
1.
2.
B.
Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CEILING DIFFUSERS
A.
Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers :
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Krueger.
Price Industries.
Titus.
Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.
Material: Steel.
Finish: Baked enamel, white.
Face Size: 24 by 24 inches.
Face Style: Four cone.
Mounting: Surface or T-bar
Pattern: Adjustable.
Dampers: Radial opposed blade.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233713 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Diffusers, Registers, and
Grilles
10.
Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Perforated Diffuser :
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Krueger.
Price Industries.
Titus.
Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.
Material: Steel backpan and pattern controllers, with steel face.
Finish: Baked enamel, white
Face Size: 24 by 24 inches Duct Inlet: Round.
Face Style: Drop extended.
Mounting: T-bar.
Pattern Controller: Adjustable with louvered pattern modules at inlet.
Dampers: Opposed blade.
Accessories:
a.
2.2
Equalizing grid.
Wire guard.
Sectorizing baffles.
Operating rod extension.
Operating rod extension.
REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A.
Adjustable Bar Register:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Krueger.
Price Industries.
Titus.
Material: Steel.
Finish: Baked enamel, white
Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal Vertical spaced 3/4 inch apart.
Core Construction: Integral.
Rear-Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch apart.
Frame: 1 inch wide.
Mounting Frame: Filter.
Mounting: Countersunk screw.
Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade.
Accessories:
a.
b.
Front blade gang operator.
Filter.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233713 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Diffusers, Registers, and
Grilles
B.
Adjustable Bar Grille :
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.3
Krueger.
Price Industries.
Titus.
Material: Steel.
Finish: Baked enamel, white.
Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal3/4 apart.
Core Construction: Integral.
Rear-Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch apart.
Frame: 1 inch wide.
Mounting Frame: Filter.
Mounting: Countersunk screw.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B.
Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final
locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate
units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation,
notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.2
ADJUSTING
A.
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 233713
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
233713 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Diffusers, Registers, and
Grilles
SECTION 260510 – ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A.
This section clarifies the requirement to hire an independent testing agency for all electrical
testing.
B.
Testing shall be performed on electrical equipment and systems to assure that equipment and
systems are operational and within applicable standards and manufacturer’s tolerances. Testing
should verify that equipment and systems are installed in accordance with design specifications.
All testing shall occur at the building site.
C.
Testing shall be performed by an independent organization that is professionally independent of
the manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of the equipment or systems being evaluated. The
name of the proposed testing organization shall be submitted to Pima Community College (PCC)
Engineering and engineer for approval.
D.
Qualified technicians who are trained and regularly employed for testing services shall do all
testing. Submit technician qualifications.
E.
Testing organization shall conform to the general guidelines of Section 5 of the latest NETA
Acceptance Testing Specifications, in their entirety. This includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Safety and Precautions
Suitability of Test Equipment
Test Instrument Calibration
Test Report
F.
Provide reports in an electronic PDF file, and Four (4) paper copies of the completed report to
PCC Engineering.
G.
Notify PCC Engineering at least seven (7) days in advance of any testing. A representative of
PCC Engineering shall witness testing.
H.
Inspection and testing of all applicable electrical equipment listed below shall be done in
accordance with the latest version of NETA ATS. This will include all tests marked optional unless
waived in writing by PCC Engineering.
1.
Transformers: Air Cooled and Liquid Filled
2.
Cables: Low and Medium Voltage
3.
Panelboard Assemblies
4.
Low Voltage Circuit Breakers:
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Insulated Case/Molded Case (100 amp frame and larger)
Power
Instrument Transformers
Grounding Systems
Ground Fault Protection Systems
Motors: AC
Motor Starters: Low Voltage
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260510- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Electrical Acceptance
Testing
1.2
SYSTEM FUNCTION TESTS
A.
Perform system function tests upon completion of equipment tests as defined in 26 05 10.1.1. It is
the purpose of the system function tests to prove the correct interaction of all sensing, process,
and action devices.
B.
Verify the correct operation of all safety devices for fail-safe functions in addition to design
function.
C.
Verify the correct operation of all sensing devices, alarms, and indicating devices.
1.3
FIELD TESTING LOW VOLTAGE CABLES
A.
Test voltage shall be 1000 VDC for insulation rated for 600V. Minimum recorded resistance shall
be 100 megohms. Wire not meeting this requirement shall be replaced and retested.
B.
Wiring in building must be free from grounds, i.e., complete installation must have insulation
between conductors and the ground. All fuses, circuits switches, receptacles, outlets, fixtures,
etc., shall be in place, complete. Each separate branch circuit shall test free from short circuits
and grounds, and shall have minimum resistance between conductors and ground of 2,000,000
ohms, when tested by 1000 volt DC Megger for one minute. With fixtures, lampholders or
appliances connected, the minimum resistance shall be 500,000 ohms. Power circuits and
secondary feeders shall have minimum insulation resistance as required by code.
C.
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Tests: Test each 120VAC branch circuit having ground-fault
circuit protection to assure that the ground-fault circuit interrupter will not operate when
subjected to a ground-fault current of less than 4 milliamperes and will operate when subjected
to a ground-fault current exceeding 6 milliamperes. Perform tests using an instrument specifically
designed and manufactured for testing ground-fault circuit interrupters. Apply the test to the
receptacle which is the greatest distance from the ground-fault interrupter. “TEST” button
operation will not be acceptable as a substitute for this test.
D.
Ground Resistance Tests: Measure ground resistance of each grounding electrode. Upon
completion and before final acceptance of the work, submit in writing the measured ground
resistance of each ground rod and grounding system, as well as the resistance and soil conditions
at the time measurements were made. Make ground resistance measurements in normally dry
weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall, and with the ground under test isolated from other
grounds. Also, measure ground resistance from each piece of equipment to the ground
electrode.
E.
Receptacle Tests: Test receptacles with receptacle circuit tester (Hubbell 5200 or equivalent) for
reversed polarity, open conductors, and reversed conductor terminations.
1.4
FIRE ALARM TESTING
A.
Shall be conducted by PCC Fire Department, and local authorities having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 260510
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260510- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Electrical Acceptance
Testing
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems
communications cables and Classes 1, 2 and 3 control cables.
Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice and data
circuits.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B.
Field quality-control reports.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260519- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Low-Voltage Electrical
Conductors and Cables
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
or comparable
Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.
Alpha Wire.
Belden Inc.
Encore Wire Corporation.
General Cable Technologies Corporation.
Southwire Incorporated.
B.
Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.
C.
Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN-2.
D.
Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for armored cable, Type AC
metal-clad cable, Type MC mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI with ground wire.
2.2
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
2.3
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
Gardner Bender.
Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
Ideal Industries, Inc.
Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation.
NSi Industries LLC.
O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group.
3M; Electrical Markets Division.
Tyco Electronics.
Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260519- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Low-Voltage Electrical
Conductors and Cables
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A.
Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B.
Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger.
3.2
CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS
A.
Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
B.
Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single
conductors in raceway.
C.
Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
D.
Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in
raceway.
E.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions:
conductors in raceway.
F.
Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring:
raceway.
G.
Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel,
wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
3.3
Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single
Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to
Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and
cables.
C.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
E.
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members,
and follow surface contours where possible.
F.
Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260519- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Low-Voltage Electrical
Conductors and Cables
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A-486B.
B.
Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced
conductors.
C.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3.5
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
B.
Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of
conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
3.6
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
3.7
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.8
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping".
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1.
2.
After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test feeder conductors and conductors feeding emergency, life safety, critical equipment
and services] for compliance with requirements.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260519- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Low-Voltage Electrical
Conductors and Cables
3.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and
larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.
Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.
a.
b.
c.
D.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or
to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
device.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices
checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
Procedures used.
Results that comply with requirements.
Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION 260519
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260519- 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Low-Voltage Electrical
Conductors and Cables
SECTION 260523 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Low-voltage control cabling.
Control-circuit conductors.
Identification products.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for
remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.
C.
Plenum: A space forming part of the air distribution system to which one or more air ducts are
connected. An air duct is a passageway, other than a plenum, for transporting air to or from
heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment.
D.
RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of product.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.
B.
Source quality-control reports.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260523- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Control-Voltage Electrical
Power Cables
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
2.2
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Flame Travel and Smoke Density in Plenums: As determined by testing identical products
according to NFPA 262 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products for installation in plenums
with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
3.
Flame Travel Distance: 60 inches or less.
Peak Optical Smoke Density: 0.5 or less.
Average Optical Smoke Density: 0.15 or less.
B.
Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determined
by testing identical products according to UL 1666.
C.
Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non-Riser Applications and Non-Plenum Building
Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1685.
2.3
BACKBOARDS
A.
Description: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches.
B.
Painting: Paint plywood on all sides and edges with flat white fire-retardant paint. Comply with
requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
2.4
LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE
A.
Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Multi-pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded tinned-copper conductors.
PVC insulation.
Unshielded.
PVC jacket.
Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685.
Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Multi-pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded tinned-copper conductors.
PVC insulation.
Unshielded.
PVC jacket.
Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260523- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Control-Voltage Electrical
Power Cables
2.5
CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Encore Wire Corporation.
General Cable Technologies Corporation.
Southwire Company.
B.
Class 1 Control Circuits:
UL 44.
C.
Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway power-limited cable,
concealed in building finishes, complying with UL 44.
D.
Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway
power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes power-limited tray cable, in cable tray,
complying with UL 44.
E.
Class 2 Control Circuits and Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits That Supply Critical
Circuits: Circuit Integrity (CI) cable.
1.
2.6
Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway, complying with
Smoke control signaling and control circuits.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.
B.
Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Test cables on receipt at Project site.
1.
3.2
Test each pair cable for open and short circuits.
INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for
raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as
supplemented or modified in this Section.
1.
Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260523- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Control-Voltage Electrical
Power Cables
2.
3.
Outlet boxes for optical-fiber cables shall be no smaller than 4 inches square by 2-1/8
inches deep with extension ring sized to bring edge of ring to within 1/8 inch of the finished
wall surface.
Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.
B.
Comply with TIA-569-B for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between
pull points.
C.
Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.
D.
Raceway Installation in Equipment Rooms:
1.
2.
E.
3.3
Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is
installed, or in the corner of the room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around
perimeter walls of the room.
Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to
grounding system.
Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly and
form smooth gap-free corners and joints.
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 70.
B.
General Requirements for Cabling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Terminate all conductors no cable shall contain unterminated elements.
Make
terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals.
Cables may not be spliced.
Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6
inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged
during installation and replace it with new cable.
Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Do not use
heat lamps for heating.
Support: Do not allow cables to lay on removable ceiling tiles.
Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as to
not damage cables.
Separation from EMI Sources:
1.
Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and
unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.
Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12
inches.
Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.
Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and
unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a.
Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260523- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Control-Voltage Electrical
Power Cables
b.
c.
3.
Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power
lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall
be as follows:
a.
b.
c.
4.
5.
3.4
Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.
Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.
Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches.
Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.
Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5
kVA or 5 HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.
Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5
inches.
REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
3.5
Remove abandoned conductors and cables. Abandoned conductors and cables are those
installed that are not terminated at equipment and are not identified for future use with a tag.
CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A.
Minimum Conductor Sizes:
1.
2.
3.
3.6
Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits; No 14 AWG.
Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits; No. 16 AWG.
Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits; No 12 AWG.
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.7
Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
GROUNDING
A.
3.8
For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.9
Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260523- 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Control-Voltage Electrical
Power Cables
C.
Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
D.
Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is
formatted.
E.
End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 260523
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260523- 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Control-Voltage Electrical
Power Cables
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
As-Built Data: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in
"Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:
1.
Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.
B.
Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
maintenance manuals.
1.
In addition to items specified in Section 017700 “Closeout Procedures,” include the
following:
a.
1.6
For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and
Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at based on
NFPA 70B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260526- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.
ERICO International Corporation.
Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC.
ILSCO.
O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
2.3
CONDUCTORS
A.
Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Bare Copper Conductors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
2.4
Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
Bonding Jumper: Copper, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8
inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section,
with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply
with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.
CONNECTORS
A.
Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in
which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items
connected.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260526- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems
B.
Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.
C.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
D.
Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire
terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS
A.
Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On
feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection,
with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two
bands of yellow.
C.
Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and
elsewhere as indicated.
1.
2.
D.
Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1.
2.
3.2
Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above
finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top
of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.
Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those
required by NFPA 70:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Feeders and branch circuits.
Lighting circuits.
Receptacle circuits.
Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Flexible raceway runs.
Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding
bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar
terminal on busway.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260526- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems
C.
3.3
Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted
electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,
humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct
and connected metallic piping.
INSTALLATION
A.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1.
2.
C.
Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1.
D.
3.4
Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;
use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one
of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect
grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or
sleeve to conductor at each end.
Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to
bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,
and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260526- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems
2.
Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,
electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
E.
Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
G.
Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 3 ohm(s).
Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260526- 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
Construction requirements for concrete bases.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
B.
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
C.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
D.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the
applied force.
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
Steel slotted support systems.
Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260529- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems
B.
Shop Drawings:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
Equipment supports.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel."
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1.
2.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
ERICO International Corporation.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
Metallic Coatings:
MFMA-4.
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260529- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems
4.
5.
6.
B.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-4.
Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to
MFMA-4.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels
and angles with 9/16-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1 surface.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited.
Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for
use with those items.
Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may
be stainless steel.
Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.
C.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
D.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for
types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
E.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded
body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in
riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required
to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
F.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes,
and bars; black and galvanized.
G.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their
supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Hilti Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260529- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems
2.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials in which used.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Hilti Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached
structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A.
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of
supported equipment.
B.
Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and
plates.
2.3
CABLE SUPPORT DEVICES (J-HOOKS)
A.
J-Hooks:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
ERICO International Corporation, Erico Caddy, Cablecat
accoutrements of same manufacturer.
Non-continuous cable support assemblies from threaded rod:
1)
2)
3)
4)
series
with
all
Fastener to threaded rod with one non-continuous cable support, factory or
jobsite assembled, rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments.
The multi-tiered support bracket shall have a static load limit of 300 lbs.
U-hooks and Double J-hook shall attach directly to threaded rod using
standard nuts.
Acceptable products: ERICO CableCat™ J-hook, CAT12, CAT21, CAT32,
CAT64with CADDY CATHBA series; CAT-CM™ Direct mount U-hook
CAT200CMLN, CAT300CMLN; or AFAB series; or approved equal.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260529- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems
c.
Non-continuous cable support assemblies from beam, flange:
1)
2)
d.
Non-continuous cable support assemblies from wall, concrete, or joist:
1)
2)
e.
g.
Fastener to wall, concrete, or joist with one non-continuous cable support,
factory or jobsite assembled; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive
environments.
Acceptable products: ERICO CableCat™ J-Hook series CAT12, CAT21,
CAT32, CAT64 with CADDY angle bracket; or approved equal.
Non-continuous cable support assemblies from raised floor pedestals or stanchions:
1)
2)
f.
Fastener to beam or flange with one non-continuous cable support factory or
jobsite assembled; rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments.
Acceptable products: ERICO CableCat™ J-hook series CAT12, CAT21,
CAT32, CAT64 with CADDY beam clamps and CADDY flange clips; or
approved equal.
4 inches minimum.
Black .5 inches wide minimum, 150 foot lengths.
Contractor shall size non-continuous cable supports (J-Hook) such that capacity of
cabling can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified manufacturer and design load limits.
Non-continuous cable supports (J-Hook) shall have a cable retainer strap to provide
containment of cables within the hanger. The cable retainer strap shall be
removable / reusable and Listed for use in air handling spaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT,
IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacing less than stated
in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
1.
D.
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps using spring
friction action for retention in support channel.
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above
suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260529- 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems
E.
3.2
It is not permitted for conduits and J-Hooks to be supported from a single common, threaded rod
support.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.
B.
Comply with ANSi Tia/EIA-569-B.
C.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC
may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
D.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will
be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum
static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus
200 lb.
E.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless
otherwise indicated by code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or
greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less
than 4 inches thick.
To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
F.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
G.
Bundle, lace, train cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer’s limitation on
cable bending radius.
H.
Supports for non-continuous cable supports (J-Hooks), shall only be used for non-continuous
cable supports (J-Hooks). It is not permissible to support any other device or entity from supports
used for non-continuous cable supports (J-Hooks) including but not limited to conduit. In
addition, it is not permissible to use J-Hooks to support conduit.
I.
Install cable retainer in all J-Hooks.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260529- 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems
3.3
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A.
Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated
metal supports.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with
SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B.
Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" and Section 099600 "High
Performance Coatings" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 260529
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260529- 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
Surface raceways.
Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface
pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes
serving communications systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
B.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures,
and cabinets.
B.
Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
1.
2.
Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with
common supports.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260533- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems
B.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
C.
Source quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
Republic Conduit.
Robroy Industries.
Southwire Company.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D.
ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.
E.
IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
F.
PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.
1.
2.
Comply with NEMA RN 1.
Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.
G.
EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
H.
FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.
I.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
J.
Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1.
2.
Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.
Fittings for EMT:
a.
b.
Material: Steel.
Type: Compression.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260533- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems
3.
4.
K.
2.2
Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for
environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.
Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with
overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having
jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect
threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
Hoffman; a Pentair company.
Mono-Systems, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 ,Type 3R, Type 4, Type 12
unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1.
Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
D.
Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.3
NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Allied Moulded Products, Inc.
Hoffman; a Pentair company.
Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C.
Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape.
D.
Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps,
end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete
system.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260533- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems
E.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,
respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
F.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.4
SURFACE RACEWAYS
A.
Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
Surface Metal Raceways:
Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.
Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and
manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard colors.
Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing
characteristics.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.5
Mono-Systems, Inc.
Panduit Corp.
Wiremold / Legrand.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division.
Mono-Systems, Inc.
Panduit Corp.
Wiremold / Legrand.
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the
Adalet.
Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
EGS/Appleton Electric.
Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division.
Kraloy.
O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
RACO; a Hubbell Company.
Robroy Industries.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Wiremold / Legrand.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260533- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems
B.
General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes:
gasketed cover.
E.
Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
F.
Metal Floor Boxes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with
Material: Cast metal.
Type: Fully adjustable.
Shape: Rectangular.
Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Provide a wiremold, Legrand raised floor box type AF3 with four (4) separate
compartments that accommodate up to eight communications for power devices with
units approximate size being 8"x10"x5" deep which will be installed in a 6" raised floor. AF
series shall come complete with two (2) duplex receptacles with two (2) USB ports and all
other plate, accessories and communications devices pr specifications for a complete
installation.
Provide a wiremold. Legrand Evolution Series EFSB4 flat screen wall box complete with
duplex receptacle with USB ports and all other plates, accessories and communications.
All devices per specifications for a complete installation. Box openings approximately 7
3/4" height x 11 1/2" width.
G.
Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.
Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and
marked for the maximum allowable weight.
H.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
I.
Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes:
aluminum with gasketed cover.
J.
Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed
box.
K.
Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep.
L.
Gangable boxes are prohibited.
M.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4, Type 12
with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast
Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.
Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260533- 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems
N.
Cabinets:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 12 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel
and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
Key latch to match panelboards.
Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified
testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the
following:
a.
b.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.
Mechanical rooms.
Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 nonmetallic in
institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
B.
Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
C.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of
conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing
conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in
thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
EMT: Use compression fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with
NEMA FB 2.20.
Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum
raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260533- 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems
E.
Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
F.
Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
G.
Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on
Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with
NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
B.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D.
Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for
hangers and supports.
E.
Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
F.
Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes
in direction.
G.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
H.
Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
I.
Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1.
2.
3.
J.
Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement.
Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure
raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.
Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.
Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.
Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1.
2.
Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.
Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in
an enclosure.
K.
Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed
compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
L.
Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive
compound prior to assembly.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260533- 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems
M.
Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to
protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
N.
Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes
or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal
bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated
throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
O.
Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts.
locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
P.
Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in
the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
Q.
Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter
or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
R.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less
than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap
raceways designated as spare use.
S.
Surface Raceways:
1.
2.
Install
Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.
Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not
exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section.
Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue
are not acceptable support methods.
T.
Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
U.
Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or
boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all
raceways at the following points:
1.
2.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
V.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
W.
Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1.
Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature
change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.
Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where
environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run
length that exceeds 100 feet.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260533- 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems
2.
Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for
each of the following locations:
a.
b.
3.
4.
5.
X.
Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F
temperature change.
Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.
Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of
length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.
Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion
joints.
Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time
of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible
conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise
transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1.
2.
Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
Y.
Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually
indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to top of box
unless otherwise indicated.
Z.
Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a
rain tight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
AA.
Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same
vertical channel.
BB.
Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
CC.
Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
DD.
Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
EE.
Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
3.3
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
3.4
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260533- 9
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Comply with
Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems
3.5
PROTECTION
A.
Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1.
2.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260533- 10
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems
SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.
Sleeve-seal systems.
Sleeve-seal fittings.
Grout.
Silicone sealants.
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fireresistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without
penetrating items.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SLEEVES
A.
Wall Sleeves:
1.
2.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain
ends.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure
pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel
sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs
for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
C.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1.
Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260544- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Electrical and Cabling
2.
Minimum Metal Thickness:
a.
b.
2.2
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side
larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more
sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A.
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and raceway or cable.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
CALPICO, Inc.
Metraflex Company (The).
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Proco Products, Inc.
Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A.
Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in
concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to
match piping OD.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
2.4
Presealed Systems.
GROUT
A.
Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated
walls or floors.
B.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydrauliccement grout.
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260544- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Electrical and Cabling
2.5
SILICONE SEALANTS
A.
Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of
grade indicated below.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces that are not fire rated.
Sealant shall have VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and
cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors
and Walls:
1.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or
cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.
Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used.
Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both
surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.
Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 3 inches above
finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1.
2.
D.
Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly
between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth;
protect material while curing.
Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved
opening.
Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board
assemblies.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boottype flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260544- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Electrical and Cabling
E.
3.2
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or
cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical
sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts
against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B.
Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls.
Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C.
Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
END OF SECTION 260544
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260544- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Electrical and Cabling
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
Identification for raceways.
Identification of power and control cables.
Identification for conductors.
Underground-line warning tape.
Warning labels and signs.
Instruction signs.
Equipment identification labels.
Miscellaneous identification products.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting
provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
C.
Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system
components used in identification signs and labels.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D.
Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E.
Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used
by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260553- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Identification for
Electrical Systems
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by
codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each raceway size.
B.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1.
2.
Black letters on an orange field.
Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C.
Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated
with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive
tape for securing ends of legend label.
D.
Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with
self-locking cable tie fastener.
2.2
POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each cable size.
B.
Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant
coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
C.
Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- thick flexible label with acrylic
pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, selflaminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the
clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.
D.
Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes:
Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed
identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full
shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260553- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Identification for
Electrical Systems
E.
2.3
Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with
self-locking cable tie fastener.
CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to
2 inches wide.
B.
Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- thick flexible label with acrylic
pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, selflaminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such
that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.
C.
Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with
diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
D.
Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve with
diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E.
Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes:
Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed
identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around conductor it identifies.
Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.
F.
Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
2.4
FLOOR MARKING TAPE
A.
2.5
2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl
overlay.
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A.
Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B.
Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,
configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise
indicated.
C.
Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.
Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:
1.
Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch
galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260553- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Identification for
Electrical Systems
2.
3.
E.
Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1.
2.
2.6
1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.
Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS
MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 48 INCHES."
INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A.
Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq.
inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.
1.
2.
3.
Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
B.
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
C.
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer
or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a
weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
2.7
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A.
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
B.
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer
or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a
weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
C.
Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
D.
Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
E.
Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1
inch.
2.8
CABLE TIES
A.
General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6
nylon.
1.
2.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260553- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Identification for
Electrical Systems
3.
4.
B.
UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self
extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
Color: Black.
Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.9
Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.
UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.
Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F.
Color: Black.
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application
requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or
interior).
B.
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E.
Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
F.
Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape
with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260553- 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Identification for
Electrical Systems
G.
System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band
shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in
contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors,
at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested
areas.
H.
Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or
cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
I.
Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1.
J.
3.2
In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation
and paint application.
IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch
Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels
at 30-foot maximum intervals.
B.
Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull
box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and
system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Emergency Power.
Power.
UPS.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in, pull and junction boxes,
use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.
1.
Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed
below for feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
a.
Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG.
b.
Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
1)
2)
3)
c.
Phase A: Brown.
Phase B: Orange.
Phase C: Yellow.
Color for 208/120V circuits:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Phase A: Black.
Phase B: Red.
Phase C: Blue.
Neutral: White.
Ground: Green.
Isolated Ground: Green/Orange Stripe.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260553- 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Identification for
Electrical Systems
d.
Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a
minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or
taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible
unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
D.
Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using
adhesive-film-type labels.
E.
Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes,
use self-adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin,
and destination.
F.
Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations provide
heat-shrink preprinted tubes with the conductor designation.
G.
Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.
H.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and
signal connections.
1.
2.
3.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by
manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
I.
Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of
access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless
otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in
finished spaces.
J.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:
enamel warning signs.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Baked-
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
Power transfer switches.
Controls with external control power connections.
K.
Operating Instruction Signs:
Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with
approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
L.
Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used
for power transfer load shedding.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260553- 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Identification for
Electrical Systems
M.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that
is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
1.
Labeling Instructions:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Indoor Equipment:
Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
Unless
otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with
appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of
the enclosure.
Equipment to Be Labeled:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
Panelboards: Typed directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard
manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or
melamine label.
Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the
transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
Enclosed switches.
Enclosed circuit breakers.
Enclosed controllers.
Variable-speed controllers.
Push-button stations.
Power transfer equipment.
Contactors.
Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
END OF SECTION 260553
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
260553- 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Identification for
Electrical Systems
SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes: Distribution, dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to
1500 kVA.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments
to structure and to supported equipment.
Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B.
Source quality-control reports.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
1.6
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
262200 - 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Low-Voltage
Transformers
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Eaton Corporation; Electrical Sector; Cutler-Hammer Products.
General Electric Company.
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A.
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: Comply with NEMA TP 1 energy-efficiency levels as
verified by testing according to NEMA TP 2.
1.
2.3
Coil Material: Copper.
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A.
Comply with NFPA 70, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B.
Cores: One leg per phase.
C.
Enclosure: Ventilated.
1.
D.
NEMA 250, Type 3R: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound to seal
out moisture and air.
Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
1.
Finish Color: Gray.
E.
Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps
below normal full capacity.
F.
Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with
a maximum of 150-deg C rise above 40-deg C ambient temperature.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
262200 - 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Low-Voltage
Transformers
G.
K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561
requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by
designated K-factor.
1.
2.
3.
H.
Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper
electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
1.
2.
I.
2.4
Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion
corresponding to designated K-factor.
Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.
Unit shall meet requirements of NEMA TP 1 when tested according to NEMA TP 2 with a Kfactor equal to one.
Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and
output terminals.
Include special terminal for grounding the shield.
Neutral: Rated 200 percent of full load current for K-factor rated transformers.
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
2.5
Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer,
mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in
Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and IEEE C57.12.91.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at
location of transformer.
B.
Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located. Covers for
NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures shall not cause accessibility problems.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D.
Install transformers level and plumb on a concrete base with vibration-dampening supports.
Locate transformers away from corners and not parallel to adjacent wall surface.
E.
Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to
reduce noise generation.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
262200 - 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Low-Voltage
Transformers
G.
3.2
Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
B.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
C.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A-486B.
D.
Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate
sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS for
dry-type, air-cooled, low-voltage transformers. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B.
Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.
C.
Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of
transformer connections.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant
deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
Perform two follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at four months and the other at
11 months after Substantial Completion.
Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of
scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning
observations after remedial action.
ADJUSTING
A.
Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy
period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.
Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 5 percent and not being lower
than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap
settings as test results.
B.
Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus
or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.
C.
Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.
END OF SECTION 262200
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
262200 - 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Low-Voltage
Transformers
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Distribution panelboards.
Load centers.
Electronic-grade panelboards.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device,
transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions
and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.5
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings.
Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper;
include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
262416- 1
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Panelboards
B.
Field Quality-Control Reports:
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.6
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
Panelboard Schedules:
balancing.
For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017700 “Closeout
Procedures,” include the following:
1.
2.
1.7
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device that allows adjustments.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
1.8
Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: Two
spares for each panelboard.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards
including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply
with indicated maximum dimensions.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E.
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
F.
Comply with NFPA 70.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
262416- 2
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Panelboards
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards.
B.
Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.
1.10
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations:
1.
2.
Do not install panelboards until, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
panelboards is complete, during the remainder of the construction period.
Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
a.
B.
Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1.
2.
C.
Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
Altitude not exceeding 3300 feet.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
1.11
Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet.
Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed
interruption of electric service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's and
Owner's written permission.
Comply with NFPA 70E.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with
concrete.
1.12
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
262416- 3
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Panelboards
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A.
Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.
1.
Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match
box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
Hinged Front Cover:
Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with
flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.
Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with
enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
Finishes:
a.
b.
7.
Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating
with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat
and thermosetting topcoat.
Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.
Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent
protective cover.
B.
Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.
C.
Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductors; bonded to box.
Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated
from box.
Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as
suitable for nonlinear loads.
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at
opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate
at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity
neutral bus.
Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances
required for future installation of devices.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
262416- 4
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Panelboards
F.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current
available at terminals.
G.
No panelboards installed shall have a ventilated front cover. All panelboard covers shall be solid.
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.3
Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying with
UL 1449 SPD Type 1.
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (PCC Preferred vendor)
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C.
Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
1.
For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
D.
Mains: Circuit breaker and/or Lugs only.
E.
Finished Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim
door. Door in door construction with continuous piano hinge for each panel and for each panel
door. Doors secured with flush vault-type latch with tumbler locks. Keyed alike.
F.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on
circuit breakers.
G.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on
circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires
mechanical release for removal.
2.4
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (PCC Preferred manufacturer)
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
262416- 5
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Panelboards
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C.
Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.
D.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
E.
Doors: Concealed continuous piano hinges; secured with flush vault-type latch with tumbler lock,
for both doors; keyed alike. Door and door front panel.
F.
For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two recessed vault latches with tumbler locks for
both doors. Keyed alike. .
G.
No panelboard installed shall have a ventilated front cover. All panelboard covers shall be solid.
2.5
ELECTRONIC-GRADE PANELBOARDS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Current Technology; a subsidiary of Danahar Corporation.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Liebert Corporation.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (PCC preferred vendor)
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; with factory-installed, integral SPD; labeled by an NRTL for compliance
with UL 67 after installing SPD.
C.
Doors: Concealed continous piano hinges; secured with flush latch.
D.
For doors more than 36 inches high. Provide two recessed vault latches with tumbler locks for
both doors. Keyed alike.
E.
Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.
F.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.
G.
Buses:
1.
2.
H.
Copper phase and neutral buses; 200 percent capacity neutral bus and lugs.
Copper equipment and isolated ground buses.
No panelboard installed shall have a ventinlated front cover. All panelboards covers shall be
solid.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
262416- 6
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Panelboards
2.6
DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. (PCC preferred manufacturer)
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
1.
2.
3.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip
setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted,
field-adjustable trip setting.
Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Instantaneous trip.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less
than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault
protection (6-mA trip).
Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers:
Class B ground-fault
protection (30-mA trip).
Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, singlepole configuration.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
materials.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID)
lighting circuits.
Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage intentional
time delay.
Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a
single unit.
Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
262416- 7
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Panelboards
2.7
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A.
Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device
test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B.
Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and
switchboard class relays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or
have been subjected to water saturation.
C.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
C.
Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
D.
Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1.
Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
E.
Mount panelboards so that maximum height of circuit breakers above finished floor shall not
exceed 18 inches. For panelboards that are to high, mount panelboards so that the bottom of
the cabinets will not be less than six inches above the finished floor. Mount top of trim 90 inches
above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
G.
Stub four GRC empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space
designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four GRC empty conduits into raised floor
space or below slab not on grade. Refer to Section 260533 “ Raceways and boxes for Electrical
Systems” for additional requirements.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
262416- 8
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Panelboards
H.
Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing
load balancing.
I.
Comply with NECA 1.
J.
Install panelboard skirts and panelboard extensions from the bottom of panel to floor and from
the top of the panel to a point 12" above ceiling where noted on plans.
K.
Skirts and extensions shall be the same size as the panelboards and secured to panelboard and
existing surfaces. Provide a ground strip conductor of a 1" 2 copper ground and connect or
ground bus in panelboard.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads[ after balancing panelboard loads];
incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer
or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C.
Panelboard Nameplates:
Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D.
Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,
and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
D.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
E.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
262416- 9
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Panelboards
2.
3.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a.
b.
c.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove
front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instruments and Equipment:
1)
Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record
for device.
F.
Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
G.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified by the manufacture.
C.
Load Balancing:
After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of
the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax
machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.
After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings
before and after changes and submit test records.
Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard,
is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum
requirement.
END OF SECTION 262416
Pima Community College West
Dental Clinic & Dental Lab Renovations
262416- 10
GLHN #1047.15/1047.16
Panelboards
SECTION 262500 - ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - G